2011 Chevrolet Corvette Convertible Owners Manual by stanchfi

VIEWS: 109 PAGES: 436

More Info
									                              2011 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1     Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1                              Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
  Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2                 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2       Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
  Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4                    Warning Lights, Gauges, and                                      Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-18
  Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16                    Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8         Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
  Performance and                                                  Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25                    Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-28
    Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21               Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35                    Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-32
                                                                   Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-55                       Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1                                  Universal Remote System . . . . 5-64                             Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36
 Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2                                                                                   Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10      Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1         Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
 Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13                 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1               Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
 Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16              Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5             Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-55
 Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17            Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18                                                                            Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
 Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19   Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1                          General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
                                                                   Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1         Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1                         Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5    Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2                 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11               Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2           Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18       Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9                                                                           Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22              Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
                                                                  Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1                           Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37                                                                                  Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
                                                                  Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1         Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7             Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2
                          2011 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
 Recommended Fluids,
  Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6
 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16
 Vehicle Data Recording and
  Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
                                                                                                Introduction           iii

                                          This manual describes features that       Canadian Vehicle Owners
                                          may or may not be on your specific
                                          vehicle either because they are           Propriétaires Canadiens
                                          options that you did not purchase         A French language copy of this
                                          or due to changes subsequent to           manual can be obtained from your
                                          the printing of this owner manual.        dealer or from:
                                          Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems,                documentation relating to your            On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and         specific vehicle to confirm each of       ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing            the features found on your vehicle.       concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
in this manual including, but not         For vehicles first sold in Canada,        suivante:
limited to, GM, the GM logo,              substitute the name “General
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET                                                            Helm, Incorporated
                                          Motors of Canada Limited” for             P.O. Box 07130
Emblem, CORVETTE, CORVETTE                Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
GRAND SPORT, ZO6, and ZR1 are                                                       Detroit, MI 48207
                                          it appears in this manual.
trademarks and/or service marks                                                     1-800-551-4123
of General Motors LLC, its                Keep this manual the vehicle for          Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.   quick reference.                          française
                                                                                    www.helminc.com




Litho in U.S.A.
                                                                      ©
Part No. 25961341 B Second Printing                                       2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv      Introduction

Using this Manual                                                                  Symbols
                                                    { WARNING
To quickly locate information                                                      The vehicle has components and
about the vehicle, use the Index           These mean there is something           labels that use symbols instead of
in the back of the manual. It is an        that could hurt you or other            text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the        people.                                 the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where                                                   information relating to a specific
it can be found.                                                                   component, control, message,
                                          Notice: This means there is
                                                                                   gauge, or indicator.
                                          something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and                     property or vehicle damage. This         M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions                                  would not be covered by the              you need to see your owner manual
                                          vehicle's warranty.                      for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
                                                                                   information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or                                                 * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them.                                                                       you need to see a service manual
                                                                                   for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
                                                                                   information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a            A circle with a slash through it is
hazard that could result in injury or     a safety symbol which means “Do
death.                                    Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
                                          this happen.”
                                                                       Introduction   v

Vehicle Symbol Chart                  # : Fog Lamps
Here are some additional symbols      . : Fuel Gauge
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more          + : Fuses
information on the symbol, refer to   3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the Index.                            Changer
9 : Airbag Readiness Light            j : LATCH System Child
# : Air Conditioning                  Restraints
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)       * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls     : : Oil Pressure
         ®
or OnStar                             } : Power
$ : Brake System Warning Light        / : Remote Vehicle Start
" : Charging System                   > : Safety Belt Reminders
I : Cruise Control                    7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
B : Engine Coolant Temperature        d : Traction Control
O : Exterior Lamps                    M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi   Introduction

                    2 NOTES
                                                                                                                                                    In Brief                 1-1

In Brief                                                     Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                             Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                                                                  1-12
                                                                                                                  1-13
                                                                                                                         Performance and Maintenance
                                                                                                                          Traction Control
                                                             Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . .                      1-13     System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
                                                             Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .           1-14    Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Instrument Panel                                             Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         1-15    Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-22
 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
                                                                                                                          ZO6, Z16, and ZR1
                                                            Vehicle Features                                               Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Initial Drive Information                                    Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   1-16
 Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4                                                                            Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-23
                                                             Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        1-17    Driving for Better Fuel
 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)                                  Portable Audio Devices . . . . . .                   1-17
   System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4                                                                  Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
                                                             Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     1-18    Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5        Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .                    1-18
 Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6                                                                        Roadside Assistance
                                                             Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         1-19     Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6     Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .              1-19
 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6                                                                          OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
                                                             Driver Information
 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8                Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          1-19
 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10       Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          1-20
 Sensing System for                                          Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       1-20
   Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-10                 Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      1-21
 Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
 Steering Wheel
   Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-2   In Brief

Instrument Panel
                                                                                                In Brief       1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.              J.   Infotainment on page 7‑1.         S. Telescopic Steering Column
B. Head‐Up Display Controls            K. Dual Automatic Climate Control         Control (If Equipped). See
   (If Equipped). See Head-Up             System on page 8‑1.                    Steering Wheel Adjustment on
   Display (HUD) on page 5‑31.                                                   page 5‑2.
                                       L.   Fuel Door Release Button. See
C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.              Filling the Tank on page 9‑52.    T.   Ignition Positions on page 9‑20.
   See Turn and Lane-Change                 Hatch/Trunk Release Button.       U. Heated Front Seats on page 3‑8
   Signals (Auto Signal) on                 See “Hatch/Trunk Lid Release”        (If Equipped).
   page 6‑4.                                under Hatch on page 2‑10.         V.   Shift Lever (Automatic Shown).
   Cruise Control on page 9‑45.                                                    See Automatic Transmission on
   Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.              M. Instrument Panel Illumination
                                          Control on page 6‑5.                     page 9‑28 or Manual
   Exterior Lamp Controls on                                                       Transmission on page 9‑32.
   page 6‑1.                           N. Data Link Connector (DLC)
                                          (Out of View). See Malfunction      W. Active Handling System on
D. Manual Shift Paddles                   Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18.           page 9‑37.
   (If Equipped). See Automatic                                               X. Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
   Transmission on page 9‑28.          O. Power Folding Top Switch
                                          (If Equipped). See Convertible      Y.   Selective Ride Control on
E. Driver Information Center (DIC)        Top on page 2‑23.                        page 9‑43 (If Equipped).
   on page 5‑25.
                                       P.   Bluetooth Controls                Z.   Cupholders on page 4‑1.
F.   Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.        (If Equipped). See Bluetooth on   AA. Ashtrays on page 5‑8.
G. Windshield Wiper/Washer on               page 7‑18.
   page 5‑4.                                Steering Wheel Controls on             Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑7.
H. Driver Information Center (DIC)          page 5‑3 (If Equipped).           AB. Parking Brake on page 9‑35.
   Buttons. See Driver Information     Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment on        AC. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
   Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.             page 5‑2.
                                                                              AD. Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
I.   Hazard Warning Flashers on        R. Horn on page 5‑4.                       page 10‑55.
     page 6‑4.
1-4      In Brief

Initial Drive                                                                 K : Press to unlock the driver door.
                                                                              Press again within five seconds to
Information                                                                   unlock both doors.
This section provides a brief                                                 Q : Press to lock all doors.
overview about some of the
important features that may or may                                            } : Press and hold for
not be on your specific vehicle.                                              approximately one second to open
                                                                              the hatch/trunk.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be                                          L : Press to sound the horn.
found later in this owner manual.                                             Press any other button on the RKE
                                                                              transmitter to stop it.
Remote Keyless Entry                   Press the button (A) to remove the
                                                                              See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
(RKE) System                                                                  Keyless Entry (RKE) System
                                       key. The key can be used to lock       Operation on page 2‑3.
The RKE transmitter is used to lock    and unlock the glove box and to
and unlock the doors from up to        open the hatch/trunk lid if power to
30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle.   the vehicle is lost. See Hatch on
                                       page 2‑10 for more information.
                                                                                               In Brief       1-5

Door Locks                           From the inside, use the power door      Inside the Vehicle
                                     lock switch (B), located at the top of
From the outside, press Q or K       the door panel, near both windows.
on the keyless access transmitter.   K:   Press to unlock the doors.
                                     Q:   Press to lock the doors.
                                     To open a door from the inside after
                                     it is locked, press the button (C) in
                                     front of the door handle and push
                                     the door open.
                                     See Power Door Locks on page 2‑9.
                                     Loss of Vehicle Electrical
                                     Power
                                                                              Pull the door release handle located
                                     If the vehicle has lost battery power,   on the floor next to the seat.
                                     the driver door can be opened
                                     manually.
When you have the transmitter with
you, you may also unlock and open
the door by squeezing the door
handle sensor (A).
1-6      In Brief

Trunk Release                          Windows                               Seat Adjustment
Opening and Closing the                                                      Manual Seats
Hatch/Trunk
There are three ways to open the
hatch/trunk:
.   Touch the button located above
    the license plate. The keyless
    access transmitter must be
    within three feet of the button.
.   Press V located to the left of
    the steering wheel.
.   Press } on the keyless
                                       The power window switches are
    access transmitter.
                                       located on each door.
For more information, see Hatch on                                           To adjust a manual seat:
                                       Pull up or press down on the front
page 2‑10.                                                                   1. Lift the bar under the front of the
                                       of the switch to raise or lower the
                                       window.                                  seat cushion to unlock the seat.
                                       For more information, see Power       2. Slide the seat to the desired
                                       Windows on page 2‑18.                    position and release the bar.
                                                                             3. Try to move the seat back and
                                                                                forth to make sure it is locked in
                                                                                place.
                                                                             See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑2
                                                                             for more information.
                                                                                               In Brief          1-7

Power Seats                            Power Lumbar and Side                 Reclining Seatbacks
                                       Bolsters




To adjust a power seat, if equipped:                                         To recline a manual seatback:
                                       A. Lumbar Support Control
.   Move the seat forward or                                                 1. Lift the lever on the outboard
    rearward by sliding the control    B. Side Bolster Support Control          side of the seat.
    forward or rearward.               To adjust the support, if equipped:   2. Move the seatback to the
.   Raise or lower the front or rear   .   Move control (A) forward or          desired position, and then
    part of the seat cushion by            rearward to adjust lumbar            release the lever to lock the
    moving the front or rear of the        support.                             seatback in place.
    control up or down.                                                      3. Push and pull on the seatback to
                                       .   Move control (B) up or down to
See Power Seat Adjustment on               adjust the side bolsters.            make sure it is locked.
page 3‑3 for more information.                                               See Reclining Seatbacks on
                                       See Lumbar Adjustment on
                                       page 3‑6 for more information.        page 3‑6 for more information.
1-8      In Brief

Heated Seats                           Memory Features                        Storing Memory Positions
                                                                              To save into memory:
                                                                              1. Adjust the driver seat, both
                                                                                 outside mirrors, and the
                                                                                 telescopic steering column.
                                                                              2. Press and hold “1” until
                                                                                 two beeps sound.
                                                                              3. Repeat for a second driver
                                                                                 position using “2.”
                                                                              To recall:
                                                                              .   On vehicles with an automatic
                                                                                  transmission, press and release
If available, the buttons are on the   On vehicles with the memory                “1” or “2.”
center console. The ignition must be   feature, the controls on the driver        If the vehicle is in P (Park), a
on for this feature to work.           door are used to program and recall        single beep sounds and the
L:   Press to turn on the heated       memory settings for the driver seat,       memory position is recalled after
seat at the high setting.              outside mirrors, and the telescopic        a brief delay.
                                       steering column.
Press again to switch to the low                                                  If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
setting.                                                                          three beeps sound and the
                                                                                  memory position is not recalled.
9:    Press to turn the system off.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑8 for more information.
                                                                                                In Brief      1-9
.   On vehicles with a manual           Easy Exit Driver Seat                  To recall, press and release B.
    transmission, when the vehicle                                             The vehicle must be in P (Park) for
    is on, the parking brake must be    This feature can move the seat
                                        rearward and the telescopic steering   an automatic transmission or the
    set to recall a memory position.                                           parking brake must be set for a
    Press and release “1” or “2.”       column out of the way to allow extra
                                        room to exit the vehicle.              manual transmission. A single beep
    A single beep sounds and the                                               sounds. The seat and telescopic
    memory position is recalled after   B : Press to save and recall the       steering column will move to the
    a brief delay.                      easy exit seat position.               position previously stored for the
                                        To save into memory:                   identified driver.
    If the vehicle is on and the
    parking brake is not set,           1. Recall the desired driving          See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
    three beeps sound and the              position by pressing “1.”           Steering Wheel” under Power Seat
    memory position is not recalled.                                           Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
                                        2. Adjust the seat and the             information.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and             telescopic steering column to
Steering Wheel” under Power Seat           the desired exit position.
Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
                                        3. Press and hold B until
information.
                                           two beeps sound.
                                        4. Repeat for a second driver
                                           position using “2.”
1-10      In Brief
                                      .   Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Safety Belts                              Children (LATCH System)
                                          (Coupe and Convertible Models
                                          Only) on page 3‑43 or Lower
                                          Anchors and Tethers for
                                          Children (LATCH System)
                                          (ZO6 and ZR1 Models Only) on
                                          page 3‑44.                                   United States

                                      Sensing System for
                                      Passenger Airbag
                                      The passenger sensing system will
                                      turn off the right front passenger
                                      frontal airbag and seat‐mounted              Canada and Mexico
Refer to the following sections for   side impact airbag under certain
important information on how to use   conditions. The driver airbags are    See Passenger Sensing System on
safety belts properly.                not affected by this.                 page 3‑30 for important information.
.   Safety Belts on page 3‑9.         The passenger airbag status
                                      indicator will be visible in the
.   How to Wear Safety Belts          rearview mirror when the vehicle is
    Properly on page 3‑13.            started.
.   Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.
                                                                                                    In Brief       1-11

Mirror Adjustment                         2. Use the arrows located on the         Steering Wheel
                                             four-way control pad to move the
Exterior Mirrors                             mirror in the desired direction.
                                                                                   Adjustment
                                          Keep the control in the center
                                          position when not adjusting either
                                          outside mirror.
                                          See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.
                                          Manually fold the mirrors inward
                                          to prevent damage when going
                                          through an automatic car wash.
                                          To fold, pull the mirror toward the
                                          vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
                                          to return it to the original position.
                                          See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Controls for the outside power            Interior Mirror                          The lever is located on the left side
mirrors are located on the                                                         of the steering column.
                                          Vehicles with an automatic dimming
driver door.                              rearview mirror will automatically       To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Move the top control to the left       reduce headlamp glare coming from        1. Pull the lever toward you.
   or right to select either the driver   vehicles that are traveling
                                          behind you.                              2. Move the steering wheel up
   or passenger mirror.
                                                                                      or down.
                                          See Automatic Dimming Rearview
                                          Mirror on page 2‑17.                     3. Release the lever to lock the
                                                                                      steering wheel in place.
1-12      In Brief

Telescopic Steering Column            To adjust the telescopic steering        Reading Lamps
                                      column:                                  The inside rearview mirror includes
                                      1. Push the switch forward to move       two reading lamps. The lamps go on
                                         the wheel away from you.              when a door is opened. When the
                                      2. Pull the switch toward you to         doors are closed, press the lamp
                                         move the wheel closer to you.         buttons to turn on each lamp.

                                      The telescopic steering column           Interior Light Control
                                      position can be stored with your         To adjust the brightness of the
                                      memory settings. See “Memory             interior lights, turn and hold the
                                      Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Wheel”       instrument panel brightness control
                                      under Power Seat Adjustment on           knob located on the left side of the
                                      page 3‑3 for more information.           instrument panel. Push the knob in
                                                                               to turn the lights on or off.
For vehicles with this feature, the   Interior Lighting                        For more information on interior
telescopic steering column control    Courtesy Lamps                           lighting, see:
is located on the right side of the
                                      When any door or the hatch/trunk
                                                                               .   Instrument Panel Illumination
steering column.
                                      lid is opened, the interior lamps will       Control on page 6‑5.
                                      go on, unless it is bright outside.      .   Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.
                                      The courtesy lamps can also be
                                      turned on and off by pressing the
                                      instrument panel brightness knob.
                                                                                                  In Brief          1-13

Exterior Lighting                       5 : Turns on the headlamps               Windshield Wiper/Washer
                                        together with the parking lamps,
                                        sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license
                                        plate lamps, and instrument panel
                                        lights.
                                        Turn and Lane-Change Signal
                                        The turn signal lever has two
                                        upward and downward positions to
Exterior Lamps                          signal a lane change or a turn.          The windshield wiper lever is
The exterior lamp control is located                                             located on the right side of the
                                        .   For a lane change, raise or          steering column.
to the left of the steering wheel, on       lower the lever. The signal
the multifunction lever.                    automatically flashes three          1 : Use for fast wipes.
O : Turn the band with this                 times.                               6 : Use for slow wipes.
symbol on it to operate the exterior
lamps.
                                        .   For a turn, raise or lower the       & : Use to set a delay between
                                            lever all of the way up or down.     wipes.
O:   Turns off all lamps.                   The turn signal will stop flashing
                                                                                 x : Use for a delayed wiping
AUTO: Sets the exterior lamps               when the turn is completed.
                                                                                 cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust
to automatic mode. AUTO mode            For more information, see:               band down for a longer delay or up
turns the exterior lamps on and off     .   Exterior Lamp Controls on            for a shorter delay.
depending on how much light is              page 6‑1.
available outside the vehicle.
                                        .   Turn and Lane-Change Signals
;:     Turns on the parking lamps           (Auto Signal) on page 6‑4.
together with the sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights.
1-14       In Brief

9 : Use to turn off the windshield     Climate Controls
wipers.
                                       With this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
8:    Use for a for a single wiping
cycle. For more wipes, hold the
band longer.
Windshield Washer: Press the
button at the end of the lever until
the washers begin.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.




                                       A. Driver Temperature Control            G. Fan Control
                                       B. Display                               H. Air Delivery Mode Control
                                       C. Passenger Temperature Control         I.   Defrost
                                       D. AUTO                                  J.   Rear Window Defogger
                                       E. Air Recirculation                     See Dual Automatic Climate Control
                                       F.   Air Conditioning                    System on page 8‑1.
                                                                                             In Brief        1-15

Transmission                         wheel spokes, to manually up-shift      One to Four Shift Light
                                     to the next gear, or pulling on the     (Manual Transmission)
Manual Paddle Shift                  paddle, behind the steering wheel
(Automatic Transmission)             spokes to manually down-shift.
                                     The current gear will be displayed
                                     in the Driver Information (DIC),
                                     or the Head-Up Display (HUD),
                                     if the vehicle has either of these
                                     features.
                                     The Manual Paddle Shift system          On vehicles with a manual
                                     can be deactivated by moving the        transmission, when this light comes
                                     shifter from S (Sport Mode) back to     on, you can only shift from 1 (First)
                                     D (Drive), or by holding the up‐shift   to 4 (Fourth) instead of 1 (First) to
                                     paddle for more than one second.        2 (Second).
                                     The Manual Paddle Shift system          For more information about shifting
                                     will not allow either an up-shift or    for the best fuel economy, see
                                     a down-shift, if the vehicle speed      Manual Transmission on page 9‑32.
To operate the Manual Paddle Shift   is too fast or too slow, nor will it
system, the automatic transmission   allow a start from 4 (Fourth) or
shifter must be in S (Sport Mode).   higher gear.
The system is activated by pushing
the paddle, above the steering       See Automatic Transmission on
                                     page 9‑28.
1-16      In Brief

Vehicle Features                                                       O / e : Turn to select radio
                                                                       stations.
Radio(s)                                                               © SEEK ¨ :   Press to seek stations.
                                                                       © SCAN ¨ :   Press and hold to scan
                                                                       stations.
                                                                       4:   Press to change the information
                                                                       that shows on the display while
                                                                       listening to the radio.
                                                                       For more information about these
                                                                       and other radio features, see
                                                                       Infotainment on page 7‑1 and
                                                                       Operation on page 7‑2.
                                                                       Setting Preset Stations
                                                                       Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
                                                                       and six AM, and if equipped,
                                                                       six XM1, and six XM2) can be
                                                                       programmed.
                                                                       To program presets:
                              Radio with CD                            1. Turn the radio on.

Top Knob: Press to turn the           BAND: Press to switch between    2. Press BAND to select FM1,
system on and off. Turn to increase   FM1, FM2, AM, and if equipped,      FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.
or decrease the volume.               XM1 and XM2.                     3. Tune in the desired station.
                                                                                           In Brief       1-17

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the      Satellite Radio                        Portable Audio Devices
   equalization.
                                    XM is a satellite radio service        This vehicle may have an auxiliary
5. Press and hold one of the six    based in the 48 contiguous United      input jack, located on the audio
   numbered pushbuttons until the   States and 10 Canadian provinces.      faceplate. External devices such as
   radio beeps once.                XM satellite radio has a wide          iPod®, MP3 players, etc. can be
6. Repeat the steps for each        variety of programming and             connected to the auxiliary input jack
   pushbutton.                      commercial-free music, coast to        using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
                                    coast, and in digital-quality sound.   cable.
See Operation on page 7‑2.
                                    A fee is required to receive the       See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”
Setting the Clock                   XM service.                            under Auxiliary Devices on
To set the clock:                   For more information, refer to:        page 7‑17.
1. Press and hold H until the       .   www.xmradio.com or call
   correct hour displays.               1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
2. Press and hold M until the       .   www.xmradio.ca or call
   correct minute displays.             1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Clock on page 5‑6.              See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.
1-18      In Brief

Bluetooth®                             Steering Wheel Controls              b g : Press to turn on and off the
                                                                            vehicle speakers. Press and hold
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
                                                                            longer than two seconds to interact
system, it allows users with a
                                                                            with the OnStar® or Bluetooth
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
                                                                            systems.
make and receive hands-free calls
using the vehicle’s audio system                                            c : Press to reject an incoming
and controls.                                                               call, or to end a call.
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone                                            e + / e − : Press to Increase or
must be paired with the Bluetooth                                           decrease volume.
system before it can be used in the                                         w / x : Press to change radio
vehicle. Not all phones will support                                        stations or select tracks on a CD.
all functions. For more information,
visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.                                                 1 to 6: Press to play stations that
                                                                            are programmed on the radio preset
For more information, see Bluetooth    For vehicles with steering wheel     pushbuttons.
on page 7‑18.                          controls, some audio controls can    For more information, see Steering
                                       be adjusted at the steering wheel.   Wheel Controls on page 5‑3.
                                                                                               In Brief        1-19

Cruise Control                          Navigation System                      Driver Information
                                        If the vehicle has a navigation        Center (DIC)
                                        system, there is a separate            The DIC display is located at the
                                        Navigation System Manual that          bottom of the instrument panel
                                        includes information on the radio,     cluster. It shows the status of many
                                        audio players, and navigation          vehicle systems and enables
                                        system.                                access to the personalization menu.
                                        The navigation system provides
                                        detailed maps of most major
                                        freeways and roads. After a
                                        destination has been set, the
                                        system provides turn-by-turn
                                        instructions for reaching the
                                        destination. In addition, the system
The cruise controls are located at      can help locate a variety of points
the end of the multifunction lever.     of interest (POIs), such as banks,
9 : Turns the system off.               airports, restaurants, and more.
R : Turns the system on.                See the Navigation System Manual
                                        for more information.
+ : Makes the vehicle accelerate or
resume a previously set speed.
                                                                               The DIC buttons are located on
T:     Press the button at the end of                                          the instrument panel to the right
the lever to set the speed.                                                    of the instrument panel cluster.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑45.                                               . 4 : Press to display fuel
                                                                               information such as fuel economy
                                                                               and range.
1-20      In Brief

2 : Press to display gauge              Vehicle Personalization               Power Outlets
information like oil pressure and       Some vehicle features can be          The accessory power outlet can be
temperature, coolant temperature,       programmed by using the DIC           used to plug in electrical equipment,
automatic transmission fluid            buttons located to the right of the   such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
temperature (if equipped), battery      instrument panel cluster. The
voltage, and front/rear tire            features that can be programmed       The accessory power outlet is
pressures.                              include:                              located inside the center console
                                                                              storage compartment, on the
TRIP: Press to display your total       .   Units                             forward left side.
and trip distance driven, the elapsed
time function, your average speed,
                                        .   Memory Features                   Remove the cover to access and
and the engine oil life.                .   Lighting Features                 replace when not in use.
OPTION: Press to choose personal        .   Lock and Unlock Feedback          See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
options that are available on your      .   Door Lock and Unlock Settings
vehicle, depending on the options                                             Roof Panel
your vehicle is equipped with, such     .   Language
as door locks, easy entry seats, and                                          On vehicles with a removable
                                        .   Personalization Name              roof panel, there are three release
language.
                                        See Vehicle Personalization on        latches. Two are located on the front
RESET: Press, along with the other      page 5‑55.                            of the roof panel and the other is
buttons, to reset system functions,                                           located on the back of the roof
select personal options, and turn off                                         panel. See “Removing the Roof
or acknowledge messages on                                                    Panel” under Roof Panel on
the DIC.                                                                      page 2‑19.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑25.
                                                                                                  In Brief        1-21

Until you are sure you can remove      Performance and                          The vehicle has an Active
the roof panel by yourself, have                                                Handling System that helps
someone help you. Once removed,        Maintenance                              maintain directional control of the
the roof panel should always be                                                 vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
stored properly in the rear storage    Traction Control                         See Active Handling System on
compartment.                                                                    page 9‑37.
                                       System (TCS)
For more information:                                                           The vehicle may have Competitive
                                       The traction control system limits       Driving Mode (except ZR1),
.   See “Storing the Roof Panel”       wheel spin. The system turns on
    under Roof Panel on page 2‑19.                                              Performance Traction
                                       automatically every time the vehicle     Management (ZR1), and Launch
.   See “Installing the Roof Panel”    is started.                              Control systems designed to allow
    under Roof Panel on page 2‑19.     .   To turn off traction control,        increased performance while
                                           press and release d on the           accelerating and cornering. See
Convertible                                console. d illuminates and
                                                                                Competitive Driving Mode on
                                                                                page 9‑39.
If equipped, the convertible top can       the appropriate DIC message
be lowered and stowed under the            displays. See Ride Control
tonneau cover behind the rear seat.        System Messages on page 5‑44.
                                                                                Towing
For step-by-step instructions, see                                              The vehicle was neither designed
                                       .   Press and release the button
Convertible Top on page 2‑23.                                                   nor intended to be towed with any of
                                           again to turn on traction control.
                                                                                its wheels on the ground.
                                       See Traction Control System (TCS)
                                       on page 9‑36.                            See Towing the Vehicle on
                                                                                page 10‑86 and Recreational
                                                                                Vehicle Towing on page 10‑86.
1-22      In Brief

Tire Pressure Monitor                    indicator that the tire pressures are   Jump Starting the Battery
                                         getting low and the tires need to be    The battery of ZO6, ZR1, and
This vehicle may have a Tire             inflated to the proper pressure.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).                                                  manual transmission Z16 (Grand
                                         The TPMS does not replace normal        Sport) coupe models is in the rear
                                         monthly tire maintenance. It is the     of the vehicle. You do not need to
                                         driver’s responsibility to maintain     access the battery for jump starting.
                                         correct tire pressures.                 There are remote positive (+) and
                                         See Tire Pressure Monitor System        negative (−) terminals under the
                                         on page 10‑68.                          hood for this purpose. See Battery
                                                                                 on page 10‑43 and Jump Starting
                                                                                 on page 10‑82.
The TPMS warning light alerts you        ZO6, Z16, and ZR1
to a significant loss in pressure of     Features                                Brake Noise
one of the vehicle's tires. If the                                               Under certain weather or operating
warning light comes on, stop as          Checking Engine Oil
                                                                                 conditions, occasional brake noise
soon as possible and inflate the         ZO6, ZR1, and manual transmission       might be heard with the vehicle's
tires to the recommended pressure        Z16 (Grand Sport) coupe models          performance braking system. This
shown on the Tire and Loading            have a high performance dry sump        brake system is designed for
Information label. See Vehicle Load      lubrication system. This system         superior fade resistance and
Limits on page 9‑14. The warning         operates differently than a standard    consistent operation using high
light will remain on until the tire      engine lubrication system. See          performance brake pads. Brake
pressure is corrected.                   Engine Oil on page 10‑15.               noise is normal and does not affect
During cooler conditions, the low tire   You should check the oil level          system performance. See Braking
pressure warning light may appear        only after the engine has been          on page 9‑3.
when the vehicle is first started and    thoroughly warmed up and then
then turn off. This may be an early      shut off for at least five minutes.
                                         This ensures that the oil level
                                         reading obtained will be accurate.
                                                                                                  In Brief         1-23

Car Wash Guidelines                      Engine Oil Life System                  Driving for Better Fuel
Automatic car washes are not             The engine oil life system calculates   Economy
recommended for this vehicle.            engine oil life based on vehicle use
Some car washes cause damage to                                                  Driving habits can affect fuel
                                         and displays a DIC message when         mileage. Here are some driving tips
the vehicle, the wheels, and the         it is necessary to change the engine
convertible top, if the vehicle is so                                            to get the best fuel economy
                                         oil and filter. The oil life system     possible.
equipped.                                should be reset to 100% only
If you drive the vehicle through an      following an oil change.
                                                                                 .   Avoid fast starts and accelerate
automatic car wash that does not                                                     smoothly.
                                         Resetting the Oil Life System
have enough clearance for the                                                    .   Brake gradually and avoid
undercarriage and/or wide rear tires     1. Press the TRIP button so the             abrupt stops.
and wheels, you could damage the            OIL LIFE percentage is
                                            displayed.
                                                                                 .   Avoid idling the engine for long
vehicle. Verify with the manager of
                                                                                     periods of time.
the car wash that the vehicle will fit   2. Press RESET and hold for
before entering the car wash or use         two seconds. OIL LIFE
                                                                                 .   When road and weather
a touchless car wash. See “Washing          REMAINING 100% will appear.              conditions are appropriate, use
Your Vehicle” under Exterior Care                                                    cruise control, if equipped.
on page 10‑87.                           See Engine Oil Life System on
                                         page 10‑22.
                                                                                 .   Always follow posted speed
                                                                                     limits or drive more slowly when
                                                                                     conditions require.
                                                                                 .   Keep vehicle tires properly
                                                                                     inflated.
                                                                                 .   Combine several trips into a
                                                                                     single trip.
1-24       In Brief
.   Replace the vehicle's tires with
    the same TPC Spec number
                                       Roadside Assistance                     Roadside Assistance and OnStar
                                                                               (U.S. and Canada)
    molded into the tire's sidewall    Program
    near the size.                                                             If you have an active OnStar
                                       U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
                                                                               subscription, press the Q button
.   Follow recommended scheduled       TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438        and the current GPS location will be
    maintenance.
                                       Canada: 1-800-268-6800                  sent to an OnStar advisor who will
Premium Fuel                                                                   assess your problem, contact
                                       Mexico: 01-800-466-0800                 Roadside Assistance, and relay
This vehicle's engine was designed
                                       As the owner of a new Chevrolet,        your exact location to get the help
to use premium unleaded gasoline.
                                       you are automatically enrolled in the   you need.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑49.                             Roadside Assistance program.
                                                                               Online Owner Center (U.S. and
                                       See Roadside Assistance Program         Canada)
Battery                                (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 or
                                                                               The Online Owner Center is a
                                       Roadside Assistance Program
This vehicle has a maintenance free                                            complimentary service that includes
                                       (Mexico) on page 13‑10 for more
battery. See Battery on page 10‑43                                             online service reminders, vehicle
                                       information.
and Jump Starting on page 10‑82.                                               maintenance tips, online owner
                                                                               manual, special privileges,
For ZO6, ZR1, and manual                                                       and more.
transmission Z16 (Grand Sport)
coupe models the battery is located                                            Sign up today at:
in the rear hatch/trunk area. Access                                           www.chevyownercenter.com
to the battery is not necessary to                                             (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
jump start the vehicle. There are
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminals in the engine
compartment.
                                                                                            In Brief       1-25

OnStar®                              ] : Push this red emergency            For a full description of OnStar
                                     button to get priority help from       services and system limitations,
                                     specially trained OnStar Emergency     see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
                                     Advisors.                              the glove box.
                                     X : Push this button for hands‐free,   OnStar service is subject to the
                                     voice‐activated calling and to give    OnStar Terms and Conditions
                                     voice commands for Turn‐by‐Turn        included in the OnStar Glove
                                     Navigation.                            Box Kit.
OnStar uses several innovative       Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle          OnStar service requires wireless
technologies and live Advisors to    Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,       communication networks and the
provide a wide range of safety,      Remote Door Unlock, Roadside           Global Positioning System (GPS)
security, navigation, diagnostics,   Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn               satellite network. Not all OnStar
and calling services.                Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling     services are available everywhere
                                     are available on most vehicles. Not    or on all vehicles at all times.
Automatic Crash Response
                                     all OnStar services are available on   OnStar service can’t work unless
In a crash, built‐in sensors can     all vehicles. For more information     your vehicle is in a place where
automatically alert an OnStar        see the OnStar Owner's Guide or        OnStar has an agreement with a
Advisor who is immediately           visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or         wireless service provider for service
connected to the vehicle to see if   www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact        in that area, and the wireless
you need help.                       OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR               service provider has coverage,
                                     (1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY                network capacity, reception, and
How OnStar Service Works
                                     1‐877‐248‐2080, or push Q to           technology compatible with OnStar
Q : This blue button connects        speak with an OnStar Advisor           service. Service involving location
you to a specially trained OnStar    24 hours a day, 7 days a week.         information about your vehicle
Advisor to verify your account                                              can’t work unless GPS signals
information and to answer                                                   are available, unobstructed, and
questions.                                                                  compatible with the OnStar
1-26       In Brief

hardware. The vehicle has to have         See Radio Frequency Statement on       If the light next to the OnStar
a working electrical system and           page 13‑19 for information             buttons is red, the system may not
adequate battery power for the            regarding Part 15 of the Federal       be functioning properly. Push Q
OnStar equipment to operate.              Communications Commission (FCC)        and request a vehicle diagnostic
OnStar service may not work if the        rules and Industry Canada              check. If the light appears clear
OnStar equipment isn’t properly           Standards RSS-210/220/310.             (no light is appearing), your OnStar
installed or you haven’t maintained                                              subscription has expired and all
it and your vehicle is in good            OnStar Steering Wheel
                                          Controls                               services have been deactivated.
working order and in compliance
                                                                                 Push Q to confirm that the OnStar
with all government regulations.          This vehicle may have a b g / c
If you try to add, connect, or modify                                            equipment is active.
                                          x Talk/Mute button that can be
any equipment or software in your
                                          used to interact with OnStar           OnStar®
vehicle, OnStar service may not
                                          Hands-Free Calling. See Steering       If the vehicle is equipped with an
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
                                          Wheel Controls on page 5‑3 for         active OnStar system, that system
control may prevent service to you,
                                          more information.                      may also record data in crash or
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather, electrical system design         On some vehicles, the mute button      near crash-like situations. The
and architecture of your vehicle,         can be used to dial numbers into       OnStar Terms and Conditions
damage to important parts of your         voice mail systems, or to dial phone   provides information on data
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone     extensions. See the OnStar Owner's     collection and use and is available
network congestion or jamming.            Guide for more information.            in the OnStar Glove Box Kit, at
                                                                                 www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
                                          Your Responsibility                    www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
                                          Increase the volume of the radio if    pushing Q and speaking to an
                                          the OnStar Advisor cannot be           Advisor.
                                          heard.
                                                                                                                   Keys, Doors and Windows   2-1

Keys, Doors and                                                 Exterior Mirrors
                                                                 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        2-16
Windows                                                          Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                                                                   2-16
                                                                                                                   2-16
                                                                 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      2-17
Keys and Locks                                                   Automatic Dimming Mirror . . .                    2-17
 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2   Interior Mirrors
 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)                                      Automatic Dimming Rearview
  System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3          Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
  System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3                    Windows
 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8            Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9                    Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-10                         Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
                                                                Roof
Doors                                                            Roof Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
 Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10      Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vehicle Security
 Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        2-13
 Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . .                   2-13
 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     2-14
 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . .                 2-14
2-2    Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks                                                             the hatch/trunk lid if power to the
                                                                           vehicle is lost. See Hatch on
                                                                           page 2‑10 for more information.
Keys

        { WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is dangerous for many
reasons; children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the
RKE transmitter in the vehicle                                             Press the button (A) near the bottom
and they could be seriously                                                of the RKE transmitter to remove
injured or killed if caught in the                                         the key. Never pull the key out
path of a closing window. Do not                                           without pressing the button.
leave the RKE transmitter in a
vehicle with children.



                                     The key located inside the RKE
                                     transmitter can be used to lock and
                                     unlock the glove box and to open
                                                                         Keys, Doors and Windows                2-3

This vehicle has a keyless access       Remote Keyless Entry                   Remote Keyless Entry
system with pushbutton start. See
Ignition Positions on page 9‑20 for
                                        (RKE) System                           (RKE) System Operation
information on starting the vehicle.    See Radio Frequency Statement on       The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Notice: If you ever lose your           page 13‑19 for information             transmitter functions work up to
transmitter(s) and/or key, it could     regarding Part 15 of the Federal       30 m (100 ft) away from the vehicle.
be difficult to get into your           Communications Commission (FCC)
                                        rules and Industry Canada              Keyless Unlocking
vehicle. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in. Be       Standards RSS-210/220/310.             Press the door handle sensor
sure you have a spare transmitter       If there is a decrease in the RKE      to unlock and open the doors if
and/or key.                             operating range:                       the RKE transmitter is within range.
                                                                               See Door Locks on page 2‑8
If you are locked out of the vehicle,   .   Check the distance. The            and “Passive Door Unlock”
contact Roadside Assistance. See            transmitter may be too far from    under Vehicle Personalization on
Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.           the vehicle.                       page 5‑55 for additional information.
and Canada) on page 13‑8 or             .   Check the location. Other
Roadside Assistance Program
                                            vehicles or objects may be
(Mexico) on page 13‑10.
                                            blocking the signal.
                                        .   Check the transmitter's battery.
                                            See “Battery Replacement” later
                                            in this section.
                                        .   If the transmitter is still not
                                            working correctly, see your
                                            dealer or a qualified technician
                                            for service.
2-4      Keys, Doors and Windows

Keyless Locking                       There are other conditions that        K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
The doors lock after several          can affect the performance of the      only the driver door. Press K twice
seconds if all doors are closed and   transmitter. See Remote Keyless
                                                                             within five seconds to unlock both
at least one RKE transmitter has      Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
                                                                             doors. The interior lamps may
been removed from the interior of                                            come on.
the vehicle. To customize whether
the doors automatically lock when                                            Pressing K also recalls the memory
exiting the vehicle, see “Passive                                            settings. See “Memory Seat,
Door Locking” under Vehicle                                                  Mirrors, and Steering Wheel” under
Personalization on page 5‑55 for                                             Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3
additional information.                                                      for more information.
Keyless Trunk Opening                                                        } (Hatch/Trunk): Press and
                                                                             hold for about one second to unlock
Press the hatch/trunk release                                                the hatch/trunk. If the engine is
button located on the rear of the                                            running, the shift lever must be
hatch/trunk lid above the license                                            in P (Park) for an automatic
plate to open the trunk if the RKE                                           transmission. For a manual
transmitter is within range. See      This vehicle comes with two            transmission, the shift lever must
Hatch on page 2‑10 for additional     transmitters.                          be in N (Neutral) with the parking
information.                                                                 brake set.
                                      Q (Lock):     Press once to lock the
                                      doors. When Q is pressed twice,
                                      the lights flash and the horn sounds
                                      to confirm locking.
                                                                      Keys, Doors and Windows               2-5

L (Panic):   Press to sound the       can be reprogrammed so that lost
horn. Press any other button on       or stolen transmitters no longer
the RKE transmitter to stop it.       work. Each vehicle can have up to
                                      four transmitters programmed to it.
The vehicle comes with
two transmitters. Each transmitter    Programming with a Recognized
will have a number on top of it,      Transmitter
“1” or “2.” These numbers             A new transmitter can be
correspond to the driver of the       programmed to the vehicle when
vehicle. For example, the memory      there is one recognized transmitter.
seat position for driver 1 will be    For vehicles sold in Canada, two
recalled when using the transmitter   recognized transmitters are required
labeled “1,” if enabled through the   to program a new transmitter.
DIC. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,                                              7. Place the new transmitter in
and Steering Wheel” under Power       1. The vehicle must be off.               the glove box transmitter pocket
Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 and       2. Both the recognized and new            with the buttons facing the
Vehicle Personalization on               transmitters must be with you.         passenger side.
page 5‑55 for more information.                                              8. A beep sounds when
                                      3. Insert the vehicle key into the
Programming Transmitters                 key cylinder located above the         programming is complete.
to the Vehicle                           license plate.                         The DIC displays READY FOR
                                                                                #3 or 4, or MAXIMUM NUMBER
Only RKE transmitters                 4. Open the hatch/trunk.                  OF FOBS LEARNED.
programmed to this vehicle will       5. Turn the key five times within
work. If a transmitter is lost or        five seconds.
stolen, a replacement can be
purchased and programmed              6. The DIC displays READY FOR
through your dealer. The vehicle         FOB #2, 3 or 4.
2-6      Keys, Doors and Windows

9. To program additional                                                     6. The DIC message displays
   transmitters, repeat Step 7.                                                 OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN.
   Press Acc. on the ignition switch                                         7. Press Acc. on the ignition
   if programming is complete.                                                  switch.
10. Press K on each newly                                                    8. The DIC reads WAIT
    programmed transmitter to                                                   10 MINUTES and counts down
    complete the process.                                                       to zero.
Programming without a                                                        9. The DIC displays
Recognized Transmitter                                                          OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN
This procedure requires three                                                   again.
10-minute cycles to complete the                                             10. Press Acc. on the ignition
programming process. United            2. Place the new transmitter in           switch.
States owners are permitted to            the glove box transmitter pocket
                                                                             11. Steps 8, 9, and 10 will be
program a new transmitter to              with the buttons facing the
                                                                                 repeated two more times.
their vehicle when a recognized           passenger side.
transmitter is not available. The                                            12. A beep sounds and the DIC
                                       3. Insert the vehicle key into the
Canadian immobilizer standard                                                    reads READY FOR FOB #1. All
                                          key cylinder located above the
requires that Canadian owners see                                                previously known transmitter
                                          license plate.
their dealer for programming new                                                 programming has been erased.
transmitters when two recognized       4. Open the hatch/trunk.
                                                                             13. A beep sounds once
transmitters are not available.        5. Turn the key five times within         programming in complete.
1. The vehicle must be off.               five seconds.                          The DIC displays READY
                                                                                 FOR FOB #2.
                                                                       Keys, Doors and Windows                   2-7

    To program additional              Starting the Vehicle with a Low
    transmitters, take transmitter 1   Transmitter Battery
    out of the transmitter pocket
    and place transmitter 2 in the     If the transmitter battery is weak,
    pocket. Up to four transmitters    the DIC may display NO FOBS
    can be programmed. The DIC         DETECTED when trying to start the
    then displays MAXIMUM              vehicle. To start the vehicle, place
    NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED             the transmitter in the glove box
    and exits the                      transmitter pocket with the buttons
    programming mode.                  facing the passenger side. Then,
                                       with the vehicle in P (Park) for an
    Press Acc. on the ignition         automatic transmission, press the
    switch to complete the process.    brake pedal and /. If the vehicle
                                                                              1. Separate the transmitter with a
14. Press Acc. on the ignition         has a manual transmission, press          flat, thin object inserted into the
    switch if programming is           the clutch and /. Replace the             slot on the side or back of the
    complete.                          transmitter battery as soon as            transmitter.
15. Press K on each newly              possible. Change the transmitter
                                                                              2. Remove the old battery. Do not
    programmed transmitter to          battery if the DIC displays FOB
                                                                                 use a metal object.
    complete the process.              BATTERY LOW.
                                                                              3. Insert the new battery, positive
                                       Battery Replacement                       side facing down. Replace with a
                                       Notice: When replacing the                CR2032 or equivalent battery.
                                       battery, do not touch any of the       4. Reassemble the transmitter.
                                       circuitry on the transmitter. Static
                                       from your body could damage the
                                       transmitter.
2-8       Keys, Doors and Windows

Door Locks                                      WARNING (Continued)
           { WARNING                        .   Young children who get into
Unlocked doors can be                           unlocked vehicles may be
dangerous.                                      unable to get out. A child can
  .    Passengers — especially                  be overcome by extreme heat
      children — can easily open                and can suffer permanent
      the doors and fall out of a               injuries or even death from
      moving vehicle. When a door               heat stroke. Always lock your
      is locked it will not open. You           vehicle whenever you
      increase the chance of being              leave it.
                                                                                 When you have the transmitter with
      thrown out of the vehicle in a        .   Outsiders can easily enter       you, you may also unlock and open
      crash if the doors are not                through an unlocked door         the door by squeezing the door
      locked. So, wear safety belts             when you slow down or stop       handle sensor (A). You do not have
      properly and lock the doors               your vehicle. Locking your       to press the unlock button on the
      whenever you drive.                       doors can help prevent this      transmitter. You will be able to open
                            (Continued)         from happening.                  the door when you press the door
                                                                                 handle sensor and the vehicle
                                          There are several ways to lock and     recognizes your keyless access
                                          unlock your vehicle.                   transmitter. When the passenger
                                                                                 door is opened first, the driver door
                                          From the outside, press the lock or    will also unlock.
                                          unlock button on the keyless access
                                          transmitter.                           From the inside, use the power door
                                                                                 lock switch (B) located at the top of
                                                                                 the door panel near both windows.
                                                                                 See Power Door Locks on page 2‑9.
                                                                        Keys, Doors and Windows                    2-9

To open a door from the inside,                                                 Power Door Locks
press the button (C) in front of the
door handle and push the door                                                   The power door lock switches are
open. You will hear a tone when                                                 located on the doors.
the button is pressed.                                                          There is an indicator light on the
If power to the vehicle or the                                                  rear of the door near the window.
keyless access transmitter is lost,                                             K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
there are two ways to open                                                      doors.
the door:
                                                                                When pressed, a beep sounds.
                                                                                If the door is closed, the light blinks
                                                                                twice. If the door is open, the light
                                                                                flashes.
                                        .   From outside the vehicle, use
                                            the key in the cylinder above the   Q (Lock):   Press to lock the doors.
                                            license plate to open the hatch.    When pressed, a beep sounds.
                                            Then, use the door release tab,     If the door is closed when
                                            located on the carpet inside the    pressed, the light comes on for a
                                            hatch on the driver side of the     few seconds, then turns off. If the
                                            vehicle. Pull the tab to unlock     door is open when pressed, the
                                            and unlatch the driver door. See    light stays on.
                                            Keys on page 2‑2 for information
                                            on opening the hatch during a
                                            loss of power.
.   From inside the vehicle, use the
    door release handle located on
    the floor next to each seat. Pull
    the handle up to unlock and
    unlatch the door.
2-10       Keys, Doors and Windows

Automatic Door Locks                     With the vehicle stopped and the       Doors
                                         engine running, door unlocking can
The vehicle is programmed so that        be programmed through the Driver
when the doors are closed, the           Information Center (DIC). This         Hatch
ignition is on, and the shift lever is   allows the driver to choose various
moved out of P (Park) for automatic
transmissions, or when vehicle
                                         unlock settings. For programming                 { WARNING
                                         information, see Vehicle
speed becomes faster than 13 km/h        Personalization on page 5‑55.          Exhaust gases can enter the
(8 mph) for manual transmissions,                                               vehicle if it is driven with the
both doors will lock.                    Lockout Protection                     liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
Use the power door unlock switch to                                             any objects that pass through the
                                         Your vehicle can be programmed         seal between the body and the
unlock the door when the vehicle is
                                         to sound the horn three times and      trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
not in P (Park). When the door is
                                         unlock the driver door when both
closed again, the doors will lock                                               exhaust contains Carbon
                                         doors are closed and there is a
either when your foot is removed                                                Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
                                         keyless access transmitter inside
from the brake or the vehicle speed                                             seen or smelled. It can cause
                                         the vehicle. When the driver door
becomes faster than                                                             unconsciousness and even death.
                                         is opened, a reminder chime will
13 km/h (8 mph).
                                         sound continuously. The vehicle will   If the vehicle must be driven with
Automatic Door Unlock                    remain locked only when at least       the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
                                         one transmitter has been removed
The vehicle is programmed so that        from the vehicle and both doors are
                                                                                 .   Close all of the windows.
when the shift lever is moved into       closed. See Vehicle Personalization     .   Fully open the air outlets on
P (Park) for automatic transmission      on page 5‑55.                               or under the instrument
vehicles or when the ignition is                                                     panel.
turned OFF or is in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) for manual                                                                        (Continued)
transmission vehicles, both doors
will unlock.
                                                                        Keys, Doors and Windows                  2-11


      WARNING (Continued)
                                        Notice: Do not store heavy or             } (Hatch/Trunk) : Press this
                                        sharp objects in the rear storage         button on the keyless access
                                        compartments located in the               transmitter. See Remote Keyless
  .   Adjust the Climate Control        hatch/trunk area. The objects
      system to a setting that                                                    Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.
                                        could damage the underbody.
      brings in only outside air and
      set the fan speed to the          Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
      highest setting. See Climate
                                        There are several ways to release
      Control System in the Index.
                                        the hatch/trunk lid. If your vehicle
  .   If the vehicle is equipped with   has an automatic transmission, the
      a power liftgate, disable the     shift lever must be in P (Park). For
      power liftgate function.          manual transmission vehicles, the
 For more information about             parking brake must be set when the
 carbon monoxide, see Engine            ignition is started for the hatch/trunk
                                        release to operate. The parking
 Exhaust on page 9‑26.
                                        brake does not need to be set when
                                        the ignition is off for the hatch/trunk
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk         release to operate. See Parking
lid forcefully or from the sides        Brake on page 9‑35.                       Press the hatch/trunk release button
can cause damage to the glass,                                                    located on the rear of the hatch/
the defogger or the weather
                                        V    (Hatch/Trunk) : Press this           trunk lid above the license plate, as
                                        button, located on the instrument         long as you have your transmitter
stripping. Be sure objects will fit
                                        panel to the left of the steering         with you.
in the hatch/trunk area before
                                        wheel. The theft-deterrent alarm
closing the hatch/trunk lid. When
                                        system must not be armed.
closing the hatch/trunk lid, gently
pull down from the center.
2-12       Keys, Doors and Windows

If your vehicle has lost battery        Emergency Trunk Release            The emergency trunk release
power, open the hatch/trunk using       Handle (Coupe)                     handle is only intended to aid a
the vehicle key. See Keys on                                               person trapped in a latched trunk,
page 2‑2 for more information.                                             enabling them to open the trunk
The key lock cylinder is located on                                        from the inside.
the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above                                      There is a glow-in-the-dark
the license plate. Turn the vehicle                                        emergency trunk release handle
key clockwise in the lock.                                                 located on the rear wall of the trunk
Closing the Rear Compartment                                               below the latch. This handle will
(Except Convertible)                                                       glow following exposure to light. Pull
                                                                           the release handle down to open
To close the rear compartment
                                                                           the trunk from the inside.
lid of your coupe, pull down on the
rear edge of the lid. Lower it until
the power pull down latch feature
activates; it will close the rest of
the way and latch automatically.        Notice: Do not use the
                                        emergency trunk release handle
                                        as a tie-down or anchor point
                                        when securing items in the trunk
                                        as it could damage the handle.
                                                                         Keys, Doors and Windows                 2-13

Vehicle Security                          Arming the System                      If a door or the hatch/trunk is
                                                                                 opened without using the RKE
This vehicle has theft-deterrent          To arm the system, press Q on the      transmitter, the alarm goes off. The
features; however, they do not make       RKE transmitter, or open the door      horn sounds for two minutes, then
it impossible to steal.                   and lock the door with the power       goes off to save battery power. The
                                          door lock switch. The security light   vehicle will not start without a RKE
Anti-Theft Alarm System                   should flash. Remove the RKE           transmitter present.
                                          transmitter from inside the vehicle
This vehicle has a theft-deterrent        and close the door. The security       The theft-deterrent system does not
alarm system.                             light stops flashing and stays on.     arm if the driver door is locked with
                                          After 30 seconds, the light should     the power door lock switch after the
                                          turn off.                              doors are closed.

                                          The vehicle can be programmed to       If the RKE transmitter is removed
                                          automatically lock the doors and       from the vehicle while a passenger
                                          arm the theft-deterrent system when    is in it, have them lock the doors
                                          you exit the vehicle. See Vehicle      after they are closed. The alarm will
                                          Personalization on page 5‑55.          not arm, so the passenger will not
The security light flashes if a door                                             set it off.
is open and locked with the power
door lock switch.
If this light stays on while the engine
is running, the vehicle needs
service.
2-14       Keys, Doors and Windows

Testing the Alarm                       Disarming the System                     Immobilizer
To test the system use the following    Press the unlock button on the RKE       See Radio Frequency Statement on
procedure.                              transmitter or squeeze the door          page 13‑19 for information
1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is     handle sensor while the transmitter      regarding Part 15 of the Federal
   latched.                             is near the vehicle to unlock a door.    Communications Commission (FCC)
                                        Unlocking a door any other way sets      rules and Industry Canada
2. Lower the window on the              off the alarm. If the alarm sounds,      Standards RSS-210/220/310.
   driver door.                         press the unlock button on the RKE
3. Manually arm the system.             transmitter to disarm it.                Immobilizer Operation
4. Close the doors and wait             Do not leave the key or device           The vehicle has a passive
   30 seconds.                          that disarms or deactivates the          theft-deterrent system.
                                        theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
5. Reach through the open window                                                 The system is automatically armed
   and manually pull the release                                                 when the ignition is turned off.
   lever on the floor.
                                                                                 The immobilization system is
6. Press the unlock button on the                                                disarmed when the ignition is turned
   transmitter to turn off the alarm.                                            to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and
If the alarm does not sound, check                                               a valid transmitter is found in the
to see if the horn works. The horn                                               vehicle.
fuse may be blown. See Fuses and                                                 You do not have to manually arm or
Circuit Breakers on page 10‑51.                                                  disarm the system.
If the horn works, but the alarm
does not go off, see your dealer.
                                                                       Keys, Doors and Windows                  2-15

The security light comes on if         If the vehicle does not start and        The immobilizer system can
there is a problem with arming or      the RKE transmitter appears to be        learn new or replacement RKE
disarming the theft-deterrent          undamaged, try another RKE               transmitters. Up to four RKE
system.                                transmitter. Or, place the transmitter   transmitters can be programmed for
The system has one or more RKE         in the transmitter pocket. See “NO       the vehicle. To program additional
transmitters that are matched to       FOBS DETECTED” under Key and             transmitters, see “Matching
an immobilizer control unit in the     Lock Messages on page 5‑42 for           transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
vehicle. Only a correctly matched      additional information. Check the        Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
RKE transmitter starts the vehicle.    fuse. See Fuses and Circuit              System Operation on page 2‑3.
The vehicle may not start if the RKE   Breakers on page 10‑51. If the           Do not leave the key or device
transmitter is damaged.                engine still does not start with the     that disarms or deactivates the
                                       other transmitter, the vehicle needs     theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the   service. If the engine does start, the
security light comes on, there may     first transmitter may be faulty. See
be a problem with the immobilizer      your dealer or have a new RKE
system. Press the START button         transmitter programmed to the
again.                                 vehicle.
2-16       Keys, Doors and Windows

Exterior Mirrors                        Power Mirrors                           2. Use the arrows located on the
                                                                                   four-way control pad to move the
                                                                                   mirror in the desired direction.
Convex Mirrors
                                                                                3. Adjust each outside mirror so
                                                                                   that a little of the vehicle and the
          { WARNING                                                                area behind it can be seen.
 A convex mirror can make things,                                               Keep the control in the center
 like other vehicles, look farther                                              position when not adjusting either
 away than they really are. If you                                              outside mirror.
 cut too sharply into the right lane,                                           If the vehicle has the memory
 you could hit a vehicle on the                                                 feature, a preferred mirror position
 right. Check the inside mirror or                                              can be stored. See Power Seat
 glance over your shoulder before                                               Adjustment on page 3‑3.
 changing lanes.
                                        Controls for the outside power
                                        mirrors are located on the
                                                                                Folding Mirrors
The passenger side mirror is convex     driver door.                            Manually fold the mirrors inward
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is                                            to prevent damage when going
curved so more can be seen from         To adjust the mirrors:
                                                                                through an automatic car wash.
the driver seat.                        1. Move the top selector control to     To fold, pull the mirror toward the
                                           the left or right to select either   vehicle. Push the mirror outward to
                                           the driver or passenger mirror.      return it to the original position.
                                                                       Keys, Doors and Windows                  2-17

Heated Mirrors                           Interior Mirrors                       P (On/Off): The automatic
                                                                                dimming feature is activated
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
                                         Automatic Dimming                      when the vehicle is started.
< (Rear Window Defogger):                                                       Press and hold this button for up
Press to heat the mirrors.               Rearview Mirror                        to six seconds to turn this feature
See “Rear Window Defogger” under         Vehicles with an automatic dimming     on or off.
Dual Automatic Climate Control           inside rearview mirror, compass        T (Indicator Light): This light turns
System on page 8‑1 for more              display, and/or map lamps, and         on when the automatic dimming
information.                             OnStar® will automatically change      feature is active.
                                         to reduce glare from headlamps
Automatic Dimming                        behind you. A time delay feature       Map Lamps
                                         prevents rapid changing from the       If the mirror has map lamps, they
Mirror                                   day to night positions while driving   are located at the bottom of the
If the vehicle has this feature, the     under lights and through traffic.      mirror. To manually turn the lamps
driver side outside mirror adjusts for   If the vehicle has OnStar®, there      on or off, press the button next to
the glare of headlamps behind you.       are three control buttons located      each lamp.
This feature is controlled by the on     at the bottom of the mirror. See the
and off setting on the inside                                                   Cleaning the Mirror
                                         OnStar® owner's guide for more
rearview mirror.                         information on the services OnStar®    Do not spray glass cleaner directly
                                         provides.                              on the mirror. Use a soft towel
                                                                                dampened with water.
2-18     Keys, Doors and Windows

Windows                               Power Windows

         { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless
adults, or pets in a vehicle with
the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.                          The power window switches are
                                      located on each door.
                                      Pull up or press down on the front of
                                      the switch to raise or lower the
                                      window.
                                      Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
                                      allows you to use the power
                                      windows when the ignition is off.
                                      For more information, see Retained
                                      Accessory Power (RAP) on
                                      page 9‑23.
                                                                          Keys, Doors and Windows             2-19

Express-Down Window                      Power Window Initialize                Roof
Press the front of the switch to         After a power reconnect such as
the second position to activate          battery replacement, the window        Roof Panel
the express-down feature. To stop        index‐up feature will not function
the window as it is lowering, press      until the system is initialized.       On vehicles with a removable roof
the switch again.                                                               panel, follow the procedures when
                                         Once power is restored:                removing or installing it.
Window Indexing                          1. Close the door.                     Removing the Roof Panel
This feature automatically lowers        2. Raise the window and hold the
the window a small amount when
the door is opened. When the door
                                            switch up for three seconds after
                                            the window is closed.
                                                                                         { WARNING
is closed, the window will raise to                                              Do not try to remove a roof panel
its full up position. If either window   3. Release the switch, then
                                            hold the switch up again for         while the vehicle is moving.
does not index properly, it could                                                Trying to remove the roof panel
be due to loss of power. Before             three seconds and release.
                                                                                 while the vehicle is moving could
returning to your dealer for service,
                                         Sun Visors                              cause an accident. The panel
perform the power window initialize
procedure.                                                                       could fall into the vehicle and
                                         Pull the visor toward you, or move      cause you to lose control, or it
                                         it to the side to help reduce glare.    could fly off and strike another
                                         To use the lighted mirror, lift the     vehicle. You or others could be
                                         cover.                                  injured. Remove the roof panel
                                                                                 only when the vehicle is parked.

                                                                                Until you are sure you can remove
                                                                                the panel alone, have someone
                                                                                help you.
2-20      Keys, Doors and Windows

Notice: If you drop or rest a roof
panel on its edges, the roof panel,
paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place
the roof panel in the stowage
receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
1. Park on a level surface and set
   the parking brake. Shift an
   automatic transmission into
   P (Park). Shift a manual
   transmission into N (Neutral).
2. Make sure the ignition is off.      6. To unlock the release latches on     The driver side handle moves
                                          the front of the roof panel, grasp   toward the driver door. The
3. Lower both sun visors.                 each handle and pull it outward.     passenger side handle moves
4. Open the rear hatch and remove                                              toward the passenger door.
   any items that may interfere with
   proper storage of the roof panel.
5. Lower the windows.
   There are two release latches on
   the front of the roof panel and
   one rear release latch on the
   back of the roof panel.
                                                                       Keys, Doors and Windows                 2-21

                                        9. When the roof panel is loosened      1. Turn the roof panel so that the
                                           from the vehicle, one person            front edge of the panel is facing
                                           should grasp the roof panel as          the storage area.
                                           close to the center as possible
                                           and lift it away from the vehicle.
                                        Storing the Roof Panel

                                                  { WARNING
                                         If a roof panel is not stored
                                         properly, it could be thrown about
                                         the vehicle in a crash or sudden
7. To unlock the rear of the roof        maneuver. People in the vehicle
   panel's rear release latch,           could be injured. Whenever you
   press the back of the release         store a roof panel in the vehicle,
   handle (B). Then press the
                                         always be sure that it is stored
   button on the front of the release                                           2. Insert the roof panel so that
                                         securely in the proper location.
   handle (A).                                                                     the outside front edges line up
   Pull down the latch lever.                                                      between the receiver covers.
                                        Notice: If you drop or rest a roof         Push forward on the roof panel
8. Stand on one side of the             panel on its edges, the roof panel,        until it stops.
   vehicle, and if necessary, have      paint and/or weatherstripping
   someone stand on the other           may be damaged. Always place
   side. Together, carefully lift the   the roof panel in the stowage
   front edge of the roof panel up      receivers after removing it from
   and forward.                         the vehicle.
2-22      Keys, Doors and Windows

                                     Installing the Roof Panel                1. Park on a level surface and set
                                                                                 the parking brake. Shift an
                                               { WARNING                         automatic transmission into
                                                                                 P (Park). Shift a manual
                                      An improperly attached roof panel          transmission into N (Neutral).
                                      may fall into or fly off the vehicle.   2. Check that the front release
                                      You or others could be injured.            latches and the rear release
                                      After installing the roof panel,           latch on the vehicle's roof
                                      always check that it is firmly             opening are in their opened
                                      attached by pushing up on the              positions before attempting to
                                      underside of the panel. Check              install the roof panel.
                                      now and then to be sure the roof        3. To remove the roof panel from
3. Gently place the roof panel        panel is firmly in place.                  the rear storage area of the
   down so that the back pins on                                                 vehicle, pull up on the rear edge
   the roof panel drop into the                                                  and remove it from the
                                     Notice: If you drop or rest a roof
   receivers in the back of the                                                  storage area.
                                     panel on its edges, the roof panel,
   storage area.
                                     paint and/or weatherstripping            4. Carefully place the roof panel
Press down firmly to seat the pins   may be damaged. Always place                over the top of the vehicle.
in the receivers.                    the roof panel in the stowage
                                     receivers after removing it from         5. Position the rear edge of the
                                     the vehicle.                                roof panel to the weatherstrip
                                                                                 on the back of the roof opening.
                                     In most cases, it makes it easier if        Then align and fit the pins at the
                                     two people install the roof panel.          rear of the roof panel inside the
                                                                                 openings in the rear overhead
                                                                                 weatherstrip. Gently lower the
                                                                                 front edge of the roof panel to
                                                                                 the front of the roof opening.
                                                                        Keys, Doors and Windows                    2-23

                                       Removable Roof Panel                       If water drops are frequently allowed
                                                                                  to dry on the roof panel, impurities
                                       Notice: If you use a glass
                                                                                  in the water will adhere to the top.
                                       treatment and/or conditioner that
                                                                                  These impurities may etch or mar
                                       contains ethyl sulfate on the roof
                                                                                  the finish. When the panel gets wet,
                                       panel, you could damage the
                                                                                  dry it off.
                                       panel. The repairs would not be
                                       covered by your warranty. Only
                                       use a GM-approved glass cleaner            Convertible Top
                                       on the roof panel.                         Manual Operation
                                       Special care is necessary when             For care and cleaning of the
                                       cleaning, removing, and/or storing         convertible top, see “Cleaning the
                                       the roof panel.                            Convertible Top” in this section.
6. Turn the front release handles
   inward so that they latch to the    .   Flush with water to remove dust        High pressure car washes may
   closed position.                        and dirt, then dry the panel.          cause water to enter the vehicle.
7. Push up on the handle of the        .   Clean a transparent roof panel         If the vehicle has this feature, the
   rear roof release handle to latch       with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave           following procedures explain the
   its hook in the closed position.        the cleaner on the panel for           proper operation of the manual
                                           one minute, then wipe the panel        convertible top.
8. Push and pull the roof panel up         with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do not
   and down and side to side to            use glass cleaner on a painted
   ensure the roof panel is securely       roof panel.
   installed.
                                       .   Do not use abrasive cleaning
                                           materials on either type of panel.
2-24      Keys, Doors and Windows

The parts of the manual convertible   Notice: Leaving the convertible       Notice: If you raise or lower the
top that are used when lowering and   top down and exposing the             convertible top while the vehicle
raising it are:                       interior of your vehicle to outdoor   is in motion, you could damage
                                      conditions may cause damage.          the top or the top mechanism.
                                      Always close the convertible top      The repairs would not be covered
                                      if leaving your vehicle outdoors.     by your warranty. Always put
                                      Notice: Lowering the convertible      an automatic transmission in
                                      top when there are objects in         P (Park) or a manual transmission
                                      the storage area could damage it      in Neutral before raising or
                                      or break the glass rear window.       lowering the convertible top.
                                      Always verify that no objects are     Lowering the Manual
                                      in the storage area before            Convertible Top
                                      lowering the convertible top.
                                                                            1. Park on a level surface.
                                      Notice: Lowering the convertible         Shift an automatic transmission
                                      top if it is damp, wet, or dirty         into P (Park) and set the
                                      can cause stains, mildew, and            parking brake. Shift a manual
A. Front Edge of the
                                      damage to the inside of your             transmission into N (Neutral) and
   Convertible Top
                                      vehicle. Dry off the convertible         set the parking brake.
B. Rear Edge of the                   top before lowering it.
   Convertible Top                                                          2. Make sure the ignition is off.
                                      Notice: If you lower the
C. Tonneau Cover                      convertible top on your vehicle       3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
                                      in cold weather (-18°C (0°F)
                                      or lower), you may damage
                                      convertible top components. Do
                                      not lower the top in cold weather.
                                                                    Keys, Doors and Windows                 2-25




4. The convertible top front latch,   5. Lift upward on the front edge (A)    7. Tilt the driver seatback forward
   located above the inside              of the convertible top off of the       and press the tonneau cover
   rearview mirror, must be              windshield frame. Then lift             release button located on the
   unlocked. Pull the convertible        upward on the rear edge (B) of          underside of the tonneau
   top front latch down and turn it      the convertible top so it is            cover (C) behind the driver
   clockwise to unlock it.               vertical to the tonneau cover (C).      seat. Then raise the tonneau
                                         The front edge (A) and rear             cover (C). If the tonneau
                                         edge (B) should be straight up.         cover does not release and
                                      6. The convertible top front latch         three chimes are heard, check
                                         must be turned and closed after         to make sure the trunk lid is
                                         the top has been pushed up.             closed. Also, the tonneau cover
                                         Failure to close the latch may          will not release if the vehicle
                                         prevent the tonneau cover from          alarm is armed.
                                         completely closing.
2-26     Keys, Doors and Windows

  After pressing the release          Notice: If you lower the
  button, the driver and passenger    convertible top into the storage
  door glass should retract to the    compartment and the rear edge
  full-down position.                 of the top is not in the full-down
  If the vehicle has lost battery     position, you could damage the
  power, the tonneau cover (C)        top. Always verify that the rear
  can still be opened using the       edge of the convertible top is in
  manual release cable.               the full-down position before
                                      lowering the top into the storage
  The tonneau cover emergency         compartment.
  manual release cable is located
  underneath the carpeting behind
  the passenger seat head
  restraint, on the underside                                              9. Push forward on the front
  forward edge of the tonneau                                                 edge (A) of the convertible top
  cover. To access the cable,                                                 to allow the rear edge (B) of the
  lift and pull back the carpeting.                                           convertible top to be moved to
  Also, see Hatch on page 2‑10                                                its full-down position.
  for information on the
  emergency trunk release handle.




                                      8. Pull the cable to release the
                                         tonneau cover.
                                                                       Keys, Doors and Windows                2-27

                                        Raising the Manual
                                        Convertible Top
                                        1. Park on a level surface. Shift
                                           an automatic transmission into
                                           P (Park) and set the parking
                                           brake. Shift a manual
                                           transmission into N (Neutral)
                                           and set the parking brake.
                                        2. Lower both windows.
                                        3. Make sure the ignition is off.
                                        4. Tilt the driver seat forward and
10. Then move the convertible top          press the tonneau cover release     6. Pull the convertible top up by
    rearward to its fully stored           button, or use the manual              firmly gripping the front edge (A)
    position.                              release cable if battery power         near the center and applying a
11. After the convertible top is           has been lost. See Step 6              brisk upward and forward motion
    stored, apply one even push on         under “Lowering the Manual             to get the top in the full-up
    the center of the front edge (A)       Convertible Top” in this section.      position.
    of the convertible top to ensure       After pressing the release
    that the convertible top is fully      button, the driver and passenger
    retracted.                             door glass should retract to the
12. Close the tonneau cover (B) by         full-down position, if they have
    pressing down on it with a             not already been lowered.
    swift, firm motion.                 5. Lift the tonneau cover.
2-28       Keys, Doors and Windows

                                         8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by
                                            pushing it down with a swift, firm
                                            motion.
                                         9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the
                                            convertible top by first slightly
                                            pushing the front edge (A) of the
                                            convertible top forward.
                                         10. Push the front edge (A) of the
                                             convertible top down from the
                                             outside of the vehicle, or pull
                                             the front edge (A) of the
                                             convertible top down from the
7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the             center pull-down handle             11. Pull the convertible top front
   convertible top to its full-up            located in the inside of the            latch handle down and turn it
   position by first raising the front       vehicle.                                counterclockwise to lock the
   edge (A).                                                                         convertible top.
                                                                  Keys, Doors and Windows                  2-29

Power Operation                       Notice: Lowering the convertible    Lowering the Power
                                      top if it is damp, wet, or dirty    Convertible Top
For care and cleaning of the
                                      can cause stains, mildew, and       1. Park on a level surface. Start
convertible top see “Cleaning the
                                      damage to the inside of your           the engine. Shift an automatic
Convertible Top” in this section.
                                      vehicle. Dry off the convertible       transmission into P (Park) and
High pressure car washes may
                                      top before lowering it.                set the parking brake. Shift a
cause water to enter the vehicle.
                                      Notice: If you lower the               manual transmission into
To operate the convertible top use
                                      convertible top on your vehicle        N (Neutral), and set the parking
the following steps.
                                      in cold weather (-18°C (0°F)           brake.
Notice: Leaving the convertible       or lower), you may damage           2. Make sure the trunk is closed,
top down and exposing the             convertible top components.            the rear trunk partition in the rear
interior of your vehicle to outdoor   Do not lower the top in cold           storage area is in the fastened
conditions may cause damage.          weather.                               upright position, and no objects
Always close the convertible top
                                      Notice: If you raise or lower the      are forward of the divider. See
if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
                                      convertible top while the vehicle      “Rear Trunk Partition” under
Notice: Lowering the convertible      is in motion, you could damage         Rear Storage on page 4‑1.
top when there are objects in the     the top or the top mechanism.
storage area could damage it or       The repairs would not be covered
break the glass rear window.          by your warranty. Always put
Always verify that no objects         an automatic transmission in
are in the storage area before        P (Park) or a manual transmission
lowering the convertible top.         in Neutral before raising or
                                      lowering the convertible top.
2-30      Keys, Doors and Windows

                                                                               If the convertible top is operated
                                                                               multiple times, the engine should
                                                                               be running to prevent drain on the
                                                                               vehicle's battery. Under certain
                                                                               conditions, the Driver Information
                                                                               Center (DIC) may display a
                                                                               message regarding the convertible
                                                                               top. See Convertible Top Messages
                                                                               on page 5‑37 for more information.
                                                                               Raising the Power Convertible Top
                                                                               Notice: If you raise or lower the
                                                                               convertible top while the vehicle
3. Release the convertible top front   5. Push and hold the bottom of the      is in motion, you could damage
   latch, located above the inside        convertible top switch, located to   the top or the top mechanism.
   rearview mirror, by pulling and        the left of the steering wheel, on   The repairs would not be covered
   turning it clockwise toward the        the instrument panel.                by your warranty. Always put
   driver door. Push upward on the     The convertible top will lower into     an automatic transmission in
   front edge. The windows will        the rear of the vehicle. A chime will   P (Park) or a manual transmission
   automatically lower.                sound when the convertible top has      in Neutral before raising or
4. Return the convertible top front    lowered completely. If the radio is     lowering the convertible top.
   latch to the closed position.       on the sound may be muted for           1. Park on a level surface. Start
                                       a brief time due to a new audio            the engine. Shift an automatic
                                       system equalization being loaded.          transmission into P (Park) and
                                                                                  set the parking brake. Shift
                                                                                  a manual transmission into
                                                                                  N (Neutral) and set the parking
                                                                                  brake.
                                                                        Keys, Doors and Windows                 2-31

2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed,                                           If the vehicle has lost power, the
   the rear trunk partition in the rear                                         convertible top can still be raised by
   storage area is in the fastened                                              releasing pressure on the hydraulic
   upright position, and no objects                                             pump, located under the passenger
   are forward of the divider. See                                              side of the tonneau cover, using the
   “Rear Trunk Partition” under                                                 following steps. The carpet liner on
   Rear Storage on page 4‑1.                                                    the passenger side must be pulled
3. Push and hold the top of the                                                 back to access the hydraulic pump.
   convertible top switch. The                                                  Never attempt to open or close the
   convertible top will raise and the                                           convertible top manually without
   windows will lower if they were                                              releasing pressure first.
   in the raised position. A chime                                              Manual operation of the convertible
   will sound when the convertible        5. Pull the convertible top           top cannot be attempted for
   top is raised completely.                 front latch down and turn it       five minutes after the last time the
4. After the convertible top is              counterclockwise to lock the       convertible top switch was pressed
   completely raised, release the            convertible top.                   if the convertible top was not
   convertible top switch.                If the radio is on the sound may be   opened completely and the tonneau
                                          muted for a brief time due to a new   cover latched or closed completely
                                          audio system equalization being       with the front latch locked in place
                                          loaded.                               at the time the convertible top
                                                                                switch was released.
2-32      Keys, Doors and Windows

                                         Be careful when opening the         4. Use the wrench, located in the
                                         tonneau cover by hand. If the          console, and turn the pressure
                                         tonneau cover is opened quickly,       release bolt counterclockwise
                                         damage can occur to the hinging        one revolution, to relieve
                                         mechanism, which can prevent           pressure to the hydraulic pump.
                                         proper operation of the                This will allow you to manually
                                         convertible top.                       raise the convertible top.
                                      2. Pull back the carpet liner on the   5. Then follow the steps under
                                         passenger side to access the           raising the manual convertible
                                         hydraulic pump.                        top. See “Manual Operation” or
                                                                                “Power Operation” in this
                                                                                section.
1. Open the tonneau cover by                                                 When power is restored to the
   pulling the emergency release                                             vehicle, the hydraulic bolt must be
   cable.                                                                    tightened, by turning it clockwise.
   The tonneau cover emergency                                               The convertible top switch can then
   release cable is located behind                                           be used to lower or raise the
   the passenger seat head                                                   convertible top.
   restraint, on the underside                                               If the convertible top is operated
   forward edge of the tonneau                                               multiple times, the engine should
   cover. Also, see Hatch on                                                 be running to prevent drain on the
   page 2‑10 for information on the                                          vehicle's battery. Under certain
   emergency trunk release handle.                                           conditions, the Driver Information
                                      3. Locate the pressure release         Center (DIC) may display a
                                         bolt on the front side of the       message regarding the convertible
                                         hydraulic pump.                     top. See Convertible Top Messages
                                                                             on page 5‑37 for more information.
                                                                          Keys, Doors and Windows   2-33

If the battery has been                 Wet the entire vehicle and wash the
disconnected, the power windows         top evenly to avoid spots or rings.
must be initialized for the power top   Let the soap remain on the fabric
to operate. See Power Windows on        for a few minutes. When the top is
page 2‑18 for more information.         really dirty, use a mild foam-type
                                        cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire
Cleaning the Convertible Top            vehicle, then let the top dry in direct
The convertible top should be           sunlight.
cleaned often. However, high            To protect the convertible top:
pressure car washes may cause
water to enter the vehicle.
                                        .   After washing the vehicle,
                                            make sure the convertible top is
When hand washing the convertible           completely dry before lowering it.
top, do it in partial shade. Use a
mild soap, lukewarm water, and a
                                        .   Do not get any cleaner on the
soft sponge. A chamois or cloth may         vehicle's painted finish; it could
leave lint on the top, and a brush          leave streaks.
can chafe the threads in the top        .   If go through an automatic car
fabric. Do not use detergents, harsh        wash, ask the manager if the
cleaners, solvents, or bleaching            equipment could damage the
agents.                                     convertible top.
2-34   Keys, Doors and Windows

                                 2 NOTES
                                                                                                                      Seats and Restraints                             3-1

Seats and                                                  Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21
                                                           Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
                                                                                                                      Child Restraints
                                                                                                                       Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Restraints                                                 Replacing Safety Belt System
                                                            Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22
                                                                                                                       Infants and Young
                                                                                                                         Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
                                                                                                                       Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41
                                                          Airbag System                                                Lower Anchors and Tethers
Head Restraints                                            Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2                                                                       for Children (LATCH System)
                                                           Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-24                         (Coupe and Convertible
Front Seats                                                When Should an Airbag                                         Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      3-2       Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26    Lower Anchors and Tethers
 Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . .              3-3      What Makes an Airbag                                          for Children (LATCH System)
 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .          3-6       Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27      (ZO6 and ZR1
 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . .          3-6      How Does an Airbag                                            Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
 Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . .       3-8       Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28       Replacing LATCH System
 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . .         3-8      What Will You See After an                                    Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48
                                                            Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28              Securing Child Restraints . . . . 3-48
Safety Belts                                               Passenger Sensing
 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9     System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
 How to Wear Safety Belts                                  Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
  Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13     Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18              Adding Equipment to the
 Safety Belt Use During                                     Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-35
  Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20       Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-36
 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21               Replacing Airbag System
                                                            Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-2      Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints                       Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have head
restraints in the outboard seating    Seat Adjustment
positions that cannot be adjusted.
The front seat outboard head                  { WARNING
restraints are not designed to be
                                      You can lose control of the
removed.
                                      vehicle if you try to adjust a
                                      manual driver seat while the
                                      vehicle is moving. The sudden
                                      movement could startle and
                                      confuse you, or make you push a
                                                                         To adjust the seat:
                                      pedal when you do not want to.
                                      Adjust the driver seat only when   1. Lift the bar under the front edge
                                      the vehicle is not moving.            of the seat cushion to unlock
                                                                            the seat.
                                                                         2. Slide the seat to the desired
                                                                            position and release the bar.
                                                                         3. Try to move the seat back and
                                                                            forth to be sure the seat is
                                                                            locked in place.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints              3-3

Power Seat Adjustment                  Memory Seat, Mirrors, and              The numbers on the back of
                                       Steering Wheel                         the remote keyless entry (RKE)
                                                                              transmitters correspond to the
                                                                              numbers on the memory buttons.
                                                                              Storing Memory Positions
                                                                              To save into memory:
                                                                              1. Adjust the driver seat, both
                                                                                 outside mirrors, and the
                                                                                 telescopic steering column,
                                                                                 if equipped.
                                                                              2. Press and hold “1” until
                                                                                 two beeps sound.
                                                                              3. Repeat for a second driver
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:                                             position using “2.”
                                       On vehicles with the memory
.   Move the seat forward or
                                       feature, the controls on the driver
    rearward by sliding the control
                                       door are used to program and recall
    forward or rearward.
                                       memory settings for the driver seat,
.   Raise or lower the front or rear   outside mirrors, and the telescopic
    part of the seat cushion by        steering column, if equipped.
    moving the front or rear of the
    control up or down.
3-4       Seats and Restraints

To recall a memory position:             Memory Remote Recall (Automatic          To stop recall movement, press one
.   On vehicles with an automatic        Transmission)                            of the power seat controls, power
    transmission, press and release      This feature can recall the driver       mirror or memory buttons, or the
    “1” or “2.”                          seat, outside mirrors, and telescopic    telescopic steering column switch.

    If the vehicle is in P (Park), a     steering column, if equipped, to         If something has blocked the
    single beep sounds and the           stored positions when entering the       driver seat while recalling a
    memory position is recalled          vehicle.                                 memory position, the recall may
    after a brief delay.                 To activate, enter the vehicle and       stop. Remove the obstruction; then
                                         start the engine. The driver seat,       press and hold the appropriate
    If the vehicle is not in P (Park),                                            manual control for the memory item
    three beeps sound and the            outside mirrors, and telescopic
                                         steering column will move to the         that is not recalling for two seconds.
    memory position is not recalled.                                              Try recalling the memory position
                                         memory position associated with
.   On vehicles with a manual            the transmitter used to unlock the       again by pressing the appropriate
    transmission, when the vehicle       vehicle.                                 memory button. If the memory
    is on, the parking brake must be                                              position is still not recalling, see
    set to recall a memory position.     This feature is turned on or off using   your dealer for service.
    Press and release “1” or “2.”        the vehicle personalization menu.
                                         See “Auto Memory Recall” under
    A single beep sounds and the         Vehicle Personalization on
    memory position is recalled          page 5‑55 for more information.
    after a brief delay.
    If the vehicle is on and the
    parking brake is not set,
    three beeps sound and the
    memory position is not recalled.
                                                                               Seats and Restraints               3-5

Easy Exit Driver Seat                   To recall, press and release B.        If something has blocked the driver
This feature can move the seat          The vehicle must be in P (Park) for    seat while recalling the exit position,
rearward and the telescopic steering    an automatic transmission or the       the recall may stop. Remove the
column, if equipped, out of the way     parking brake must be set for a        obstruction; then press and hold
to allow extra room to exit the         manual transmission. A single beep     the power seat control rearward for
vehicle.                                sounds. The seat and telescopic        two seconds. Try recalling the exit
                                        steering column will move to the       position again. If the exit position is
B (Easy Exit Driver Seat):    Press     position previously stored for the     still not recalling, see your dealer for
to save and recall the easy exit seat   identified driver.                     service.
position.
                                        If the easy exit seat feature is       See “Auto Exit Recall” under Vehicle
To save into memory:                    programmed on in the vehicle           Personalization on page 5‑55 for
1. Recall the desired driving           personalization menu, automatic        more information.
   position by pressing “1.”            recall occurs when one of the
                                        following conditions is met:
2. Adjust the seat and the
   telescopic steering column to
                                        .   The vehicle is turned off, in
   the desired exit position.               Retained Accessory
                                            Power (RAP) or accessory
3. Press and hold B until                   mode, and the driver door is
   two beeps sound.                         opened.
4. Repeat for a second driver           .   The vehicle is turned off, or in
   position using “2.”                      RAP, and the unlock button on
                                            the RKE transmitter is pressed.
3-6      Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Adjustment                     Reclining Seatbacks
Power Lumbar and Side
Bolsters                                       { WARNING
                                      You can lose control of the
                                      vehicle if you try to adjust a
                                      manual driver seat while the
                                      vehicle is moving. The sudden
                                      movement could startle and
                                      confuse you, or make you push
                                      a pedal when you do not want to.
                                      Adjust the driver seat only when
                                      the vehicle is not moving.            To recline the seatback:
                                                                            1. Lift the lever.
                                                                            2. Move the seatback to the

A. Lumbar Support Control
                                               { WARNING                       desired position, and then
                                                                               release the lever to lock the
B. Side Bolster Support Control       If either seatback is not locked,        seatback in place.
                                      it could move forward in a sudden     3. Push and pull on the seatback
To adjust the support, if equipped:   stop or crash. That could cause          to make sure it is locked.
.   Move control (A) forward or       injury to the person sitting there.
    rearward to adjust lumbar         Always push and pull on the
    support.                          seatbacks to be sure they are
.   Move control (B) up or down to    locked.
    adjust the side bolsters.
                                                                             Seats and Restraints            3-7

To return the seatback to the upright
position:                                  WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without         The lap belt cannot do its job
   applying pressure to the             either. In a crash, the belt could
   seatback, and the seatback will      go up over your abdomen. The
   return to the upright position.      belt forces would be there, not at
2. Push and pull on the seatback        your pelvic bones. This could
   to make sure it is locked.           cause serious internal injuries.
                                        For proper protection when the
          { WARNING                     vehicle is in motion, have the
                                        seatback upright. Then sit well
 Sitting in a reclined position when
                                        back in the seat and wear the        Do not have a seatback reclined if
 the vehicle is in motion can be
                                        safety belt properly.                the vehicle is moving.
 dangerous. Even when buckled
 up, the safety belts cannot do
 their job when reclined like this.
 The shoulder belt cannot do its
 job because it will not be against
 your body. Instead, it will be in
 front of you. In a crash, you could
 go into it, receiving neck or other
 injuries.
                         (Continued)
3-8      Seats and Restraints

Seatback Latches                                                                 Heated Front Seats
                                                  { WARNING
                                        If either seatback is not locked, it             { WARNING
                                        could move forward in a sudden
                                        stop or crash. That could cause          If you cannot feel temperature
                                        injury to the person sitting there.      change or pain to the skin, the
                                        Always push and pull on the              seat heater may cause burns
                                        seatbacks to be sure they are            even at low temperatures. To
                                        locked.                                  reduce the risk of burns, people
                                                                                 with such a condition should use
                                                                                 care when using the seat heater,
                                       To return a seatback to the               especially for long periods of
                                       sitting position, lift up on the latch,   time. Do not place anything on
                                       raise the seatback, and push the
                                                                                 the seat that insulates against
                                       seatback rearward. Push and pull
To fold a seatback forward, lift the                                             heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
                                       on the seatback to make sure it is
latch on top of the backside of the                                              cover, or similar item. This
                                       locked in place.
seat. The seatback locks when                                                    may cause the seat heater to
folded down.                                                                     overheat. An overheated seat
                                                                                 heater may cause a burn or may
                                                                                 damage the seat.
                                                                               Seats and Restraints              3-9

                                       Safety Belts                                      { WARNING
                                       This section of the manual
                                       describes how to use safety belts        It is extremely dangerous to ride
                                       properly. It also describes some         in a cargo area, inside or outside
                                       things not to do with safety belts.      of a vehicle. In a collision, people
                                                                                riding in these areas are more
                                                 { WARNING                      likely to be seriously injured or
                                                                                killed. Do not allow people to ride
                                        Do not let anyone ride where            in any area of your vehicle that
                                        a safety belt cannot be worn            is not equipped with seats and
                                        properly. In a crash, if you or your    safety belts. Be sure everyone in
                                        passenger(s) are not wearing            the vehicle is in a seat and using
If available, the buttons are on the
                                        safety belts, the injuries can be       a safety belt properly.
center console.
                                        much worse. You can hit things
The ignition must be on for this        inside the vehicle harder or be
feature to work.                                                               This vehicle has indicators as a
                                        ejected from the vehicle. You          reminder to buckle the safety belts.
L (Heated Seat):   Press to turn the    and your passenger(s) can be           See Safety Belt Reminders on
heated seat on at the high setting.     seriously injured or killed. In the    page 5‑16 for additional information.
Press again to switch to the low        same crash, you might not be,
setting.                                if you are buckled up. Always
                                        fasten your safety belt, and check
9 (Off): Press to turn the heated       that your passenger(s) are
seat off.                               restrained properly too.
3-10       Seats and Restraints

In most states and in all Canadian        Why Safety Belts Work
provinces, the law requires wearing
                                          When you ride in or on anything,
safety belts. Here is why:
                                          you go as fast as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a
crash. If you do have a crash, you
do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and                                                  Put someone on it.
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety        Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.   it is just a seat on wheels.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
                                                                             Seats and Restraints          3-11




Get it up to speed. Then stop the   The person keeps going until              or the instrument panel...
vehicle. The rider does not stop.   stopped by something. In a real
                                    vehicle, it could be the windshield...
3-12       Seats and Restraints

                                      Questions and Answers About            Q: If I am a good driver, and I
                                      Safety Belts                              never drive far from home,
                                                                                why should I wear safety
                                      Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle       belts?
                                         after a crash if I am wearing a
                                         safety belt?                        A: You may be an excellent driver,
                                                                                but if you are in a crash — even
                                      A: You could be — whether you are         one that is not your fault — you
                                         wearing a safety belt or not. But      and your passenger(s) can be
                                         your chance of being conscious         hurt. Being a good driver does
                                         during and after an accident, so       not protect you from things
                                         you can unbuckle and get out, is       beyond your control, such as
                                         much greater if you are belted.        bad drivers.
                                         And you can unbuckle a safety
or the safety belts!                                                            Most accidents occur within
                                         belt, even if you are
With safety belts, you slow down         upside down.                           40 km (25 mi) of home. And
as the vehicle does. You get more                                               the greatest number of serious
                                      Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why         injuries and deaths occur
time to stop. You stop over more
                                         should I have to wear safety           at speeds of less than
distance, and your strongest bones
                                         belts?                                 65 km/h (40 mph).
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.           A: Airbags are supplemental               Safety belts are for everyone.
                                         systems only; so they work with
                                         safety belts — not instead of
                                         them. Whether or not an airbag
                                         is provided, all occupants still
                                         have to buckle up to get the
                                         most protection. That is true
                                         not only in frontal collisions,
                                         but especially in side and other
                                         collisions.
                                                                                   Seats and Restraints               3-13

How to Wear Safety Belts                 First, before you or your                  applies force to the strong pelvic
                                         passenger(s) wear a safety belt,           bones and you would be less likely
Properly                                 there is important information you         to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
This section is only for people of       should know.                               under it, the belt would apply force
adult size.                                                                         on your abdomen. This could cause
                                                                                    serious or even fatal injuries. The
Be aware that there are special
                                                                                    shoulder belt should go over the
things to know about safety belts
                                                                                    shoulder and across the chest.
and children. And there are different
                                                                                    These parts of the body are best
rules for smaller children and
                                                                                    able to take belt restraining forces.
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on                                                  The shoulder belt locks if there is a
page 3‑37 or Infants and Young                                                      sudden stop or crash.
Children on page 3‑39. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are            Sit up straight and always keep
wearing safety belts.                    your feet on the floor in front of you.
                                         The lap part of the belt should be
Occupants who are not buckled up         worn low and snug on the hips, just
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a    touching the thighs. In a crash, this
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
3-14      Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?                                                 Q: What is wrong with this?
                                              { WARNING
                                     You can be seriously hurt if the
                                     shoulder belt is too loose. In a
                                     crash, you would move forward
                                     too much, which could increase
                                     injury. The shoulder belt should fit
                                     snugly against your body.




A: The shoulder belt is too loose.                                          A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
   It will not give as much                                                    not give nearly as much
   protection this way.                                                        protection this way.
                                                                           Seats and Restraints              3-15

                                     Q: What is wrong with this?
         { WARNING                                                                    { WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the                                             You can be seriously injured if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,                                           belt is buckled in the wrong place
you could slide under the lap                                                like this. In a crash, the belt would
belt and apply force on your                                                 go up over your abdomen. The
abdomen. This could cause                                                    belt forces would be there, not
serious or even fatal injuries.                                              on the pelvic bones. This could
The lap belt should be worn low                                              cause serious internal injuries.
and snug on the hips, just                                                   Always buckle the belt into the
touching the thighs.                                                         buckle nearest you.


                                     A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
                                        buckle.
3-16      Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?                                             Q: What is wrong with this?
                                           { WARNING
                                  You can be seriously injured if the
                                  belt goes over an armrest like
                                  this. The belt would be much too
                                  high. In a crash, you can slide
                                  under the belt. The belt force
                                  would then be applied on the
                                  abdomen, not on the pelvic
                                  bones, and that could cause
                                  serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
                                  the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.                                         A: The shoulder belt is worn under
                                                                           the arm. It should be worn over
                                                                           the shoulder at all times.
                                                                        Seats and Restraints            3-17

                                      Q: What is wrong with this?
         { WARNING                                                                 { WARNING
You can be seriously injured                                              You can be seriously injured
if you wear the shoulder belt                                             by not wearing the lap-shoulder
under your arm. In a crash, your                                          belt properly. In a crash, you
body would move too far forward,                                          would not be restrained by the
which would increase the chance                                           shoulder belt. Your body could
of head and neck injury. Also,                                            move too far forward increasing
the belt would apply too much                                             the chance of head and neck
force to the ribs, which are not                                          injury. You might also slide under
as strong as shoulder bones. You                                          the lap belt. The belt force would
could also severely injure internal                                       then be applied right on the
organs like your liver or spleen.                                         abdomen. That could cause
The shoulder belt should go over      A: The belt is behind the body.     serious or fatal injuries. The
the shoulder and across the                                               shoulder belt should go over the
chest.                                                                    shoulder and across the chest.
3-18      Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this?                                            Lap-Shoulder Belt
                                          { WARNING
                                                                       All seating positions in the vehicle
                                 You can be seriously injured by a     have a lap-shoulder belt.
                                 twisted belt. In a crash, you would
                                                                       The following instructions explain
                                 not have the full width of the belt
                                                                       how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
                                 to spread impact forces. If a belt    properly.
                                 is twisted, make it straight so it
                                 can work properly, or ask your        1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
                                 dealer to fix it.                        adjustable, so you can sit up
                                                                          straight. To see how, see “Seats”
                                                                          in the Index.
                                                                       2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
                                                                          the belt across you. Do not let it
A: The belt is twisted across                                             get twisted.
   the body.                                                              The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
                                                                          you pull the belt across you very
                                                                          quickly. If this happens, let the
                                                                          belt go back slightly to unlock it.
                                                                          Then pull the belt across you
                                                                          more slowly.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints             3-19

If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint
locking feature in the right front
seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑30 for more information.
                                     3. Push the latch plate into the          4. To make the lap part tight, pull
                                        buckle until it clicks.                   up on the shoulder belt.
                                        Pull up on the latch plate to             It may be necessary to pull
                                        make sure it is secure. If the belt       stitching on the safety belt
                                        is not long enough, see Safety            through the latch plate to fully
                                        Belt Extender on page 3‑21.               tighten the lap belt on smaller
                                        Position the release button on            occupants.
                                        the buckle so that the safety belt
                                        could be quickly unbuckled if
                                        necessary.
3-20       Seats and Restraints

                                        Safety Belt Pretensioners               Safety Belt Use During
                                        This vehicle has safety belt            Pregnancy
                                        pretensioners for the front outboard
                                                                                Safety belts work for everyone,
                                        occupants. Although the safety belt
                                                                                including pregnant women. Like all
                                        pretensioners cannot be seen, they
                                                                                occupants, they are more likely to
                                        are part of the safety belt assembly.
                                                                                be seriously injured if they do not
                                        They can help tighten the safety
                                                                                wear safety belts.
                                        belts during the early stages of
                                        a moderate to severe frontal and
                                        near frontal crash if the threshold
                                        conditions for pretensioner
                                        activation are met. And, for vehicles
To unlatch the belt, push the button    with side impact airbags, safety belt
on the buckle. The belt should          pretensioners can help tighten the
return to its stowed position.          safety belts in a side crash.
Before a door is closed, be sure        Pretensioners work only once. If the
the safety belt is out of the way. If   pretensioners activate in a crash,
a door is slammed against a safety      they will need to be replaced, and
belt, damage can occur to both the      probably other new parts for the
safety belt and the vehicle.            vehicle's safety belt system. See
                                        Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
                                        After a Crash on page 3‑22.             A pregnant woman should wear
                                                                                a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
                                                                                portion should be worn as low as
                                                                                possible, below the rounding,
                                                                                throughout the pregnancy.
                                                                                      Seats and Restraints           3-21

The best way to protect the fetus is       has been designed for adults. Never         Make sure the safety belt reminder
to protect the mother. When a safety       use it for securing child seats. To         light is working. See Safety Belt
belt is worn properly, it is more likely   wear it, attach it to the regular safety    Reminders on page 5‑16 for more
that the fetus will not be hurt in a       belt. For more information, see the         information.
crash. For pregnant women, as for          instruction sheet that comes with           Keep safety belts clean and dry.
anyone, the key to making safety           the extender.                               See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑21.
belts effective is wearing them
properly.                                  Safety System Check                         Safety Belt Care
                                           Now and then, check that the safety
Safety Belt Extender                       belt reminder light, safety belts,
                                                                                       Keep belts clean and dry.
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten   buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
around you, you should use it.             anchorages are working properly.                     { WARNING
But if a safety belt is not long           Look for any other loose or
                                                                                        Do not bleach or dye safety
enough, your dealer will order you         damaged safety belt system parts
                                           that might keep a safety belt system         belts. It may severely weaken
an extender. When you go in to                                                          them. In a crash, they might not
order it, take the heaviest coat you       from doing its job. See your dealer
                                           to have it repaired. Torn or frayed          be able to provide adequate
will wear, so the extender will be                                                      protection. Clean safety belts
long enough for you. To help avoid         safety belts may not protect you in
                                           a crash. They can rip apart under            only with mild soap and lukewarm
personal injury, do not let someone                                                     water.
else use it, and use it only for the       impact forces. If a belt is torn or
seat it is made to fit. The extender       frayed, get a new one right away.
3-22     Seats and Restraints

Replacing Safety Belt               After a minor crash, replacement of       Airbag System
                                    safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts After a                But the safety belt assemblies that       The vehicle has the following
Crash                               were used during any crash may            airbags:
                                    have been stressed or damaged.            .   A frontal airbag for the driver.
        { WARNING                   See your dealer to have the safety
                                    belt assemblies inspected or              .   A frontal airbag for the right front
A crash can damage the safety       replaced.                                     passenger.
belt system in the vehicle.         New parts and repairs may be              .   A seat-mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system        necessary even if the safety belt             airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the        system was not being used at the          .   A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in       time of the crash.                            airbag for the right front
serious injury or even death in                                                   passenger.
                                    Have the safety belt pretensioners
a crash. To help make sure the
                                    checked if the vehicle has been in a      All of the airbags in the vehicle will
safety belt systems are working
                                    crash, or if the airbag readiness light   have the word AIRBAG embossed
properly after a crash, have them   stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary                                                   in the trim or on an attached label
                                    or while you are driving. See Airbag      near the deployment opening.
replacements made as soon as        Readiness Light on page 5‑16.
possible.                                                                     For frontal airbags, the word
                                                                              AIRBAG will appear on the middle
                                                                              part of the steering wheel for the
                                                                              driver and on the instrument panel
                                                                              for the right front passenger.
                                                                              With seat-mounted side impact
                                                                              airbags, the word AIRBAG will
                                                                              appear on the side of the seatback
                                                                              closest to the door.
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints            3-23

Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety            WARNING (Continued)                      WARNING (Continued)
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce          Wearing your safety belt during a        close to the airbag, as you would
the risk of injury from the force of an   crash helps reduce your chance           be if you were sitting on the edge
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate   of hitting things inside the vehicle     of your seat or leaning forward.
very quickly to do their job.             or being ejected from it. Airbags        Safety belts help keep you in
                                          are “supplemental restraints” to         position before and during a
Here are the most important things        the safety belts. Everyone in your
to know about the airbag system:                                                   crash. Always wear your safety
                                          vehicle should wear a safety belt        belt, even with airbags. The driver
                                          properly — whether or not there is
          { WARNING                       an airbag for that person.
                                                                                   should sit as far back as possible
                                                                                   while still maintaining control of
 You can be severely injured or                                                    the vehicle.
 killed in a crash if you are not                                                  Occupants should not lean on
 wearing your safety belt — even                   { WARNING                       or sleep against the door or side
 if you have airbags. Airbags are                                                  windows in seating positions with
 designed to work with safety             Airbags inflate with great force,        seat-mounted airbags.
 belts, but do not replace them.          faster than the blink of an eye.
 Also, airbags are not designed to        Anyone who is up against, or
 deploy in every crash. In some           very close to, any airbag when it
 crashes safety belts are your only       inflates can be seriously injured
 restraint. See When Should an            or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
 Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑26.                                     (Continued)
                          (Continued)
3-24     Seats and Restraints

                                                                             Where Are the Airbags?
         { WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus
                                       There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
                                       on the instrument panel, which
for adults and older children, but
                                       shows the airbag symbol.
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle safety belt        The system checks the airbag
system nor its airbag system is        electrical system for malfunctions.
designed for them. Young               The light tells you if there is an
children and infants need the          electrical problem. See Airbag
protection that a child restraint      Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for
system can provide. Always             more information.                     The driver frontal airbag is in the
secure children properly in the                                              middle of the steering wheel.
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑37 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑39.
                                                                                Seats and Restraints            3-25


                                                                                           { WARNING
                                                                                  If something is between an
                                                                                  occupant and an airbag, the
                                                                                  airbag might not inflate properly
                                                                                  or it might force the object into
                                                                                  that person causing severe injury
                                                                                  or even death. The path of an
                                                                                  inflating airbag must be kept
                                                                                  clear. Do not put anything
                                                                                  between an occupant and an
                                         Driver Side Shown, Passenger             airbag, and do not attach or put
The right front passenger frontal
                                                  Side Similar                    anything on the steering wheel
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger side.                                                               hub or on or near any other
                                       The seat-mounted side impact               airbag covering.
                                       airbags for the driver and right front
                                       passenger are in the side of the           Do not use seat accessories
                                       seatbacks closest to the door.             that block the inflation path of a
                                                                                  seat-mounted side impact airbag.
3-26       Seats and Restraints

When Should an Airbag                      Frontal airbags may inflate at            Thresholds can also vary with
                                           different crash speeds. For               specific vehicle design.
Inflate?                                   example:                                  Frontal airbags are not intended to
Frontal airbags are designed to            .   If the vehicle hits a stationary      inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
inflate in moderate to severe frontal          object, the airbags could inflate     impacts, or in many side impacts.
or near-frontal crashes to help                at a different crash speed than if
reduce the potential for severe                                                      In addition, your vehicle has
                                               the vehicle hits a moving object.     dual-stage frontal airbags.
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.          .   If the vehicle hits an object that    Dual-stage airbags adjust the
However, they are only designed                deforms, the airbags could            restraint according to crash severity.
to inflate if the impact exceeds               inflate at a different crash speed    Your vehicle has electronic frontal
a predetermined deployment                     than if the vehicle hits an object    sensors, which help the sensing
threshold. Deployment thresholds               that does not deform.                 system distinguish between a
are used to predict how severe a           .   If the vehicle hits a narrow object   moderate frontal impact and a more
crash is likely to be in time for the          (like a pole), the airbags could      severe frontal impact. For moderate
airbags to inflate and help restrain           inflate at a different crash speed    frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
the occupants.                                 than if the vehicle hits a wide       inflate at a level less than full
                                               object (like a wall).                 deployment. For more severe frontal
Whether the frontal airbags will                                                     impacts, full deployment occurs.
or should deploy is not based on           .   If the vehicle goes into an object
how fast your vehicle is traveling.            at an angle, the airbags could
It depends largely on what you hit,            inflate at a different crash speed
the direction of the impact, and how           than if the vehicle goes straight
quickly your vehicle slows down.               into the object.
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints               3-27

Your vehicle may have one or two        Seat-mounted side impact airbags          What Makes an Airbag
seat position sensors, depending        will inflate if the crash severity is
on what model you have. The             above the system's designed
                                                                                  Inflate?
seat position sensor(s) enable          threshold level. The threshold level      In a deployment event, the sensing
the sensing system to monitor           can vary with specific vehicle            system sends an electrical signal
the position of the driver seat         design.                                   triggering a release of gas from the
(all models except ZO6 and ZR1)         Seat-mounted side impact airbags          inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
and the right front passenger seat      are not intended to inflate in frontal    airbag causing the bag to break out
(all models). Seat position sensor(s)   impacts, near-frontal impacts,            of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
provide information that is used to     rollovers, or rear impacts.               the airbag, and related hardware are
determine if the airbags should         A seat-mounted side impact airbag         all part of the airbag module.
deploy at a reduced level or at full    is intended to deploy on the side of      Frontal airbag modules are located
deployment.                             the vehicle that is struck.               inside the steering wheel and
Your vehicle may or may not have        In any particular crash, no one           instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags.       can say whether an airbag should          seat-mounted side impact airbags,
See Airbag System on page 3‑22.         have inflated simply because of the       there are airbag modules in the side
Seat-mounted side impact airbags        damage to a vehicle or because            of the front seatbacks closest to
are intended to inflate in moderate     of what the repair costs were. For        the door.
to severe side crashes.                 seat-mounted side impact airbags,
                                        deployment is determined by the
                                        location and severity of the side
                                        impact.
3-28      Seats and Restraints

How Does an Airbag                     Airbags should never be regarded
Restrain?                              as anything more than a supplement                 { WARNING
                                       to safety belts.
In moderate to severe frontal or                                                 When an airbag inflates, there
                                                                                 may be dust in the air. This dust
near frontal collisions, even belted   What Will You See After                   could cause breathing problems
occupants can contact the steering     an Airbag Inflates?
wheel or the instrument panel. In                                                for people with a history of
moderate to severe side collisions,    After the frontal and seat-mounted        asthma or other breathing trouble.
even belted occupants can contact      side impact airbags inflate, they         To avoid this, everyone in the
the inside of the vehicle.             quickly deflate, so quickly that some     vehicle should get out as soon
                                       people may not even realize the           as it is safe to do so. If you have
Airbags supplement the protection
                                       airbags inflated. Some components         breathing problems but cannot
provided by safety belts. Frontal
                                       of the airbag module may be hot for       get out of the vehicle after an
airbags distribute the force of
                                       several minutes. For location of the      airbag inflates, then get fresh air
the impact more evenly over the
                                       airbag modules, see What Makes            by opening a window or a door.
occupant's upper body, stopping
                                       an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑27.          If you experience breathing
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags       The parts of the airbag that come         problems following an airbag
distribute the force of the impact     into contact with you may be warm,        deployment, you should seek
more evenly over the occupant's        but not too hot to touch. There may       medical attention.
upper body.                            be some smoke and dust coming
                                       from the vents in the deflated
But airbags would not help in                                                   The vehicle has a feature that may
                                       airbags. Airbag inflation does not
many types of collisions, primarily                                             automatically unlock the doors, turn
                                       prevent the driver from seeing out
because the occupant's motion is                                                the interior lamps on, turn on the
                                       of the windshield or being able to
not toward those airbags. See When                                              hazard warning flashers, and shut
                                       steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent
Should an Airbag Inflate? on                                                    off the fuel system after the airbags
                                       people from leaving the vehicle.
page 3‑26 for more information.                                                 inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
                                                                              Seats and Restraints           3-29

the interior lamps off, and turn the   In many crashes severe enough
                                                                               .   The vehicle has a crash sensing
hazard warning flashers off by using   to inflate the airbag, windshields          and diagnostic module which
the controls for those features.       are broken by vehicle deformation.          records information after a
                                       Additional windshield breakage may          crash. See Vehicle Data
                                                                                   Recording and Privacy on
          { WARNING                    also occur from the right front
                                       passenger airbag.                           page 13‑17 and Event Data
 A crash severe enough to inflate                                                  Recorders on page 13‑17.
                                       .   Airbags are designed to inflate
 the airbags may have also                 only once. After an airbag
                                                                               .   Let only qualified technicians
 damaged important functions               inflates, you will need some            work on the airbag system.
 in the vehicle, such as the fuel          new parts for the airbag system.        Improper service can mean that
 system, brake and steering                If you do not get them, the             the airbag system will not work
 systems, etc. Even if the vehicle         airbag system will not be there         properly. See your dealer for
 appears to be drivable after a            to help protect you in another          service.
 moderate crash, there may be              crash. A new system will include
 concealed damage that could               airbag modules and possibly
 make it difficult to safely operate       other parts. The service manual
 the vehicle.                              for your vehicle covers the need
                                           to replace other parts.
 Use caution if you should attempt
 to restart the engine after a crash
 has occurred.
3-30       Seats and Restraints

Passenger Sensing                         word ON or OFF, or the symbol           rear-facing child restraints not be
                                          for on or off, will be visible. See     transported in the vehicle, even if
System                                    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator       the airbags are off.
The vehicle has a passenger               on page 5‑17.                           A label on the sun visor says,
sensing system for the right front        The passenger sensing system will       “Never put a rear-facing child seat
passenger position. The passenger         turn off the right front passenger      in the front.” This is because the risk
airbag status indicator will be visible   frontal airbag and seat-mounted         to the rear-facing child is so great,
in the rearview mirror when the           side impact airbag under certain        if the airbag deploys.
vehicle is started.                       conditions. The driver airbags are
                                          not affected by the passenger
                                          sensing system.
                                                                                            { WARNING
                                          The passenger sensing system             A child in a rear-facing child
                                          works with sensors that are part of      restraint can be seriously
                                          the right front passenger seat. The      injured or killed if the right front
                                          sensors are designed to detect the       passenger airbag inflates. This
            United States                 presence of a properly-seated            is because the back of the
                                          occupant and determine if the right      rear-facing child restraint would
                                          front passenger frontal airbag and       be very close to the inflating
                                          seat-mounted side impact airbag          airbag. A child in a forward-facing
                                          should be enabled (may inflate)          child restraint can be seriously
                                          or not.                                  injured or killed if the right front
                                          According to accident statistics,        passenger airbag inflates and the
                                          children are safer when properly         passenger seat is in a forward
        Canada and Mexico
                                          secured in a rear seat in the correct    position.
The words ON and OFF, or the              child restraint for their weight and                                (Continued)
symbol for on and off, will be visible    size. We recommend that
during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the
                                                                               Seats and Restraints                3-31

                                      The passenger sensing system is           When the passenger sensing
   WARNING (Continued)                designed to turn off the right front      system has turned off the right
                                      passenger frontal airbag and              front passenger frontal airbag and
Even if the passenger sensing         seat-mounted side impact airbag if:       seat-mounted side impact airbag,
system has turned off the right                                                 the off indicator will light and stay lit
                                      .   The right front passenger seat is
front passenger frontal airbag                                                  to remind you that the airbag(s) are
and seat-mounted side impact              unoccupied.
                                                                                off. See Passenger Airbag Status
airbag (if equipped), no system is    .   The system determines that an         Indicator on page 5‑17.
fail-safe. No one can guarantee           infant is present in a rear-facing
                                          infant seat.                          The passenger sensing system
that an airbag will not deploy
                                                                                is designed to turn on (may inflate)
under some unusual                    .   The system determines that a          the right front passenger frontal
circumstance, even though                 small child is present in a child     airbag and seat-mounted side
the airbag(s) are off.                    restraint.                            impact airbag anytime the system
Secure rear-facing child restraints   .   The system determines that a          senses that a person of adult size
in a rear seat, even if the               small child is present in a           is sitting properly in the right front
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a        booster seat.                         passenger seat.
forward-facing child restraint in     .                                         When the passenger sensing
                                          A right front passenger takes
the right front seat, always move         his/her weight off of the seat for    system has allowed the airbag(s) to
the front passenger seat as far           a period of time.                     be enabled, the on indicator will light
back as it will go. It is better to                                             and stay lit to remind you that the
secure the child restraint in a
                                      .   The right front passenger seat        airbag or airbags are active.
rear seat.                                is occupied by a smaller person,
                                          such as a child who has
                                          outgrown child restraints.
                                      .   Or, if there is a critical problem
                                          with the airbag system or the
                                          passenger sensing system.
3-32      Seats and Restraints

For some children who have              If the On Indicator is Lit for a          5. If, after reinstalling the child
outgrown child restraints and for       Child Restraint                              restraint and restarting the
very small adults, the passenger                                                     vehicle, the on indicator is still
sensing system may or may not turn      If a child restraint has been installed      lit, turn the vehicle off. Then
off the right front passenger frontal   and the on indicator is lit:                 slightly recline the vehicle
airbag and seat-mounted side            1. Turn the vehicle off.                     seatback and adjust the seat
impact airbag, depending upon                                                        cushion, if adjustable, to make
                                        2. Remove the child restraint from
the person's seating posture and                                                     sure that the vehicle seatback is
                                           the vehicle.
body build. Everyone in the vehicle                                                  not pushing the child restraint
who has outgrown child restraints       3. Remove any additional items               into the seat cushion.
should wear a safety belt                  from the seat such as blankets,
                                                                                  6. Restart the vehicle.
properly — whether or not there            cushions, seat covers, seat
is an airbag for that person.              heaters, or seat massagers.               If the on indicator is still lit, do
                                                                                     not install a child restraint in this
                                        4. Reinstall the child restraint
          { WARNING                        following the directions
                                                                                     vehicle and check with your
                                                                                     dealer.
                                           provided by the child restraint
 If the airbag readiness light ever        manufacturer and refer to
 comes on and stays on, it means           Securing Child Restraints on
 that something may be wrong               page 3‑48.
 with the airbag system. To help
 avoid injury to yourself or others,
 have the vehicle serviced right
 away. See Airbag Readiness
 Light on page 5‑16 for more
 information, including important
 safety information.
                                                                                  Seats and Restraints             3-33

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an        system to detect that person and         Additional Factors Affecting
Adult-Size Occupant                       enable the right front passenger         System Operation
                                          frontal airbag and seat-mounted
                                          side impact airbag:                      Safety belts help keep the
                                                                                   passenger in position on the seat
                                          1. Turn the vehicle off.                 during vehicle maneuvers and
                                          2. Remove any additional material        braking, which helps the passenger
                                             from the seat, such as blankets,      sensing system maintain the
                                             cushions, seat covers, seat           passenger airbag status. See
                                             heaters, or seat massagers.           “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
                                                                                   in the Index for additional
                                          3. Place the seatback in the fully       information about the importance
                                             upright position.                     of proper restraint use.
                                          4. Have the person sit upright in        If the shoulder portion of the belt
                                             the seat, centered on the seat        is pulled out all the way, the child
                                             cushion, with legs comfortably        restraint locking feature will be
If a person of adult-size is sitting in      extended.                             engaged. This may unintentionally
the right front passenger seat, but       5. Restart the vehicle and have the      cause the passenger sensing
the off indicator is lit, it could be        person remain in this position for    system to turn the airbag(s) off for
because that person is not sitting           two to three minutes after the on     some adult size occupants. If this
properly in the seat. If this happens,       indicator is lit.                     happens, let the belt go back all the
use the following steps to allow the                                               way and start again.
3-34      Seats and Restraints

A thick layer of additional material,   Servicing the
such as a blanket or cushion,
                                        Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
                                                                                       { WARNING
or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and       Airbags affect how the vehicle        For up to 10 seconds after the
seat massagers can affect how           should be serviced. There are parts   ignition is turned off and the
well the passenger sensing system       of the airbag system in several       battery is disconnected, an airbag
operates. We recommend that             places around the vehicle. Your       can still inflate during improper
you not use seat covers or other        dealer and the service manual have    service. You can be injured if you
aftermarket equipment except when       information about servicing the       are close to an airbag when it
approved by GM for your specific        vehicle and the airbag system. To     inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to        purchase a service manual, see        They are probably part of the
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on          Service Publications Ordering         airbag system. Be sure to follow
page 3‑35 for more information          Information on page 13‑15.            proper service procedures, and
about modifications that can affect                                           make sure the person performing
how the system operates.                                                      work for you is qualified to do so.

          { WARNING
 Stowing of articles under the
 passenger seat or between the
 passenger seat cushion and
 seatback may interfere with the
 proper operation of the passenger
 sensing system.
                                                                           Seats and Restraints          3-35

Adding Equipment to the               seat. The passenger sensing              Customer Assistance are in
                                      system may not operate properly          Step Two of the Customer
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle               if the original seat trim is             Satisfaction Procedure in
Q: Is there anything I might add      replaced with non-GM covers,             this manual. See Customer
   to or change about the vehicle     upholstery or trim, or with              Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
   that could keep the airbags        GM covers, upholstery or trim            Canada) on page 13‑1 or
   from working properly?             designed for a different vehicle.        Customer Satisfaction
                                      Any object, such as an                   Procedure (Mexico) on
A: Yes. If you add things that
                                      aftermarket seat heater or a             page 13‑3.
   change the vehicle's frame,
                                      comfort enhancing pad or              Q: Because I have a disability,
   bumper system, height, front end
                                      device, installed under or on            I have to get my vehicle
   or side sheet metal, they may
                                      top of the seat fabric, could also       modified. How can I find out
   keep the airbag system from
                                      interfere with the operation of          whether this will affect my
   working properly. Changing or
                                      the passenger sensing system.            airbag system?
   moving any parts of the front
                                      This could either prevent proper
   seats, safety belts, the airbag                                          A: If you have questions, call
                                      deployment of the passenger
   sensing and diagnostic module,                                              Customer Assistance. The
                                      airbag(s) or prevent the
   steering wheel, instrument                                                  phone numbers and addresses
                                      passenger sensing system
   panel, the inside rear mirror,                                              for Customer Assistance are
                                      from properly turning off the
   front sensors, or airbag wiring                                             in Step Two of the Customer
                                      passenger airbag(s). See
   can affect the operation of the                                             Satisfaction Procedure in this
                                      Passenger Sensing System on
   airbag system.                                                              manual. See Customer
                                      page 3‑30.
   In addition, the vehicle has                                                Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
                                      If you have any questions
   a passenger sensing system                                                  Canada) on page 13‑1 or
                                      about this, you should contact
   for the right front passenger                                               Customer Satisfaction
                                      Customer Assistance before you
   position, which includes sensors                                            Procedure (Mexico) on
                                      modify your vehicle. The phone
   that are part of the passenger                                              page 13‑3.
                                      numbers and addresses for
3-36      Seats and Restraints

Your dealer and the service manual    Replacing Airbag System              If an airbag inflates, you will need to
have information about the location                                        replace airbag system parts. See
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
                                      Parts After a Crash                  your dealer for service.
diagnostic module and airbag                                               If the airbag readiness light stays on
wiring.                                        { WARNING                   after the vehicle is started or comes
                                      A crash can damage the               on when you are driving, the airbag
Airbag System Check                                                        system may not work properly.
                                      airbag systems in the vehicle.
The airbag system does not need       A damaged airbag system              Have the vehicle serviced right
regularly scheduled maintenance or                                         away. See Airbag Readiness Light
                                      may not work properly and
replacement. Make sure the airbag                                          on page 5‑16 for more information.
                                      may not protect you and your
readiness light is working. See       passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Airbag Readiness Light on             in serious injury or even death.
page 5‑16 for more information.       To help make sure the airbag
Notice: If an airbag covering         systems are working properly
is damaged, opened, or broken,        after a crash, have them
the airbag may not work properly.     inspected and any necessary
Do not open or break the airbag       replacements made as soon as
coverings. If there are any           possible.
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 3‑27. See your
dealer for service.
                                                                            Seats and Restraints             3-37

Child Restraints                   The manufacturer's instructions that
                                   come with the booster seat, state
                                                                             Q: What is the proper way to
                                                                                wear safety belts?
                                   the weight and height limitations for
Older Children                     that booster. Use a booster seat
                                                                             A: An older child should wear a
                                                                                lap-shoulder belt and get the
                                   with a lap-shoulder belt until the           additional restraint a shoulder
                                   child passes the below fit test:             belt can provide. The shoulder
                                   .   Sit all the way back on the seat.        belt should not cross the face
                                       Do the knees bend at the seat            or neck. The lap belt should fit
                                       edge? If yes, continue. If no,           snugly below the hips, just
                                       return to the booster seat.              touching the top of the thighs.
                                   .   Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.            This applies belt force to the
                                       Does the shoulder belt rest on           child's pelvic bones in a crash.
                                       the shoulder? If yes, continue.          It should never be worn over the
                                       If no, then return to the                abdomen, which could cause
                                       booster seat.                            severe or even fatal internal
                                                                                injuries in a crash.
                                   .   Does the lap belt fit low and
                                       snug on the hips, touching the        According to accident statistics,
Older children who have outgrown
                                       thighs? If yes, continue. If no,      children and infants are safer
booster seats should wear the
                                       return to the booster seat.           when properly restrained in a child
vehicle's safety belts.
                                                                             restraint system or infant restraint
                                   .   Can proper safety belt fit be         system secured in a rear seating
                                       maintained for the length of          position.
                                       the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
                                       return to the booster seat.
3-38      Seats and Restraints

In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people                                             WARNING (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older                                            might also slide under the lap
children need to use safety belts                                           belt. The belt force would then
properly.                                                                   be applied right on the abdomen.
                                                                            That could cause serious or fatal
                                                                            injuries. The shoulder belt should
          { WARNING                                                         go over the shoulder and across
 Never do this.                                                             the chest.
 Never allow two children to wear
 the same safety belt. The safety
 belt can not properly spread the
 impact forces. In a crash, the two
                                               { WARNING
 children can be crushed together     Never do this.
 and seriously injured. A safety
 belt must be used by only one        Never allow a child to wear the
 person at a time.                    safety belt with the shoulder belt
                                      behind their back. A child can be
                                      seriously injured by not wearing
                                      the lap-shoulder belt properly. In
                                      a crash, the child would not be
                                      restrained by the shoulder belt.
                                      The child could move too far
                                      forward increasing the chance of
                                      head and neck injury. The child
                                                              (Continued)
                                                                                Seats and Restraints            3-39

Infants and Young                       Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
                                                                                     WARNING (Continued)
                                        offer protection for adults and older
Children                                children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs             and infants. Neither the vehicle's        For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants       safety belt system nor its airbag         40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
and all other children. Neither the     system is designed for them. Every        infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and       time infants and young children ride      110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
size of the traveler changes the        in vehicles, they should have the         arms. An infant should be
need, for everyone, to use safety       protection provided by appropriate        secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every   child restraints.                         restraint.
state in the United States and in       Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says            properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be         or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.

           { WARNING                              { WARNING
                                         Never do this.
 Children can be seriously injured
 or strangled if a shoulder belt is      Never hold an infant or a child
 wrapped around their neck and           while riding in a vehicle. Due to
 the safety belt continues to            crash forces, an infant or a child
 tighten. Never leave children           will become so heavy it is not
 unattended in a vehicle and never       possible to hold it during a crash.
 allow children to play with the                                 (Continued)
 safety belts.
3-40      Seats and Restraints

                                                                                 For most basic types of child
         { WARNING                                                               restraints, there are many
                                                                                 different models available. When
Never do this.                                                                   purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against,                                                     sure it is designed to be used
or very close to, any airbag when                                                in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured                                             restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing                                               that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front                                               vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child                                                 The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also                                             instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing                                                restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you   Q: What are the different types of      height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing                add-on child restraints?             child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front                                               are many kinds of restraints
                                         A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front                                                      available for children with
                                            are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it                                                 special needs.
                                            owner, are available in four basic
will go.                                    types. Selection of a particular
                                            restraint should take into
                                            consideration not only the child's
                                            weight, height, and age but also
                                            whether or not the restraint will
                                            be compatible with the motor
                                            vehicle in which it will be used.
                                                                              Seats and Restraints             3-41

                                                                               Child Restraint Systems
         { WARNING                               { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and          A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants     so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is          safety belt may not remain low
because an infant's neck is not         on the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head            Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with            the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash,       the belt would apply force on a
an infant in a rear-facing child        body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint,   any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be              could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest        injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back      serious or fatal injuries during a         (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should           crash, young children should           A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing        always be secured in appropriate       provides restraint with the seating
child restraints.                       child restraints.                      surface against the back of the
                                                                               infant.
                                                                               The harness system holds the infant
                                                                               in place and, in a crash, acts to
                                                                               keep the infant positioned in the
                                                                               restraint.
3-42       Seats and Restraints

                                                                             Securing an Add-On Child
                                                                             Restraint in the Vehicle

                                                                                       { WARNING
                                                                              A child can be seriously injured
                                                                              or killed in a crash if the child
                                                                              restraint is not properly secured
                                                                              in the vehicle. Secure the child
                                                                              restraint properly in the vehicle
                                                                              using the vehicle safety belt or
                                                                              LATCH system, following the
  (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat               (C) Booster Seats               instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B)      A booster seat (C) is a child            child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's   restraint designed to improve the fit    in this manual.
body with the harness.               of the vehicle's safety belt system.
                                     A booster seat can also help a child    To help reduce the chance of injury,
                                     to see out the window.                  the child restraint must be secured
                                                                             in the vehicle. Child restraint
                                                                             systems must be secured in vehicle
                                                                             seats by lap belts or the lap belt
                                                                             portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
                                                                             the LATCH system. See Lower
                                                                             Anchors and Tethers for Children
                                                                             (LATCH System) (Coupe and
                                                                             Convertible Models Only) on
                                                                             page 3‑43 or Lower Anchors and
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints              3-43

Tethers for Children (LATCH              In some areas of the United States       Lower Anchors and
System) (ZO6 and ZR1 Models              and Canada, Certified Child
Only) on page 3‑44 for more              Passenger Safety Technicians
                                                                                  Tethers for Children
information. Children can be             (CPSTs) are available to inspect         (LATCH System) (Coupe
endangered in a crash if the child       and demonstrate how to correctly         and Convertible
restraint is not properly secured in     use and install child restraints. In
the vehicle.                             the U.S., refer to the National
                                                                                  Models Only)
When securing an add-on child            Highway Traffic Safety                   Some child restraints have a LATCH
restraint, refer to the instructions     Administration (NHTSA) website           system. As part of the LATCH
that come with the restraint which       to locate the nearest child safety       system, your child restraint may
may be on the restraint itself or in a   seat inspection station. For CPST        have lower attachments and/or a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.    availability in Canada, check with       top tether. The LATCH system can
The child restraint instructions are     Transport Canada or the Provincial       help hold the child restraint in place
important, so if they are not            Ministry of Transportation office.       during driving or in a crash. Some
available, obtain a replacement                                                   vehicles have lower and/or top
                                         Securing the Child Within the            tether anchors designed to secure
copy from the manufacturer.              Child Restraint                          a child restraint with lower
Keep in mind that an unsecured                                                    attachments and/or a top tether.
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
                                                   { WARNING                      Some child restraints with a top
people in the vehicle. Be sure to         A child can be seriously injured        tether are designed to be used
properly secure any child restraint in                                            whether the top tether is anchored
                                          or killed in a crash if the child
the vehicle — even when no child is                                               or not. Other child restraints require
                                          is not properly secured in the
in it.                                                                            that the top tether be anchored.
                                          child restraint. Secure the child       A national or local law may require
                                          properly following the instructions     that the top tether be anchored.
                                          that came with that child restraint.
3-44      Seats and Restraints

In Canada, the law requires that        Lower Anchors and                        child restraint has a top tether,
forward-facing child restraints have                                             make sure your child restraint is
a top tether, and that the tether be
                                        Tethers for Children                     properly installed using the top
attached.                               (LATCH System)                           tether anchor and the vehicle's
Your vehicle does not have lower        (ZO6 and ZR1                             safety belt. A child restraint must
                                                                                 never be installed using only the
anchors or top tether anchors to        Models Only)                             top tether and anchor. Refer to
secure a child restraint with the
LATCH system. If a national or          Some child restraints have a LATCH       your child restraint instructions and
local law requires that your top        system. As part of the LATCH             see Securing Child Restraints on
tether be anchored, do not use a        system, your child restraint may         page 3‑48 for instructions on
child restraint in this vehicle         have lower attachments and/or a          securing your child restraint using
because a top tether cannot be          top tether. The LATCH system can         the vehicle's safety belts.
properly anchored. You must use         help hold the child restraint in place   In order to use the top tether
the safety belts to secure your child   during driving or in a crash. Some       anchors in your vehicle, you
restraint in this vehicle, unless a     vehicles have lower and/or top           need a child restraint equipped
national or local law requires that     tether anchors designed to secure        with a top tether. The child restraint
the top tether be anchored. Refer to    a child restraint with lower             manufacturer will provide you with
the child restraint instructions and    attachments and/or a top tether.         instructions on how to use the child
instructions in this manual for         Your vehicle does not have lower         restraint and its top tether. The
securing a child restraint using the    anchors to accommodate lower             following explains how to attach a
vehicle's safety belts. See Securing    attachments. Your vehicle does           child restraint with the top tether in
Child Restraints on page 3‑48.          have a top tether anchor. If your        your vehicle.
                                                                                   Seats and Restraints            3-45

                                           Your child restraint may have            Top Tether Anchor Locations
                                           a single tether (A) or a dual
                                           tether (C). Either will have a single
                                           attachment (B) to secure the top
                                           tether to the anchor.
                                           Some top tether-equipped child
                                           restraints are designed for use with
                                           or without the top tether being
                                           attached. Others require the top
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top        tether always to be attached.
of the child restraint to the vehicle.     In Canada, the law requires that
A top tether anchor is built into the      forward-facing child restraints have
vehicle. The top tether                    a top tether, and that the tether be
attachment (B) on the child restraint      attached. Be sure to read and follow
connects to the top tether anchor in       the instructions for your child
the vehicle in order to reduce the
                                                                                    i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
                                           restraint.                               positions with top tether anchors.
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in   According to accident statistics,
a crash.                                   children and infants are safer when
                                           properly restrained in a child
                                           restraint system or infant restraint
                                           system secured in a rear seating
                                           position.

                                                                                    To assist you in locating the top
                                                                                    tether anchors, the top tether anchor
                                                                                    symbol is located on the trim cover.
3-46      Seats and Restraints

                                   Securing a Child Restraint with
                                   a Top Tether                                 WARNING (Continued)
                                                                             tighten. Buckle any unused safety
                                             { WARNING                       belts behind the child restraint so
                                                                             children cannot reach them. Pull
                                    If a LATCH-type child restraint is
                                                                             the shoulder belt all the way out
                                    not attached to anchors, the child
                                                                             of the retractor to set the lock,
                                    restraint will not be able to protect
                                                                             if the vehicle has one, after the
                                    the child correctly. In a crash, the
                                                                             child restraint has been installed.
                                    child could be seriously injured
                                    or killed. Install a LATCH-type
                                    child restraint properly using the      Notice: Do not let the LATCH
The top tether anchor is located    anchors, or use the vehicle safety      attachments rub against the
under the cover behind the          belts to secure the restraint,          vehicle’s safety belts. This may
passenger seat.                     following the instructions that         damage these parts. If necessary,
                                    came with the child restraint and       move buckled safety belts to
                                    the instructions in this manual.        avoid rubbing the LATCH
                                                                            attachments.
                                                                            Do not fold the empty rear seat
                                                                            with a safety belt buckled. This
                                             { WARNING                      could damage the safety belt or
                                                                            the seat. Unbuckle and return the
                                    Children can be seriously injured       safety belt to its stowed position,
                                    or strangled if a shoulder belt is      before folding the seat.
                                    wrapped around their neck and
                                    the safety belt continues to
                                                            (Continued)
                                                                              Seats and Restraints            3-47

Do not secure a child restraint in a      2.3. Route, attach and tighten
position without a top tether anchor           the top tether according
if a national or local law requires            to your child restraint
that the top tether be attached, or if         instructions and the
the instructions that come with the            following instructions:
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
1. Secure the child restraint using
   the vehicle's safety belt. See
   Securing Child Restraints on                                                        If the position you are using
   page 3‑48.                                                                          has a fixed headrest or
                                                                                       head restraint and you are
2. If the child restraint manufacturer                                                 using a dual tether, route
   recommends that the top tether                                                      the tether around the
   be attached, attach and tighten                                                     headrest or head restraint.
   the top tether to the top tether           If the position you are using
   anchor, if equipped. Refer to the                                           3. Before placing a child in the
                                              has a fixed headrest or             child restraint, make sure it
   child restraint instructions and           head restraint and you are
   the following steps:                                                           is securely held in place. To
                                              using a single tether, route        check, grasp the child restraint
   2.1. Find the top tether anchor.           the tether over the headrest        at the LATCH path and attempt
                                              or head restraint.                  to move it side‐to‐side and
   2.2. Press the ribbed area of the
        trim cover to open the cover                                              back‐and‐forth. There should
        and expose the anchor.                                                    be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
                                                                                  movement for proper installation.
3-48      Seats and Restraints

Replacing LATCH System                Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
                                                                                         { WARNING
                                      This vehicle has airbags. In
                                      addition, the vehicle has a               A child in a rear-facing
         {    WARNING                 passenger sensing system which
                                      is designed to turn off the right
                                                                                child restraint can be seriously
                                                                                injured or killed if the right
 A crash can damage the               front passenger frontal airbag            front passenger airbag inflates.
 LATCH system in the vehicle.         and seat-mounted side impact              This is because the back of the
 A damaged LATCH system may           airbag (if equipped) under certain        rear-facing child restraint would
 not properly secure the child        conditions. See Passenger Sensing         be very close to the inflating
 restraint, resulting in serious      System on page 3‑30 and                   airbag. A child in a forward-facing
 injury or even death in a crash.     Passenger Airbag Status Indicator         child restraint can be seriously
 To help make sure the LATCH          on page 5‑17 for more information,        injured or killed if the right front
 system is working properly after     including important safety                passenger airbag inflates and the
 a crash, see your dealer to have     information.                              passenger seat is in a forward
 the system inspected and any         A label on the sun visor says,            position.
 necessary replacements made          “Never put a rear-facing child seat
                                                                                Even if the passenger sensing
 as soon as possible.                 in the front.” This is because the risk
                                      to the rear-facing child is so great,     system has turned off the right
                                      if the airbag deploys.                    front passenger frontal airbag,
If the vehicle has the LATCH system                                             no system is fail-safe. No one
and it was being used during a                                                  can guarantee that an airbag will
crash, new LATCH system parts                                                   not deploy under some unusual
may be needed.                                                                  circumstance, even though it is
New parts and repairs may be                                                    turned off.
necessary even if the LATCH                                                                             (Continued)
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
                                                                               Seats and Restraints              3-49

                                        how and where to install the child      You will be using the lap-shoulder
    WARNING (Continued)                 restraint using LATCH. If a child       belt to secure the child restraint in
                                        restraint is secured using a safety     this position. Follow the instructions
 Secure rear-facing child               belt and it uses a top tether, see      that came with the child restraint.
 restraints in a rear seat, even if     Lower Anchors and Tethers for           1. Move the seat as far back as
 the airbag is off. If you secure a     Children (LATCH System) (Coupe             it will go before securing the
 forward-facing child restraint in      and Convertible Models Only) on            forward-facing child restraint.
 the right front seat, always move      page 3‑43 or Lower Anchors and
 the front passenger seat as far        Tethers for Children (LATCH                When the passenger sensing
                                        System) (ZO6 and ZR1 Models                system has turned off the right
 back as it will go. It is better to
                                        Only) on page 3‑44 for top tether          front passenger frontal airbag
 secure the child restraint in a
                                        anchor locations.                          and seat-mounted side impact
 rear seat.                                                                        airbag (if equipped), the off
                                        Do not secure a child seat in a            indicator on the passenger
 See Passenger Sensing System
                                        position without a top tether anchor       airbag status indicator should
 on page 3‑30 for additional
                                        if a national or local law requires        light and stay lit when you start
 information.                           that the top tether be anchored, or        the vehicle. See Passenger
                                        if the instructions that come with         Airbag Status Indicator on
Rear-facing child restraints should     the child restraint say that the top       page 5‑17.
not be installed in the vehicle, even   strap must be anchored.
if the airbag(s) are off.                                                       2. Put the child restraint on
                                        In Canada, the law requires that           the seat.
If the child restraint has the LATCH    forward-facing child restraints have
system, see Lower Anchors and           a top tether, and that the tether be    3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Tethers for Children (LATCH             attached.                                  the lap and shoulder portions of
System) (Coupe and Convertible                                                     the vehicle’s safety belt through
Models Only) on page 3‑43 or                                                       or around the restraint. The child
Lower Anchors and Tethers for                                                      restraint instructions will show
Children (LATCH System) (ZO6 and                                                   you how.
ZR1 Models Only) on page 3‑44 for
3-50      Seats and Restraints




4. Push the latch plate into the        5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way   6. To tighten the belt, push down
   buckle until it clicks.                 out of the retractor to set the         on the child restraint, pull the
   Position the release button on          lock. When the retractor lock is        shoulder portion of the belt to
   the buckle so that the safety belt      set, the belt can be tightened but      tighten the lap portion of the belt,
   could be quickly unbuckled if           not pulled out of the retractor.        and feed the shoulder belt back
   necessary.                                                                      into the retractor. When installing
                                                                                   a forward-facing child restraint,
                                                                                   it may be helpful to use your
                                                                                   knee to push down on the child
                                                                                   restraint as you tighten the belt.
                                                                                   Try to pull the belt out of the
                                                                                   retractor to make sure the
                                                                                   retractor is locked. If the
                                                                                   retractor is not locked, repeat
                                                                                   Steps 5 and 6.
                                                                                 Seats and Restraints   3-51

7. If the child restraint has a top     If the airbag or airbags are off, the
   tether, follow the child restraint   off indicator in the passenger airbag
   manufacturer's instructions          status indicator will come on and
   regarding the use of the top         stay on when the vehicle is started.
   tether. See Lower Anchors and        If a child restraint has been
   Tethers for Children (LATCH          installed and the on indicator is lit,
   System) (Coupe and Convertible       see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
   Models Only) on page 3‑43 or         Child Restraint ” under Passenger
   Lower Anchors and Tethers for        Sensing System on page 3‑30 for
   Children (LATCH System)              more information.
   (ZO6 and ZR1 Models Only) on
   page 3‑44 for more information.      To remove the child restraint,
                                        unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
8. Before placing a child in the        let it return to the stowed position.
   child restraint, make sure it        If the top tether is attached to a top
   is securely held in place. To        tether anchor, disconnect it.
   check, grasp the child restraint
   at the safety belt path and
   attempt to move it side‐to‐side
   and back‐and‐forth. When the
   child restraint is properly
   installed, there should be no
   more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
   movement.
3-52   Seats and Restraints

                              2 NOTES
                                                                                                                     Storage        4-1

Storage                                                    Storage
                                                           Compartments
Storage Compartments
 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   4-1   Glove Box
 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    4-1   Open the glove box by lifting up on
 Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      4-1   the lever. Use the key to lock and
 Center Console Storage . . . . . .                  4-2   unlock the lighted glove box.
Additional Storage Features
 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2       Cupholders
 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3             Two cupholders are located on
                                                           the center console next to the shift          Convertible Shown, Coupe
                                                           lever. Slide the handle from the left                  Similar
                                                           to the right side to access the lid.
                                                                                                     To access a storage compartment,
                                                                                                     pull up to open the cover. The
                                                           Rear Storage                              covers cannot be removed.
                                                           Two rear storage compartments are         For ZO6 and ZR1, and Grand Sport
                                                           located in the floor of the rear hatch/   Coupe with a manual transmission,
                                                           trunk area.                               the right rear compartment stores
                                                                                                     the battery and cannot be used for
                                                                                                     storage.
                                                                                                     Notice: Do not store heavy or
                                                                                                     sharp objects in the rear storage
                                                                                                     compartments located in the
                                                                                                     hatch/trunk area. The objects
                                                                                                     could damage the underbody.
4-2      Storage

Rear Trunk Partition                                                             Additional Storage
For vehicles with the power                                                      Features
convertible top option only, there is
a trunk partition to keep cargo from
getting in the way of the convertible                                            Cargo Cover
top. The trunk partition must be in                                              For vehicles with this feature,
place for the convertible top to                                                 the security shade can provide
move. If the trunk partition is not                                              hidden storage in the rear area
properly in place, the ATTACH                                                    of the vehicle. The shade is also
TRUNK PARTITION message                                                          helpful in blocking the glare from
displays. See Convertible Top                                                    the removable roof when it is stored
Messages on page 5‑37 for more                                                   in the rear compartment.
information.                             Pull the divider up and snap it onto
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted   the snaps on both sides of the trunk.
board with a horizontal flap that can
be attached to the top of the trunk to   Center Console Storage
divide the storage compartment or it     To use this storage area, pull the
stores flat when not in use.             cover up on the driver side front
                                         edge of the console and swing it
                                         to the passenger side.
                                         Some vehicles might also have
                                         input jacks for auxiliary audio
                                         devices. See Auxiliary Devices on
                                         page 7‑17.
                                                                                               Storage         4-3

Using the Cargo Cover




                                       3. Grasp the loop at the rear center   4. Push the loop to the top of the
                                          of the shade and wrap it around        striker (base plate).
1. Hook the elastic loops on the          the striker assembly.
   front corners (A) of the shade to                                          Convenience Net
   the T-nuts located on the front
   corners of the rear hatch frame.                                           Use the convenience net, located in
                                                                              the rear, to store small loads as far
2. Hook the elastic loops on the                                              forward as possible. The net should
   rear corners (B) of the shade to                                           not be used to store heavy loads.
   the hooks recessed inside the
   rear hatch frame, near the rear
   corners.
4-4   Storage

                2 NOTES
                                                                                                                   Instruments and Controls                                  5-1

Instruments and                                                 Boost Gauge (ZR1) . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
                                                                Engine Oil Pressure
                                                                                                                            Information Displays
                                                                                                                             Driver Information
Controls                                                         Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
                                                                Engine Coolant Temperature
                                                                                                                              Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
                                                                                                                             Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-31
                                                                 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
                                                                Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15              Vehicle Messages
Controls                                                                                                                     Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . .          5-35
 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2                            Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
                                                                Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16                      Battery Voltage and Charging
 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3                                                                                      Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-35
 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4   Passenger Airbag Status
                                                                 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17      Brake System Messages . . . .                   5-36
 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4                                                                                       Convertible Top Messages . . .                  5-37
 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5          Malfunction
                                                                 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18               Cruise Control Messages . . . .                 5-38
 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6                                                                 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . .            5-39
 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6            Brake System Warning
                                                                 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21    Engine Cooling System
 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7                                                                            Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-39
 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8       Antilock Brake System (ABS)
                                                                 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22              Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . .             5-40
Warning Lights, Gauges, and                                     One-to-Four Shift Light                                      Engine Power Messages . . . .                   5-41
Indicators                                                       (Manual Transmission) . . . . . 5-22                        Fuel System Messages . . . . . .                5-41
 Warning Lights, Gauges, and                                    Active Handling System                                       Key and Lock Messages . . . . .                 5-42
   Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8        Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23    Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .         5-44
 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9                 Traction Control System                                      Ride Control System
 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11                (TCS) Warning Light . . . . . . . 5-23                       Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-44
 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11          Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24                 Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . .              5-49
 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11            Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24          Anti-Theft Alarm System
 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11            High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25                     Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-50
                                                                Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25                    Service Vehicle Messages . . .                  5-50
                                                                Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-2         Instruments and Controls

 Starting the Vehicle                                   Controls                                Telescopic Steering Column
  Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-50
 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     5-51
 Transmission Messages . . . . .                 5-53   Steering Wheel
 Vehicle Reminder                                       Adjustment
  Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-54
 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . .                 5-54
Vehicle Personalization
 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-55
Universal Remote System
 Universal Remote System . . . 5-64
 Universal Remote System
  Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
 Universal Remote System
                                                                                                For vehicles with this feature, the
  Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
                                                                                                telescopic steering column control
                                                                                                is located on the right side of the
                                                                                                steering column.
                                                        The lever is located on the left side
                                                                                                To adjust the telescopic steering
                                                        of the steering column.
                                                                                                column:
                                                        To adjust the steering wheel:
                                                                                                1. Push the switch forward to move
                                                        1. Pull the lever toward you.              the wheel away from you.
                                                        2. Move the steering wheel up           2. Pull the switch toward you to
                                                           or down.                                move the wheel closer to you.
                                                        3. Release the lever to lock the
                                                           steering wheel in place.
                                                                      Instruments and Controls                 5-3

The telescopic steering column       b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press          To change radio stations:
position can be stored with your     to silence the vehicle speakers only.
memory settings. See “Memory
                                                                             .   Press w or x to go to the next
                                     Press again to turn the sound on.
Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Wheel”                                               or to the previous radio station
under Power Seat Adjustment on       For vehicles with Bluetooth or              and stay there. The radio only
page 3‑3 for more information.       OnStar® systems press and                   seeks stations with a strong
                                     hold b g for longer than                    signal that are in the
Steering Wheel Controls              two seconds to interact with                selected band.
                                     those systems. See Bluetooth on         .   Press and hold w or x for
                                     page 7‑18 and the OnStar Owner's
                                                                                 two seconds until SCAN displays
                                     Guide for more information.
                                                                                 and a beep sounds to scan
                                     c (Phone On Hook): Press to                 stations. The radio goes to a
                                     reject an incoming call, or end a           station, plays for a few seconds,
                                     current call.                               then goes to the next station.
                                     w x (Next/Previous):     Press to           Press again to stop scanning.
                                     change radio stations or select         .   Press and hold w or x for
                                     tracks on a CD.                             four seconds until PRESET
                                                                                 SCAN displays and a beep
                                                                                 sounds to scan presets. The
                                                                                 radio goes to a station, plays for
                                                                                 a few seconds, then goes to the
For vehicles with steering wheel                                                 next station. Press again to stop
controls, some audio controls can                                                scanning.
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
5-4      Instruments and Controls

To select tracks on a CD:             Horn                                 Move the lever to the following
                                                                           positions:
.   Press w or x to go to the next    Press near or on the horn symbols
    or to the previous track when a   on the steering wheel pad to sound   1 (High Speed): Use for fast
    CD is playing.                    the horn.                            wipes.
.   Press and hold w or x for
                                                                           6        (Low Speed): Use for
    more than two seconds to scan
                                      Windshield Wiper/Washer              slow wipes.
    the current CD. The CD goes to                                         & (Delay): Use to set a delay
    the next track, plays the first                                        between wipes.
    10 seconds, then goes to the                                           x (Delay Adjustment): Use for
    next track. Press again to stop                                        a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the
    scanning.                                                              intermittent adjust band down for
.   Press and hold w or x for                                              a longer delay or up for a shorter
                                                                           delay. The wiper speed can only be
    more than four seconds to scan    The windshield wiper lever is        manually adjusted when the lever is
    all of the CDs loaded. The CD     located on the right side of the     in this position.
    goes to the next CD, plays the    steering column.
    first 10 seconds of each track,                                        9 (Off): Use to turn off the
    then goes to the next CD. Press                                        windshield wipers.
    again to stop scanning.                                                8 (Mist):     Move all the way down
+ e − e (Volume): Press to                                                 to mist and release for a single
increase or to decrease the radio                                          wiping cycle. The windshield wipers
volume.                                                                    will stop after one wipe. Hold the
                                                                           band on mist longer for more wipes.
1 to 6 (Preset Pushbuttons):
Press to play stations that are
programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons.
                                                                            Instruments and Controls                5-5

Heavy snow or ice can overload                                                     Compass
the wipers. If this occurs, a circuit              { WARNING
breaker will stop the wipers until the                                             Compass Operation
motor cools. Clear all ice and snow       In freezing weather, do not use
                                          the washer until the windshield is       With the compass feature on,
from the wiper blades before using                                                 each time the vehicle is started, the
them. If frozen to the windshield,        warmed. Otherwise the washer
                                          fluid can form ice on the                compass will take a few seconds
carefully loosen them or thaw them.                                                to adjust and display the current
Damaged wiper blades should be            windshield, blocking your vision.
                                                                                   compass heading. For example,
replaced. See Wiper Blade                                                          NE is displayed for north-east.
Replacement on page 10‑46.               If the fluid in the windshield washer
                                         fluid reservoir is low, the message       Compass Calibration
Windshield Washer
                                         CHECK WASHER FLUID will                   Press P once to turn the compass
The lever on the right side of           appear on the Driver Information
the steering column also controls                                                  display on or off.
                                         Center (DIC) display. It will take
the windshield washer. There is          15 seconds after the bottle is refilled   If after several seconds the display
a button at the end of the lever.        for this message to turn off. For         does not show a compass heading,
To spray washer fluid on the             information on the correct washer         there may be a strong magnetic
windshield, press the button and         fluid to use, see Washer Fluid on         field interfering with the compass.
hold it. The washer will spray until     page 10‑37 and Recommended                Interference can be caused by a
you release the button. The wipers       Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6.       magnetic antenna mount, note pad
will continue to clear the window for                                              holder, or similar object. If the
about six seconds after the button is                                              letter C or CAL appears in the
released and then stop or return to                                                compass window, the compass
your preset speed.                                                                 needs calibration.
5-6      Instruments and Controls

Depending on the mirror, in order to      To adjust for compass variance:     Clock
calibrate, CAL must be displayed in       1. Find your current location and
the mirror compass windows. If CAL                                            To set the clock:
                                             variance zone number on the
is not displayed, press P for                zone map that follows.           1. Press and hold H until the
several seconds or until CAL is                                                  correct hour displays.
displayed.                                                                    2. Press and hold M until the
If the compass has map lamps, it                                                 correct minute displays.
can be placed in calibration mode                                             The clock mode automatically times
by pressing and holding the left map                                          out with the changed display format
light button until a C appears on the                                         set as the current default setting.
compass display.
The mirror compass can be                                                     Power Outlets
calibrated by driving the vehicle in
                                                                              The accessory power outlet can be
circles at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less until
                                                                              used to plug in electrical equipment,
the display reads a direction.
                                                                              such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
Compass Variance                                                              The accessory power outlet is
The mirror is set to zone eight.          2. Press and hold P until a Z and   located inside the center console
If you do not live in zone eight or          a zone number displays. The      storage compartment, on the
drive out of the area, the compass           compass is now in zone mode.     forward left side.
variance needs to be changed to                                               Remove the cover to access and
                                          3. Once the zone number displays,
the appropriate zone.                                                         replace when not in use.
                                             press P repeatedly until you
                                             reach the correct zone number.
                                             Stop pressing P and the mirror
                                             returns to normal operation.
                                                                       Instruments and Controls               5-7

                                      Certain electrical accessories       Cigarette Lighter
         { WARNING                    may not be compatible with the
                                      accessory power outlet and could     To use the cigarette lighter, push it
 Power is always supplied to the      overload vehicle or adapter fuses.   in all the way and let go. When it is
 outlets. Do not leave electrical     If a problem is experienced, see     ready, it will pop back out by itself.
 equipment plugged in when the        your dealer.                         Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
 vehicle is not in use because the                                         in while it is heating does not let
 vehicle could catch fire and cause   When adding electrical equipment,
                                      be sure to follow the proper         the lighter back away from the
 injury or death.                                                          heating element when it is hot.
                                      installation instructions included
                                      with the equipment. See Add-On       Damage from overheating can
Notice: Leaving electrical            Electrical Equipment on page 9‑55.   occur to the lighter or heating
equipment plugged in for an                                                element, or a fuse could be
                                      It is recommended that a qualified   blown. Do not hold a cigarette
extended period of time while
                                      technician or dealer be seen for     lighter in while it is heating.
the vehicle is off will drain the
                                      the proper installation of your
battery. Always unplug electrical
                                      equipment.
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that         Notice: Hanging heavy
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere         equipment from the power outlet
rating.                               can cause damage not covered
                                      by the vehicle warranty. The
                                      power outlets are designed for
                                      accessory power plugs only, such
                                      as cell phone charge cords.
5-8      Instruments and Controls

Ashtrays                                Warning Lights,                         Gauges can indicate when there
                                                                                could be a problem with a vehicle
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are   Gauges, and                             function. Often gauges and warning
located on the instrument panel, in                                             lights work together to indicate a
front of the shift lever. To use the    Indicators                              problem with the vehicle.
ashtray, press on the indentation at    Warning lights and gauges can
the top of the door.                                                            When one of the warning lights
                                        signal that something is wrong          comes on and stays on while
Notice: If papers, pins, or other       before it becomes serious enough        driving, or when one of the gauges
flammable items are put in the          to cause an expensive repair or         shows there may be a problem,
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other        replacement. Paying attention to        check the section that explains what
smoking materials could ignite          the warning lights and gauges could     to do. Follow this manual's advice.
them and possibly damage the            prevent injury.                         Waiting to do repairs can be costly
vehicle. Never put flammable            Warning lights come on when there       and even dangerous.
items in the ashtray.                   could be a problem with a vehicle
Loose objects, such as paper clips,     function. Some warning lights come
can lodge behind and beneath the        on briefly when the engine is started
ashtray lid and prevent movement        to indicate they are working.
of the lid. You should avoid putting
small, loose objects near the
ashtray.
                                                           Instruments and Controls   5-9

Instrument Cluster




                     English Coupe and Convertible Shown, Metric Similar
5-10   Instruments and Controls




                       ZR1 – English Shown, ZO6, and Metric Similar
                                                                       Instruments and Controls               5-11

Speedometer                              Tachometer                           Fuel Gauge
The speedometer shows the speed          The tachometer displays the engine
in either kilometers per hour (km/h)     speed in thousands of revolutions
or miles per hour (mph). For more        per minute (rpm).
information see “Personal Options”       Notice: Fuel shuts off at about
under Vehicle Personalization on         6500 rpm for the base model,
page 5‑55.                               7000 rpm for the ZO6 model, and
                                         6600 rpm for the ZR1 model. If the
Odometer                                 vehicle continues to be driven at
To read the odometer with the            the fuel shut off rpm, the engine
ignition off, turn on the parking        could be damaged. Be sure to
lamps.                                   operate the vehicle below the
                                         fuel shut off rpm or reduce the
If the vehicle needs a new odometer      vehicle's rpm quickly when the
installed, the mileage total of the      fuel shuts off.                      The fuel gauge shows how much
new odometer will be set to the                                               fuel the vehicle has left while the
original kilometers (miles) of the old                                        engine is on.
odometer. See your dealer if the
odometer must be replaced in the                                              An arrow on the fuel gauge
vehicle.                                                                      indicates the side of the vehicle
                                                                              the fuel door is on.
5-12       Instruments and Controls
                                        .   It takes a little more or less
When the needle approaches the
                                            fuel to fill up than the gauge
                                                                                 Boost Gauge (ZR1)
low fuel symbol, a chime sounds
and LOW FUEL appears on the                 indicated. For example, the
Driver Information Center (DIC)             gauge may have indicated half
display. There is still a little fuel       full, but it took a little more or
left, but the vehicle's fuel tank           less than half of the tank's
should be filled soon.                      capacity to fill the tank.
Press the RESET button to
                                        .   The gauge pointer may move
acknowledge a DIC message(s).               while cornering, braking or
Pressing the RESET button also              speeding up.
turns off a DIC message but the         .   The gauge may not indicate the
LOW FUEL message comes on                   tank is empty when the ignition
again in 10 minutes if fuel is not          is turned off.
added to the vehicle.                   .   The gauge reading may change                  English
Here are five things that some              slightly within the first several
owners ask about. All these things          minutes after starting the
are normal and do not indicate that         vehicle.
anything is wrong with the fuel
gauge.                                  See “DIC Operation and Displays”
                                        in Driver Information Center (DIC)
.   At the service station, the gas     on page 5‑25 for more information.
    pump shuts off before the gauge
    reads the full.




                                                                                          Metric
                                                              Instruments and Controls      5-13

For vehicles that have this gauge, it   Engine Oil Pressure
is located near the instrument panel
cluster.
                                        Gauge
This gauge indicates vacuum during
light to moderate throttle and boost
under heavier throttle.
It displays the air pressure level in
the intake manifold before it enters
the engine's combustion chamber.
The gauge is automatically centered
at zero every time the engine is
started. Actual vacuum or boost                                                Metric
is displayed from this zero point.
Changes in ambient pressure,
such as driving in mountains and                 English
changing weather, will slightly
change the zero reading.




                                                                     English— ZO6 and ZR1 Models
5-14   Instruments and Controls

                                                                      Oil pressure should be 140 to
                                         { WARNING                    550 kPa (20 to 80 psi). In certain
                                                                      situations such as long, extended
                                Do not keep driving if the oil        idles on hot days, it could read as
                                pressure is low. The engine can       low as 40 kPa (6 psi) and still be
                                become so hot that it catches fire.   considered normal. Oil pressure
                                Someone could be burned. Check        may exceed 689 kPa (100 psi)
                                the oil as soon as possible and       when first started or when
                                have the vehicle serviced.            accelerating. It may vary with
                                                                      engine speed, outside temperature
                               Notice: Lack of proper engine          and oil viscosity, but readings above
                               oil maintenance can damage the         the shaded area show the normal
 Metric — ZO6 and ZR1 Models   engine. The repairs would not be       operating range. Readings in the
                               covered by the vehicle warranty.       shaded area tell you that the engine
                               Always follow the maintenance          is low on oil, or that you might have
                               schedule for changing engine oil.      some other oil problem. See Engine
                                                                      Oil on page 10‑15.
                               The engine oil pressure gauge
                               shows the engine oil pressure          The engine oil pressure can also
                               in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds    be displayed using the GAGES
                               per square inch) when the engine is    button on the Driver Information
                               running.                               Center (DIC). See Driver Information
                                                                      Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
                                                     Instruments and Controls                 5-15

Engine Coolant                                                Voltmeter Gauge
Temperature Gauge




                                    Metric
                    This gauge shows the engine               Base and ZO6, English and Metric
                    coolant temperature. If the gauge
        English                                               The voltmeter shows the voltage
                    pointer moves into the shaded area,
                    the engine is too hot.                    output of the battery. It shows the
                                                              voltage output of the charging
                    This means that the engine coolant        system while the engine is running.
                    has overheated. If the vehicle has
                    been operating under normal driving       The reading changes as the rate
                    conditions, pull off the road, stop the   of charge changes (with engine
                    vehicle and turn off the engine as        speed, for example), but if the
                    soon as possible.                         voltmeter reads at 9 volts or below,
                                                              the instrument panel cluster and
                    See Engine Overheating on
                    page 10‑34 for more information.
5-16       Instruments and Controls

other systems may shut down. The                                                  Airbag Readiness Light
Driver Information Center (DIC)
reads BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW                                                         The system checks the airbag's
when the vehicle is at 10 volts or                                                electrical system for possible
below. Have it checked right away.                                                malfunctions. If the light stays on
Driving with the voltmeter reading at                                             it indicates there is an electrical
10 volts or below could drain the                                                 problem. The system check
                                         The safety belt light comes on and       includes the airbag sensor, the
battery and disable the vehicle.         stays on for several seconds, then       pretensioners, the airbag modules,
                                         flashes for several more.                the wiring, and the crash sensing
Safety Belt Reminders                                                             and diagnostic module. For more
                                         This chime and light are repeated
Safety Belt Reminder Light               if the driver remains unbuckled          information on the airbag system,
                                         and the vehicle is in motion. If the     see Airbag System on page 3‑22.
When the engine is started, a chime      driver safety belt is already buckled,
sounds for several seconds to            neither the chime nor the light
remind a driver to fasten the safety     comes on.
belt, unless the driver safety belt is
already buckled.
                                                                         Instruments and Controls                5-17

                                         If there is a problem with the airbag
                                         system, an airbag Driver Information
                                         Center (DIC) message can also
                                         come on. See Vehicle Messages on
                                         page 5‑35 for more information.

The airbag readiness light flashes       Passenger Airbag Status                         Canada and Mexico
for a few seconds when the engine        Indicator                               When the vehicle is started, the
is started. If the light does not come
                                         The vehicle has the passenger           passenger airbag status indicator
on then, have it fixed immediately.
                                         sensing system. See Passenger           will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
                                         Sensing System on page 3‑30 for         for on and off, for several seconds
          { WARNING                      important safety information. The       as a system check. Then, after
                                         rearview mirror has a passenger         several more seconds, the status
 If the airbag readiness light stays                                             indicator will light either ON or OFF,
                                         airbag status indicator.
 on after the vehicle is started or                                              or either the on or off symbol, to let
 comes on while driving, it means                                                you know the status of the right front
 the airbag system might not be                                                  passenger frontal and seat-mounted
 working properly. The airbags in                                                side impact airbags (if equipped).
 the vehicle might not inflate in a
                                                                                 If the word ON or the on symbol is
 crash, or they could even inflate
                                                                                 lit on the passenger airbag status
 without a crash. To help avoid
                                                    United States                indicator, it means that the right
 injury, have the vehicle serviced                                               front passenger frontal airbag and
 right away.                                                                     seat-mounted side impact airbag
                                                                                 (if equipped) are enabled (may
                                                                                 inflate).
5-18       Instruments and Controls

If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag                       { WARNING
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has               If the airbag readiness light ever
turned off the right front passenger       comes on and stays on, it means
frontal airbag and seat-mounted            that something may be wrong
side impact airbag (if equipped).          with the airbag system. To help
                                                                                    This comes on briefly while starting
See Passenger Sensing System on            avoid injury to yourself or others,
                                                                                    the engine. If it does not come on,
page 3‑30 for more on this,                have the vehicle serviced right
                                                                                    have the vehicle serviced by your
including important safety                 away. See Airbag Readiness               dealer.
information.                               Light on page 5‑16 for more
                                           information, including important         If the malfunction indicator lamp
If, after several seconds, both status                                              comes on and stays on, while the
indicator lights remain on, or if there    safety information.
                                                                                    engine is running, this indicates that
are no lights at all, there may be                                                  there is an OBD II problem and
a problem with the lights or the          Malfunction                               service is required.
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.                  Indicator Lamp                            Malfunctions often are indicated by
                                          A computer system called OBD II           the system before any problem is
                                          (On-Board Diagnostics-Second              apparent. Being aware of the light
                                          Generation) monitors operation of         can prevent more serious damage
                                          the fuel, ignition, and emission          to the vehicle. This system assists
                                          control systems. It makes sure that       the service technician in correctly
                                          emissions are at acceptable levels        diagnosing any malfunction.
                                          for the life of the vehicle, helping to
                                          produce a cleaner environment.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls               5-19

Notice: If the vehicle is            This light comes on during a              Light On Steady: An emission
continually driven with this light   malfunction in one of two ways:           control system malfunction has
on, after a while, the emission      Light Flashing: A misfire condition       been detected on the vehicle.
controls might not work as well,     has been detected. A misfire              Diagnosis and service might be
the vehicle fuel economy might       increases vehicle emissions and           required.
not be as good, and the engine       could damage the emission control         the following may correct an
might not run as smoothly. This      system on the vehicle. Diagnosis          emission system malfunction:
could lead to costly repairs that    and service might be required.
might not be covered by the                                                    .   Make sure the fuel cap is fully
vehicle warranty.                    The following can prevent more                installed. See Filling the Tank on
                                     serious damage to the vehicle:                page 9‑52. The diagnostic
Notice: Modifications made to the                                                  system can determine if the
engine, transmission, exhaust,       .   Reduce vehicle speed.
                                                                                   fuel cap has been left off or
intake, or fuel system of the        .   Avoid hard accelerations.                 improperly installed. A loose or
vehicle or the replacement of                                                      missing fuel cap allows fuel to
the original tires with other
                                     .   Avoid steep uphill grades.
                                                                                   evaporate into the atmosphere.
than those of the same Tire          If the light continues to flash, when         A few driving trips with the cap
Performance Criteria (TPC) can       it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.        properly installed should turn the
affect the vehicle's emission        Find a safe place to park the                 light off.
controls and can cause this light    vehicle. Turn off the vehicle, wait
to come on. Modifications to         at least 10 seconds, and restart the
                                                                               .   Make sure the electrical system
these systems could lead to          engine. If the light is still flashing,       is not wet. The system could
costly repairs not covered by        follow the previous steps and see             be wet if the vehicle was driven
the vehicle warranty. This could     your dealer for service as soon as            through a deep puddle of water.
also result in a failure to pass a   possible.                                     The condition is usually
required Emission Inspection/                                                      corrected when the electrical
Maintenance test. See                                                              system dries out. A few driving
Accessories and Modifications on                                                   trips should turn the light off.
page 10‑4.
5-20       Instruments and Controls
.   Make sure to fuel the vehicle          Emissions Inspection and               The vehicle may not pass
    with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality   Maintenance Programs                   inspection if:
    causes the engine not to run as
    efficiently as designed and may        Some state and local governments       .   the check engine light is on with
    cause: stalling after start-up,        may have programs to inspect               the engine running, or if the light
    stalling when the vehicle is           the on-vehicle emission control            does not come on when the
    changed into gear, misfiring,          equipment For the inspection, the          ignition is in ON/RUN while the
    hesitation on acceleration,            emission system test equipment is          engine is off.
    or stumbling on acceleration.          connected to the vehicle’s Data Link   .   the critical emission control
    These conditions might go away         Connector (DLC).                           systems have not been
    once the engine is warmed up.                                                     completely diagnosed by the
    If one or more of these                                                           system. This can happen if
    conditions occurs, change the                                                     the battery has recently been
    fuel brand used. It will require at                                               replaced or if the battery has run
    least one full tank of the proper                                                 down. The diagnostic system
    fuel to turn the light off.                                                       evaluates critical emission
                                                                                      control systems during normal
     See Recommended Fuel on                                                          driving. This can take
    page 9‑49.                             The DLC is under the instrument
                                           panel to the left of the steering          several days of routine driving.
If none of the above have made             wheel. See your dealer if assistance       If this has been done and the
the light turn off, your dealer can        is needed.                                 vehicle still does not pass the
check the vehicle. The dealer                                                         inspection , your dealer can
has the proper test equipment                                                         prepare the vehicle for
and diagnostic tools to fix any                                                       inspection.
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
                                                                             Instruments and Controls            5-21

Brake System Warning                                                              If the light comes on while driving
Light
                                                   { WARNING                      and a CHECK BRAKE FLUID
                                                                                  message shows on the DIC, pull
The vehicle brake system consists        The brake system might not be            off the road and stop carefully. The
of two hydraulic circuits. If one        working properly if the brake            pedal may be harder to push or the
circuit is not working, the remaining    system warning light is on.              pedal may go closer to the floor.
circuit can still work to stop the       Driving with the brake system            It may take longer to stop. If the
vehicle. For normal braking              warning light on can lead to a           light is still on, have the vehicle
performance, both circuits need          crash. If the light is still on after    towed for service. See Towing the
to be working.                           the vehicle has been pulled off          Vehicle on page 10‑86 and Brake
                                         the road and carefully stopped,          System Messages on page 5‑36 for
                                         have the vehicle towed for               more information.
                                         service.

                                        If this warning light stays on after
                                        the engine is started, the parking
     English             Metric
                                        brake may still be set or there
This light comes on briefly while       could be a brake problem. Refer
starting the engine. If it does not     to Parking Brake on page 9‑35 to
come on, have it fixed so it is ready   see if it is set. If the parking brake
to warn if there is a problem.          is not set, have the brake system
                                        inspected right away.
5-22       Instruments and Controls

Antilock Brake System                   If the regular brake system warning      The shift must be completed into
                                        light is not on, the vehicle still has   4 (Fourth) to turn off this feature.
(ABS) Warning Light                     brakes, but not antilock brakes.         This helps the vehicle get the best
                                        If the regular brake system warning      possible fuel economy.
                                        light is also on, the vehicle does not   After shifting to 4 (Fourth), the
                                        have antilock brakes and there is a      vehicle can be downshifted to a
                                        problem with the regular brakes.         lower gear.
                                        See Brake System Warning Light on
                                        page 5‑21.                               Notice: Forcing the shift lever
                                                                                 into any gear except 4 (Fourth)
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake    One-to-Four Shift Light                  when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light
System (ABS), this light comes on                                                comes on may damage the
briefly when the engine is started.
                                        (Manual Transmission)                    transmission. Shift only from
                                                                                 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the
If it does not, have the vehicle                                                 light comes on.
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally the                                                   This light comes on when:
indicator light then goes off.                                                   .   The engine coolant temperature
If the ABS light stays on, turn the                                                  is higher than 76°C (169°F).
ignition off. If the light comes on                                              .   The vehicle is going 24 to
while driving, stop as soon as it is    When this light comes on, the                31 km/h (15 to 19 mph).
safely possible and turn the ignition   vehicle can only be shifted from
off. Then start the engine again to     1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) instead of
                                                                                 .   The vehicle is at 21 percent
reset the system. If the ABS light      1 (First) to 2 (Second).                     throttle or less.
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
                                                                       Instruments and Controls               5-23

Active Handling System                  For the ZR1 this light comes on        Traction Control System
                                        when Performance Traction mode is
Light                                   activated, along with DIC messages
                                                                               (TCS) Warning Light
                                        for the five traction modes.
                                        When the Active Handling System
                                        is turned off, the light comes on, a
                                        chime sounds, and the TRACTION
                                        SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING
                                        – OFF message displays in the DIC.
                                        The Traction Control System is off
The Active Handling System light        and the Active Handling System         The Traction Control System (TCS)
comes on briefly as the engine is       does not assist with controlling the   warning light comes on briefly when
started. If the light does not, have    vehicle.                               the engine is started.
the vehicle serviced by your dealer.                                           If the light does not, have the
If the system is working normally the   When the Active Handling System
                                        is turned back on, the light turns     vehicle serviced by your dealer.
light goes off.                                                                If the system is working normally
                                        off, a chime sounds, and the
If the light stays on or comes on       TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE             the light then goes off.
while driving, a chime sounds and       HANDLING – ON message displays         If the light stays on, or comes on
a SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING               in the DIC.                            while driving and a SERVICE
SYSTEM message appears on the                                                  TRACTION SYSTEM message
DIC and the vehicle need service.       See Ride Control System Messages
                                        on page 5‑44 for more information.     displays in the Driver Information
This light also comes on while the                                             Center (DIC), the vehicle needs
vehicle is in the Competitive                                                  service.
Driving Mode.
5-24      Instruments and Controls

When the TCS is turned off, this      Tire Pressure Light                   When the Light Flashes First and
light comes on and a TRACTION                                               Then is On Steady
SYSTEM OFF message displays                                                 This indicates that there may be a
on the DIC. When this light is on,                                          problem with the TPMS. The light
the TCS system does not limit                                               flashes for about a minute and
wheel spin.                                                                 stays on steady for the remainder
When the TCS is turned back on,                                             of the ignition cycle. This sequence
this light turns off and a TRACTION                                         repeats with every ignition cycle.
SYSTEM ON message displays on         For vehicles with the Tire Pressure   See Tire Pressure Monitor
the DIC                               Monitor System (TPMS), this light     Operation on page 10‑69 for more
This light also comes on while the    comes on briefly when the engine      information.
vehicle is in the Competitive         is started. It provides information
Driving Mode.                         about tire pressures and the TPMS.    Security Light
See Traction Control System (TCS)     When the Light is On Steady
on page 9‑36 and Ride Control         This indicates that one or more
System Messages on page 5‑44 for      of the tires are significantly
more information.                     underinflated.
See Active Handling System on         A tire pressure message can
page 9‑37 for more information on     accompany the light. See Tire
Competitive Driving Mode and          Messages on page 5‑51 for more        For information regarding this light
Performance Traction Mode.            information. Stop as soon as          and the vehicle's security system,
                                      possible, and inflate the tires to    see Anti-Theft Alarm System on
                                      the pressure value shown on the       page 2‑13.
                                      Tire and Loading Information label.
                                      See Tire Pressure on page 10‑66
                                      for more information.
                                                                    Instruments and Controls            5-25

High-Beam On Light                 The lights go out when the fog        Information Displays
                                   lamps are turned off. See Fog
                                   Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
                                   information.                          Driver Information
                                                                         Center (DIC)
                                   Lamps On Reminder                     The Driver Information Center (DIC)
                                                                         display is located on the instrument
                                                                         panel cluster and shows driver
This light comes on when the                                             personalization features and
high-beam headlamps are in use.                                          warning/status messages.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam                                               The DIC comes on when the ignition
Changer on page 6‑2 for more                                             is turned on. After displaying
information.                                                             CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the
                                   This light comes on whenever the      DIC shows the information that was
                                   parking lamps are on.                 last displayed before the engine
Front Fog Lamp Light
                                   See Exterior Lamps Off Reminder       was turned off.
                                   on page 6‑2 for more information.     If a problem is detected, a warning
                                                                         message appears on the DIC
                                                                         display. See Vehicle Messages on
                                                                         page 5‑35 for more information.


The fog lamp lights come on when
the fog lamps are in use.
5-26      Instruments and Controls

DIC Operation and Displays                                                       TRIP: Press this button to display
                                                                                 your total and trip distance driven,
Depending on the features on the
                                                                                 the elapsed time function, your
vehicle, the drive gear may display
                                                                                 average speed, and the engine
on the DIC. See “Manual Paddle
                                                                                 oil life.
Shift” under Automatic Transmission
on page 9‑28 and Head-Up Display                                                 OPTION: Press this button to
(HUD) on page 5‑31 for more                                                      choose personal options that
information.                                                                     are available on your vehicle,
                                                                                 depending on the options your
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
                                                                                 vehicle is equipped with, such as
has different modes which can be
                                                                                 door locks, easy entry seats, and
accessed by pressing the following
                                                                                 language.
buttons located on the instrument
panel, to the right of the instrument                                            RESET: Press this button, used
                                        . 4 (Fuel): Press this button to         along with the other buttons, to
panel cluster.                          display fuel information such as fuel
                                        economy and range.                       reset system functions, select
                                                                                 personal options, and turn off or
                                        2 (Gauges):       Press this button to   acknowledge messages on the DIC.
                                        display gauge information like oil
                                        pressure and temperature, coolant
                                        temperature, automatic transmission
                                        fluid temperature, if equipped,
                                        battery voltage, and front/rear tire
                                        pressures.
                                                                      Instruments and Controls                5-27

Fuel Button                           Instantaneous Fuel Economy:            Press the fuel button again to
                                      Instantaneous fuel economy reflects    display the range, such as:
The fuel button displays average
                                      only the fuel economy that the         .   RANGE 48 km or
fuel economy and instantaneous
                                      vehicle has right now and will
fuel economy, calculated for your                                            .   RANGE 30 MI
                                      change frequently as driving
specific driving conditions, and
                                      conditions change. Unlike average      If the LOW FUEL warning is
range information.
                                      fuel economy, this menu item           displayed or if RANGE is less than
Average Fuel Economy: The             cannot be reset.                       64 km (40 miles), the display will
average fuel economy is viewed as                                            read RANGE LOW.
                                      Press the fuel button again to
a long-term approximation of your
                                      display instantaneous fuel economy,    The fuel economy data used to
overall driving conditions. You
                                      such as:                               determine fuel range is an average
should reset the average fuel
economy display every time you        .   INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY               of recent driving conditions. As your
refuel. If you press the RESET            11.7 L/100 km or                   driving conditions change, this data
button in this mode while you are                                            is gradually updated automatically.
                                      .   INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY
driving, the system will reset this       20.1 MPG                           If the vehicle has been idling for
display and begin figuring fuel                                              a long time, the range displayed
economy from that point in time.      Fuel Range: The range calculates       on the DIC could be abnormally
                                      the remaining distance you can         low. The vehicle must be driven
Press the fuel button to display      drive without refueling. It is based
average fuel economy, such as:                                               8 to 16 km (5 to 10 miles) to get
                                      on fuel economy and the fuel           an accurate reading.
.   AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY              remaining in the tank.
    11.7 L/100 km or
.   AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
    20.1 MPG
5-28      Instruments and Controls

Gauges Button                           If the oil temperature is low,          Transmission Fluid
                                        the display will show OIL               Temperature: If you have an
The gauges button displays
                                        TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil             automatic transmission vehicle,
oil pressure, oil temperature,
                                        temperature is high, the display will   this display shows the automatic
coolant temperature, transmission
                                        show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH.              transmission fluid temperature.
fluid temperature for automatic
transmission vehicles only, battery     Coolant Temperature: This display       Press the gauges button again to
voltage, and tire pressure              shows the engine coolant                display the automatic transmission
information.                            temperature.                            fluid temperature, such as:
Oil Pressure: This display shows        Press the gauges button again to        .   TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C or
the oil pressure.                       display the coolant temperature,        .   TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F
                                        such as:
Press the gauges button to display                                              If the transmission fluid temperature
the oil pressure, such as:              .   COOLANT                             is low, the display will show
                                            TEMPERATURE 51°C or                 TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If the
.   OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa or
                                        .   COOLANT                             transmission fluid temperature is
.   OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI
                                            TEMPERATURE 123°F                   high, the display will show TRANS
Oil Temperature: This display                                                   FLUID TEMP HIGH.
                                        If the coolant temperature is low,
shows the oil temperature.
                                        the display will show COOLANT
Press the gauges button again to        TEMPERATURE LOW. If the
display the oil temperature, such as:   coolant temperature is high, the
.   OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C or            display will show COOLANT
                                        TEMPERATURE HIGH.
.   OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F
                                                                           Instruments and Controls                 5-29

Battery Voltage: This display             TRIP Button                             Both of the trip odometers can
shows the current battery voltage.                                                be used simultaneously. The trip
                                          The TRIP button displays the
Press the gauges button again to                                                  odometers can be reset by pressing
                                          odometer, trip distance, elapsed
display the battery voltage, such as:                                             the RESET button on the DIC.
                                          time, average speed, and oil life
.   BATTERY VOLTAGE                       remaining information.                  There is also a miles since last
    13.5 VOLTS                                                                    ignition feature that displays the
                                          Odometer: The odometer shows
                                                                                  number of kilometers (miles) driven
Tire Pressure: This display shows         how far your vehicle has been
                                                                                  since you last started the vehicle.
the tire pressure for each tire.          driven in either kilometers or miles.
                                                                                  Press and hold the RESET button
                                          Press the TRIP button to display
Press the gauges button again to                                                  for three seconds, then release it.
                                          odometer readings, such as:
display the tire pressure for the front                                           The kilometers (miles) since the last
tires, such as:
                                          .   ODOMETER 20008 km or                ignition cycle will be set into the trip
                                          .   ODOMETER 12345 MI                   odometer.
.   FRONT TIRE PRESSURES
    L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or                You can also display the odometer       Elapsed Timer: Press the
                                          by turning on the parking lamps.        TRIP button until ELAPSED
.   FRONT TIRE PRESSURES                                                          TIMER is displayed, such as
    L 34 PSI R 33 PSI                     Trip Odometers: There are two trip      ELAPSED TIMER .00.
Press the gauges button again to          odometers. Press the TRIP button
                                          to display TRIP ODOMETER A              When the ignition is in on, the DIC
display the tire pressure for the rear                                            can be used as a stopwatch. The
tires, such as:                           readings and press the button again
                                          to display TRIP ODOMETER B              display can show hours, minutes,
.   REAR TIRE PRESSURES                   readings, such as:                      and seconds. The elapsed time
    L 234 kPa R 228 kPa or                                                        indicator will record up to 23 hours,
                                          .   TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km or         59 minutes, and 59 seconds, then
.   REAR TIRE PRESSURES                   .                                       it will reset to zero and continue
    L 34 PSI R 33 PSI                         TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI
                                                                                  counting. The display appears as
                                          .   TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km or         ELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsed
                                          .   TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI            time function.
5-30       Instruments and Controls

You can start or stop the elapsed     Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP            See Scheduled Maintenance on
time by pressing the RESET button.    button until the engine oil life is        page 11‑2 and Engine Oil on
To reset the elapsed time to zero,    displayed, such as OIL LIFE                page 10‑15 for more information.
press the RESET button for            REMAINING 89%.
three seconds while the timer is                                                 OPTION Button
                                      This is an estimate of the engine
displayed.                            oil's remaining useful life. It will       The OPTION button allows you
Pressing and holding the RESET        show 100% when the system is               to access the PERSONAL
button for at least 10 seconds will   reset after an oil change. It will alert   OPTIONS menu and customize
reset the timer display to the time   you to change the oil on a schedule        the personalization settings on your
since last ignition cycle.            consistent with your driving               vehicle. See Vehicle Personalization
                                      conditions.                                on page 5‑55 for more information.
Average Speed: Press the TRIP
button until the average speed is     When the remaining oil life is low,        RESET Button
displayed, such as:                   the system will alert you with the         The RESET button, used along
.   AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h or         message CHANGE ENGINE OIL.                 with other buttons, will reset
                                      Remember, you must reset the               system functions and turn off or
.   AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH
                                      engine oil life system yourself            acknowledge messages on the DIC.
Press and hold the RESET button to    after each oil change. It will not
reset to 0.0 km/h (mph).              reset itself. To reset the system,
                                      see Engine Oil Life System on
                                      page 10‑22. Be careful not to
                                      reset the engine oil life system
                                      accidentally at any time other than
                                      when the oil has just been changed.
                                      It cannot be reset accurately until
                                      the next oil change.
                                                                           Instruments and Controls               5-31

Head-Up Display (HUD)                    The information may be displayed in          transmission into the next
                                         English or metric units and appears          higher gear. An arrow pointing
                                         as an image focused out toward               up will light up on the display
          { WARNING                      the front of the vehicle. The HUD            just prior to reaching the engine
 If the HUD image is too bright,         consists of the following information:       fuel cut-off mode. This cut-off
                                         .   Speedometer                              is about 6,500 rpm for the
 or too high in your field of view, it
                                                                                      LS3 engine, 6,600 rpm for
 may take you more time to see           .   Turn Signal Indicators                   the LS9 & ZR1 engines, and
 things you need to see when it is                                                    7,000 rpm for the LS7 engine.
 dark outside. Be sure to keep the
                                         .   High-Beam Indicator Symbol
 HUD image dim and placed low in         .   Tachometer
                                                                                  .   Check Gauges Warning
 your field of view.                     .   Manual Paddle Shift Gear
                                                                                  .   Engine Coolant Temperature
                                             Indicator (If Equipped)                  Gauge
For vehicles with the Head-Up                These displays on the HUD are
                                                                                  .   Transmission Fluid Temperature
Display (HUD), you can see some              for use when using the manual            Gauge, (Automatic Transmission
of the driver information that               paddle shift controls to shift the       Vehicles Only)
appears on the instrument panel              transmission. See “Manual            .   Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
cluster.                                     Paddle Shift” in Automatic
                                             Transmission on page 9‑28.
                                                                                  .   Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
                                         .   Shift Light
                                                                                  .   G-Force Gauge

                                             This light is used for
                                                                                  .   Boost Gauge (If Equipped)
                                             performance driving to               .   Audio Functions, Street
                                             indicate that the vehicle's              Mode Only
                                             best performance level has           .   Navigation, Only with Navigation
                                             been reached to shift the                Radio, Turn-by-Turn Guidance
5-32      Instruments and Controls

There are three HUD modes that
can be viewed in the HUD display.
Press the MODE button to scroll
through these modes in the
following order:

                                                 English                             English




             English

                                                 Metric                              Metric
                                    Track Mode 1 supports the G-Force   Track Mode 2 supports G-Force
                                    gauge and minor gauges with a       gauges, boost gauge w/ZR1, and
                                    circular tachometer.                minor gauges with a linear
                                                                        tachometer.
              Metric
                                                                        When the desired HUD display has
Street Mode supports audio and                                          been selected, release the MODE
navigation functions with your                                          button.
choice of tachometer settings.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls              5-33

Within each mode, the display, can         (X.XX G) and corresponding           you may miss something important,
be further customized by pressing          G gauge bar will overwrite the       such as a warning light. Under
the PAGE button. Pressing this             current G value.                     important warning conditions, the
button in each mode will turn off and                                           CHECK GAGES warning will
on the following:                                                               illuminate in the HUD. View your
.   Street Mode — No tachometer,                                                Driver Information Center (DIC) for
    circular tachometer, and linear                                             more information.
    tachometer.
.   Track Modes 1 and 2 — No
    minor gauge, coolant                              English
    temperature, transmission oil
    temperature, engine oil
    temperature, engine oil
    pressure, and boost gauge.
    While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the
    maximum G value achieved
    during the current ignition cycle                  Metric
    can be displayed by pressing
    and holding the PAGE button.        Be sure to continue scanning the
    The maximum G display will be       displays, controls, and driving
                                        environment just as you would in a      The HUD controls are located to the
    shown until the PAGE button is                                              left of the steering wheel.
    released. The maximum G value       vehicle without HUD. If you never
    display will be identical to the    look at the instrument panel cluster,
    normal G value display, except
    the maximum G gauge digits
5-34      Instruments and Controls

To adjust the HUD so it can be seen    2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable   The HUD information can be
properly, do the following:               driving position. If your seat     displayed in one of six languages
1. Start the engine and press the         position changes, the HUD may      including English, Spanish, French,
   HUD dimmer control all the way         need to be re-adjusted.            German, Italian, or Japanese. The
   up by pressing the (+) button.      3. Press the up or down arrows        speedometer can be displayed in
                                          to center the HUD image in         either English or metric units.
   The brightness of the HUD
   image is determined by the light       your view.                         To change the language and unit
   conditions in the direction the        The HUD image can only be          selections, see “Entering the
   vehicle is facing and where you        adjusted up and down, not side     Personal Options Menu” under
   have the HUD dimmer control            to side.                           Vehicle Personalization on
   set. If you are facing a dark                                             page 5‑55.
                                       4. Press the dimmer control
   object or a heavily shaded area,       downward until the HUD image       Clean the inside of the windshield
   the HUD may anticipate that you        is no brighter than necessary.     as needed to remove any dirt or film
   are entering a dark area and                                              that reduces the sharpness or clarity
   may begin to dim.                   To turn HUD off, press and hold the   of the HUD image.
                                       (–) button until the HUD display
   It is possible for sunlight to      turns off.                            To clean the HUD, spray household
   enter the HUD making it difficult                                         glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth.
   to see the image. The display       If the sun comes out or it becomes    Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
   will return to normal when the      cloudy, the HUD brightness may        it. Do not spray cleaner directly on
   sunlight is no longer entering      need to be adjusted again using       the lens because the cleaner could
   the HUD.                            the dimmer control. Polarized         leak into the unit.
                                       sunglasses could make the HUD
                                       image harder to see.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls            5-35

If the ignition is on and the HUD      Vehicle Messages                      Battery Voltage and
image cannot be seen, check to
see if:                                Messages displayed on the DIC         Charging Messages
                                       indicate the status of the vehicle    BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
.   Something is covering the
                                       or some action may be needed
    HUD unit.                                                                This message displays when the
                                       to correct a condition. Multiple
.   The HUD dimmer control is          messages may appear one after         vehicle has detected that the battery
    adjusted properly.                 another.                              voltage is dropping beyond a
                                                                             reasonable point. The battery saver
.   The HUD image is adjusted          The messages that do not              system starts reducing certain
    to the proper height.              require immediate action can be       features of the vehicle that you may
.   Ambient light is low, in the       acknowledged and cleared by           be able to notice. At the point that
    direction the vehicle is facing.   pressing the RESET button.            features are disabled, this message
.   A fuse is blown. See Fuses and     The messages that require             is displayed. It means that the
    Circuit Breakers on page 10‑51.    immediate action cannot be cleared    vehicle is trying to save the charge
                                       until that action is performed. All   in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
Keep in mind that the windshield is    messages should be taken seriously    accessories to allow the battery to
part of the HUD system. See            and clearing the messages does not    recharge.
Windshield Replacement on              correct the problem.
page 10‑47.                                                                  BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
                                                                             See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑15.
                                                                             BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
                                                                             See Voltmeter Gauge on page 5‑15.
5-36      Instruments and Controls

SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM                 Brake System Messages                 CHECK BRAKE FLUID
If this message displays while you      ABS (Antilock Brake System)           This message displays, a sound
are driving, there may be a problem                                           will be heard, and the brake system
with the electrical charging system.
                                        ACTIVE                                warning light on the instrument
It could mean that there is a loose     This message displays when the        panel cluster turns on if the ignition
or broken drive belt or that there is   Antilock Brake System (ABS) is        is on to inform the driver that the
another electrical problem. Have the    adjusting brake pressure to help      brake fluid level is low. See Brake
vehicle checked right away by your      avoid a braking skid.                 System Warning Light on
dealer. Driving while this message is   Slippery road conditions may exist    page 5‑21. Have the brake system
on could drain the battery.             if this message is displayed, so      serviced by your dealer as soon as
If you must drive a short distance      adjust your driving accordingly.      possible. See Brakes on
with the message on, be certain to      The message stays on for a few        page 10‑38.
turn off the vehicle's accessories,     seconds after the system stops        SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES
such as the radio and air               adjusting brake pressure. See
conditioner.                            Antilock Brake System (ABS) on        If this message displays while
                                        page 9‑34 for more information.       you are driving, stop as soon as
Multiple chimes sound when this                                               possible and turn the ignition off.
message is displayed.                   CHANGE BRAKE PADS                     Then start the engine again to reset
To acknowledge the message, press       On vehicles with electronic brake     the system. If the message stays
the RESET button. The message           pad wear sensors, this message will   on, or comes back on again while
reappears every 10 minutes until        be displayed when the pads are        you are driving, the vehicle is in
this condition changes.                 worn. See your dealer for service.    need of service. See your dealer.
                                                                              If the antilock brake system (ABS)
                                                                              warning light is on and the regular
                                                                              brake system warning light is not
                                                                          Instruments and Controls                5-37

on, you still have brakes, but do      Convertible Top                           SET PARK BRAKE TO
not have ABS. If the regular brake                                               MOVE TOP
system warning light is also on, you
                                       Messages
do not have ABS and there is a                                                   If the vehicle has a manual
                                       ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION                    transmission, this message displays
problem with the brakes. See
Antilock Brake System (ABS)            If the vehicle has a power                and a sound will be heard if you
Warning Light on page 5‑22 and         convertible top, this message             try to operate the power convertible
Brake System Warning Light on          displays and a sound will be heard        top without first setting the parking
page 5‑21.                             if the trunk partition is not in place.   brake. Set the parking brake
                                       Open the hatch/trunk and make             before trying to operate the power
If this message is displayed, the      sure the trunk partition is secure        convertible top. See Convertible Top
Traction Control System (TCS)          and no objects are on the trunk           on page 2‑23 for more information.
and the Active Handling System         partition. See Rear Storage on
will also be disabled. The DIC will    page 4‑1 for more information.            SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK
scroll three messages: SERVICE                                                   BRAKE FOR TOP
ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE               CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP                   If the vehicle has an automatic
TRACTION SYSTEM, and                   This message displays and a               transmission, this message displays
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, and           sound will be heard if the trunk is       and a sound will be heard if you try
the instrument panel cluster lights    open while you are trying to operate      to operate the power convertible top
will come on along with a sound.       the convertible top. Make sure the        without first shifting into P (Park) or
When the service message is            trunk is closed before operating the      setting the parking brake. Either
displayed, the computer controlled     convertible top. See Convertible Top      shift the vehicle into P (Park) or set
systems will not assist the driver.    on page 2‑23.                             the parking brake before trying to
Have the system repaired by your                                                 operate the power convertible top.
dealer as soon as possible. Adjust                                               See Convertible Top on page 2‑23
your driving accordingly.                                                        for more information.
To acknowledge these messages,
press the RESET button.
5-38      Instruments and Controls

TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP                 TOP NOT SECURE                          Cruise Control Messages
This message displays and a          This message displays and a             CRUISE DISENGAGED
sound will be heard when the         sound will be heard when the
power convertible top button is      power convertible top button is         This message displays briefly when
pressed and the power convertible    released before the top open or         you disengage the cruise control
top pump motor temperature is        close operation is complete or if the   system by stepping on the brake on
below −20°C (−4°F). Wait for the     top is closed without the header        an automatic transmission vehicle or
power convertible top pump motor     latch engaged. Press and hold the       the clutch on a manual transmission
to warm up before using the power    convertible top button to fully open    vehicle, or by turning off the cruise
convertible top.                     or close the top, and make sure that    control switch. See Cruise Control
                                     the header latch is engaged after       on page 9‑45 for more information.
TOP MOTOR OVER                       the top is closed.
TEMPERATURE                                                                  CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH
                                     UNLATCH HEADER TO                       (XXX km/h)
This message displays and a
sound will be heard when the
                                     MOVE TOP                                See Cruise Control on page 9‑45.
power convertible top button is      This message displays and a
pressed and the power convertible    sound will be heard if you try to
top pump motor temperature is over   lower the convertible top without
105°C (221°F). Wait for the power    first unlocking the top. Move
convertible top pump motor to cool   the latch handle to unlock the
down before using the power          convertible top. See Convertible Top
convertible top.                     on page 2‑23.
                                                                     Instruments and Controls             5-39

Door Ajar Messages                    TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)            COOLANT OVER
                                      This message displays when            TEMPERATURE
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
                                      the convertible top is not closed     This message displays and a sound
This message displays if the driver   completely. Make sure that the        will be heard if the engine coolant
door is not closed properly. Make     top is closed completely. See         exceeds 124°C (255°F). If you have
sure that the door is closed          Convertible Top on page 2‑23 for      been operating the vehicle under
completely.                           more information.                     normal driving conditions, pull off
HATCH AJAR (Coupe)                                                          the road, stop the vehicle, and turn
                                      TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)              off the engine as soon as possible.
This message displays when the        This message displays when the
hatch is not closed completely.                                             You can monitor the coolant
                                      trunk is not closed completely.       temperature with the gauges
Make sure that the hatch is closed    Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely. See Hatch on page 2‑10                                          button on the DIC or the engine
                                      completely. See Hatch on page 2‑10    coolant temperature gauge on
for more information.                 for more information.                 the instrument panel cluster. See
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR                                                         Engine Overheating on page 10‑34,
                                      Engine Cooling System                 Driver Information Center (DIC) on
This message displays if the
passenger door is not closed
                                      Messages                              page 5‑25, and Engine Coolant
                                                                            Temperature Gauge on page 5‑15.
properly. Make sure that the door     CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
is closed completely.                                                       To acknowledge the message, press
                                      This message displays when the        the RESET button. The message
                                      engine coolant level is low. Have     and sound will come back on until
                                      the cooling system serviced by your   this condition changes. If you do
                                      dealer as soon as possible. See       not press the RESET button, the
                                      Engine Coolant on page 10‑29.         message remains on until the
                                                                            condition changes.
5-40       Instruments and Controls

ENGINE OVERHEATED –                    HOT ENGINE AIR                           See “Engine Oil Life” under Driver
STOP ENGINE                            CONDITIONING OFF                         Information Center (DIC) on
                                                                                page 5‑25. Also, see Engine Oil on
This message displays and a            This message displays when               page 10‑15 and Engine Oil Life
sound will be heard when the           the engine coolant becomes               System on page 10‑22 for more
engine has overheated. Stop and        hotter than the normal operating         information.
turn the engine off immediately to     temperature. To avoid added strain
avoid severe engine damage. See        on a hot engine, the air conditioning    CHECK OIL LEVEL
Engine Overheating on page 10‑34.      compressor is automatically turned
                                                                                On some vehicles, this message
                                       off. When the coolant temperature
ENGINE PROTECTION                                                               displays and two chimes sound if
                                       returns to normal, the A/C operation
REDUCE ENGINE RPM                                                               the oil level in the vehicle is low.
                                       automatically resumes. You can
                                                                                Once the vehicle senses a change
This message displays if the engine    continue to drive the vehicle. If this
                                                                                in the engine oil level, the light
oil temperature exceeds 160°C          message continues to appear, have
                                                                                remains off.
(320°F). Check the engine coolant      the system repaired by your dealer
temperature and engine oil level.      as soon as possible to avoid             If this message appears after
If the engine is too hot, see Engine   compressor damage.                       starting the engine, the engine oil
Overheating on page 10‑34. The                                                  level may be too low. You may need
vehicle may need service, so see       Engine Oil Messages                      to add oil. See Engine Overheating
your dealer.                                                                    on page 10‑34.
                                       CHANGE ENGINE OIL                        To acknowledge the message, press
You can monitor the oil temperature
with the gauges button on the DIC.     This message displays when the           the RESET button. The message
See Driver Information Center (DIC)    life of the engine oil has expired.      reappears every 10 minutes until
on page 5‑25.                          See Scheduled Maintenance on             this condition changes.
                                       page 11‑2. After an oil change, the
Multiple chimes sound when             engine oil life system must be reset.
this message is displayed. This
message remains displayed and
active until the issue is resolved.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls                5-41

LOW OIL PRESSURE                        REDUCED ENGINE POWER                    To acknowledge the message, press
                                                                                the RESET button. The message
This message displays if low oil        If this message displays and the
                                                                                reappears every five minutes until
pressure levels occur. If this          check engine light comes on, a
                                                                                this condition changes.
message appears while the engine        noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
is running, stop the engine and do      performance may occur. If the           If the REDUCED ENGINE
not operate it until the cause of low   REDUCED ENGINE POWER                    POWER message is displayed in
oil pressure is corrected. Severe       message is displayed, but there         combination with the COOLANT
damage to the engine can result.        is no reduction in performance,         OVER TEMPERATURE message,
A sound will be heard when this         proceed to your destination. The        see Engine Overheating on
message is displayed. See Engine        performance may be reduced the          page 10‑34.
Oil on page 10‑15.                      next time the vehicle is driven.
                                        The vehicle may be driven at a          Fuel System Messages
Engine Power Messages                   reduced speed while the REDUCED         CHECK GAS CAP
ENGINE DRAG CONTROL                     ENGINE POWER message is
                                        displayed, but acceleration and         This message displays if the fuel
ACTIVE                                  speed may be reduced. Anytime           cap has not been fully tightened.
This message displays when              the check engine light stays on,        Check the fuel cap to make sure
engine drag control is active.          the vehicle should be taken to          that it is on properly. Once
When driving in a lower gear in         your dealer as soon as possible         tightened, it takes at least one
rainy, snowy, or icy conditions and     for diagnosis and repair. See           overnight park to reset or clear this
then letting up on the accelerator      Malfunction Indicator Lamp on           message. If both the CHECK GAS
or downshifting, the rear wheels        page 5‑18 for more information.         CAP message and the malfunction
may begin to slip and this message                                              indicator lamp in the instrument
                                        Multiple chimes sound when this         panel cluster are on, you may need
displays. This message stays on for     message is displayed.
a few seconds following the engine                                              to see your dealer for service. See
drag control event.                                                             Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
                                                                                page 5‑18 for more information.
5-42       Instruments and Controls

LOW FUEL                                  Key and Lock Messages             NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays when the            FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT                This message displays if the
fuel tank is less than 10 percent                                           vehicle does not detect the
full and the display is turned off.
                                          XX MINUTES                        presence of a Remote Keyless
A sound will be heard when this           See “Matching Transmitter(s) to   Entry (RKE) transmitter when you
message is displayed. Refill the fuel     Your Vehicle” under Remote        have attempted to start the vehicle
tank as soon as possible. See Fuel        Keyless Entry (RKE) System        or a vehicle door has just closed.
Gauge on page 5‑11.                       Operation on page 2‑3.            The following conditions may cause
                                                                            this message to appear.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM                       FOB BATTERY LOW
                                                                            .   Driver-added equipment plugged
This message displays if the              See “Battery Replacement” under       into the accessory power outlet
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)           Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)            on the center console is causing
has detected a problem within             System Operation on page 2‑3.         interference. Examples of these
the fuel system. Have the vehicle                                               devices are cell phones and cell
serviced by your dealer. This             KNOWN FOB
                                                                                phone chargers, two-way radios,
message also displays when the            See “Matching Transmitter(s) to       power inverters, or similar items.
cluster is not getting fuel information   Your Vehicle” under Remote            Try moving the RKE transmitter
from the PCM.                             Keyless Entry (RKE) System            away from these devices when
                                          Operation on page 2‑3.                starting the vehicle. In addition,
                                          MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS                PDA devices and remote garage
                                                                                and gate openers may also
                                          LEARNED
                                                                                generate Electromagnetic
                                          See “Matching Transmitter(s) to       Interference (EMI) that may
                                          Your Vehicle” under Remote            interfere with the RKE
                                          Keyless Entry (RKE) System            transmitter. Do not carry the
                                          Operation on page 2‑3.                RKE transmitter in the same
                                                                                pocket or bag as these devices.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls               5-43
.   The vehicle is experiencing        .   The vehicle's battery voltage         OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN
    Electromagnetic                        is low. The battery voltage must
    Interference (EMI). Some               be above 10 volts for the RKE         See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
    locations, such as airports,           transmitter to be detected            Your Vehicle” under Remote
    automatic toll booths, and some        properly.                             Keyless Entry (RKE) System
    gas stations have EMI fields                                                 Operation on page 2‑3.
    which may interfere with the       NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?
                                                                                 READY FOR FOB #X
    RKE transmitter.                   This message displays when the
                                       RKE transmitter is not detected           See “Matching Transmitter(s) to
                                       inside the vehicle while you are          Your Vehicle” under Remote
                                       trying to turn the ignition off. The      Keyless Entry (RKE) System
                                       vehicle may be near a strong radio        Operation on page 2‑3.
                                       antenna signal causing the RKE
                                       system to be jammed. The vehicle
                                       will remain in ACCESSORY until the
                                       vehicle is turned off or is restarted,
                                       or five minutes has expired. If you
                                       turn the ignition off and you cannot
                                       find the RKE transmitter, you will not
                                       be able to restart the vehicle. The
                                       RKE transmitter needs to be inside
                                       the vehicle in order for the vehicle to
    If moving the transmitter to
                                       start. See Starting the Engine on
    different locations within the
                                       page 9‑21 for more information.
    vehicle does not help, place the
    transmitter in the glove box
    transmitter pocket with the
    buttons facing to the right and
    then press the START button.
5-44       Instruments and Controls

Lamp Messages                           Ride Control System                    COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED                     Messages                               This message displays and a
                                                                               sound will be heard when the
This message displays if it is dark     ACTIVE HANDLING                        Competitive Driving mode is
enough outside and the headlamps        This message displays when             selected. The instrument panel
and the Twilight Sentinel® controls     the Active Handling System is          cluster light will be on when the
are off. This message informs the       operating. The Active Handling         Competitive Driving mode is
driver that turning on the exterior     System is a computer controlled        selected. If your vehicle is equipped
lamps is recommended. It has            system that assists the driver in      with a manual transmission, Launch
become dark enough outside to           controlling the vehicle in difficult   Control is available when this mode
require the headlamps and/or other      driving conditions. You may feel or    is selected. The Traction Control
exterior lamps.                         hear the system working and see        System (TCS) will not be operating
                                        the ACTIVE HANDLING message            while in the Competitive Driving
TURN SIGNAL ON                                                                 mode. Adjust your driving
                                        displayed in the DIC. This message
This message displays and a             stays on for a few seconds following   accordingly. This system is available
sound will be heard if a turn signal    the active handling event. This        on all models except ZR1. See
is left on for 1.2 km (three-quarters   is normal when the system is           Competitive Driving Mode on
of a mile). Move the turn signal/       operating. See Active Handling         page 9‑39, including the “Launch
multifunction lever to the off          System on page 9‑37 and Braking        Control” information.
position.                               on page 9‑3.
To acknowledge this message,            ACTIVE HANDLING READY
press the RESET button.
                                        This message displays when
                                        the functional check of the Active
                                        Handling System has been
                                        completed. See Active Handling
                                        System on page 9‑37 for more
                                        information.
                                                                       Instruments and Controls             5-45

MAXIMUM SPEED 129 km/h                   PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE              PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE
(80 MPH)                                 HANDLING ON                           HANDLING ON
This message displays when a             This message displays and a sound     This message displays and a sound
malfunction is present in the            will be heard when this Performance   will be heard when this Performance
Selective Ride Control system. The       Traction Management mode is           Traction Management mode is
vehicle speed will be limited to a       selected. The instrument panel        selected. The instrument panel
value determined by the vehicle          cluster light will also be on when    cluster light will also be on when
when the shock absorber system           this mode is selected. Launch         this mode is selected. Launch
has failed and the shocks are in         Control is available when this        Control is available when this
their full soft mode. Have the vehicle   mode is selected. In this mode        mode is selected. In this mode
serviced by your dealer as soon as       the Traction Control and Active       the Traction Control and Active
possible.                                Handling System are available         Handling System are available
To acknowledge the message, press        but intended for use on wet race      but intended for use on dry race
the RESET button. The message            track conditions. Adjust your         track conditions. Adjust your
reappears every 10 minutes until         driving accordingly. This system      driving accordingly. This system
this condition changes.                  is available only on ZR1 models.      is available only on ZR1 models.
                                         See “Performance Traction             See “Performance Traction
                                         Management” and “Launch Control”      Management” and “Launch Control”
                                         under Competitive Driving Mode on     under Competitive Driving Mode on
                                         page 9‑39 for more information        page 9‑39 for more information
                                         about the use of this mode.           about the use of this mode.
5-46      Instruments and Controls

PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT                   PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT                   PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE
ACTIVE HANDLING ON                    ACTIVE HANDLING OFF                   HANDLING OFF
This message displays and a sound     This message displays and a sound     This message displays and a sound
will be heard when this Performance   will be heard when this Performance   will be heard when this Performance
Traction Management mode is           Traction Management mode is           Traction Management mode is
selected. The instrument panel        selected. The instrument panel        selected. The instrument panel
cluster light will also be on when    cluster light will also be on when    cluster light will also be on when
this mode is selected. Launch         this mode is selected. Launch         this mode is selected. Launch
Control is available when this        Control is available when this mode   Control is available when this mode
mode is selected. In this mode        is selected. In this mode the         is selected. In this mode the
the Traction Control and Active       Traction Control is available but     Traction Control is available but
Handling System are available         intended for use on dry race track    intended for use on dry race track
but intended for use on dry race      conditions. The Active Handling       conditions. The Active Handling
track conditions. Adjust your         System is disabled when this mode     System is disabled when this mode
driving accordingly. This system      is selected. This mode will require   is selected. This mode will require
is available only on ZR1 models.      more driver skill than modes 1-3.     more driver skill than modes 1-4.
See “Performance Traction             Adjust your driving accordingly.      Adjust your driving accordingly.
Management” and “Launch Control”      This system is available only on      This system is available only on
under Competitive Driving Mode on     ZR1 models. See “Performance          ZR1 models. See “Performance
page 9‑39 for more information        Traction Management” and “Launch      Traction Management” and “Launch
about the use of this mode.           Control” under Competitive Driving    Control” under Competitive Driving
                                      Mode on page 9‑39 for more            Mode on page 9‑39 for more
                                      information about the use of          information about the use of
                                      this mode.                            this mode.
                                                                       Instruments and Controls                 5-47

SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING                 SERVICE RIDE CONTROL                   SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
SYSTEM                                  This message displays when the         If this message displays when you
This message displays if there is a     Selective Ride Control system          are driving, there is a problem with
problem with the Active Handling        has detected a malfunction and         the Traction Control System (TCS)
System and the vehicle needs            the system must be serviced.           and the vehicle is in need of
service. The active handling system     See your dealer. If a fault is         service. See your dealer. When this
light on the instrument panel cluster   present in the Selective Ride          message is displayed, the system
also turns on and a sound will be       Control system which causes            will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
heard. See your dealer. When this       the shocks to be in their full soft    driving accordingly.
message is displayed, the system is     condition, the messages SERVICE        The traction control system (TCS)
not working. Adjust your driving        RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS                   warning light on the instrument
accordingly. See Active Handling        INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM               panel cluster will also turn on and
System on page 9‑37 for more            SPEED 129 km/h (80 MPH) will           a sound will be heard.
information.                            display together. See Selective Ride
                                        Control on page 9‑43 for more          When this message is displayed,
                                        information.                           the computer controlled systems will
                                                                               not assist the driver in controlling
                                                                               the vehicle. Have the system
                                                                               repaired by your dealer as soon as
                                                                               possible. Adjust your driving
                                                                               accordingly. See Traction Control
                                                                               System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for
                                                                               more information.
                                                                               To acknowledge the message, press
                                                                               the RESET button.
5-48       Instruments and Controls

SHOCKS INOPERATIVE                       TRACTION SYSTEM AND                    TRACTION SYSTEM AND
This message displays when a             ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF                  ACTIVE HANDLING – ON
malfunction is present in the            This message displays, the             If the Traction Control System (TCS)
Selective Ride Control system            instrument panel cluster light turns   and Active Handling System are off,
which is causing the shocks to be        on, and a sound will be heard when     this message displays briefly, the
in their full soft mode. This is a       the Traction Control System (TCS)      instrument panel cluster light turns
warning to the driver that the vehicle   and Active Handling System are         off, and a sound will be heard when
handling may be affected. Have the       turned off by pressing the Active      the TCS and Active Handling
vehicle serviced by your dealer as       Handling System button on the          System are turned on by briefly
soon as possible.                        console for five seconds. The          pressing the Active Handling
To acknowledge the message, press        Antilock Brake System (ABS)            System button on the console. See
the RESET button . The message           remains on with the TCS and Active     Traction Control System (TCS) on
reappears every 10 minutes until         Handling System off. Adjust your       page 9‑36 and Active Handling
this condition changes.                  driving accordingly. See Traction      System on page 9‑37 for more
                                         Control System (TCS) on page 9‑36      information.
TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE                   and Active Handling System on
This message displays when the           page 9‑37 for more information.
Traction Control System (TCS) is         To acknowledge this message,
limiting wheel spin. Slippery road       press the RESET button.
conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. The message stays on
for a few seconds after the TCS
stops limiting wheel spin. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑36 for more information.
                                                                    Instruments and Controls                    5-49

TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF                Safety Belt Messages                    BUCKLE SEATBELT
This message displays and stays      BUCKLE PASSENGER                        This message reminds you to
on, a sound will be heard, and                                               buckle the driver's safety belt.
the traction control system (TCS)    This message reminds you to
                                     buckle the passenger's safety belt.     This message displays and a sound
warning light on the instrument                                              will be heard when the ignition is on,
panel cluster turns on when the      This message displays and a             the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,
TCS is turned off by pressing the    sound will be heard when the            and the vehicle is in motion. You
Active Handling System button on     ignition is on, the driver's safety     should buckle your safety belt.
the console. See Traction Control    belt is buckled, the passenger's
System (TCS) Warning Light on        safety belt is unbuckled with the       If the driver remains unbuckled
page 5‑23 and Traction Control       passenger airbag enabled, and the       when the ignition is on and the
System (TCS) on page 9‑36 for        vehicle is in motion. You should        vehicle is in motion, the reminder
more information.                    have the passenger buckle their         will be repeated. If the driver's
                                     safety belt.                            safety belt is already buckled, this
To acknowledge the message, press                                            message will not come on.
the RESET button.                    The reminder will be repeated if
                                     the ignition is on, the vehicle is in   This message is an additional
TRACTION SYSTEM – ON                                                         reminder to the safety belt reminder
                                     motion, the driver is buckled, the
This message displays and a sound    passenger is still unbuckled, and the   light in the instrument panel cluster.
will be heard when the Traction      passenger airbag is enabled. If the     See Safety Belt Reminders on
Control System (TCS) is turned on    passenger's safety belt is already      page 5‑16 for more information.
by pressing the Active Handling      buckled, this message will not
System button on the console. This   come on.
message automatically clears from
the DIC display on its own. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑36 for more information.
5-50      Instruments and Controls

Anti-Theft Alarm System               SERVICE ELECTRICAL                     Starting the Vehicle
Messages                              SYSTEM                                 Messages
                                      This message displays if an
INTRUSION SENSOR OFF                  electrical problem has occurred        PRESS BRAKE TO START
This message may display when the     within the Powertrain Control          ENGINE (Automatic
anti-theft alarm has been disarmed.   Module (PCM). Have the vehicle         Transmission Only)
                                      serviced by your dealer.               This message displays if you try
INTRUSION SENSOR ON
                                      SERVICE VEHICLE SOON                   to start the engine by pressing the
This message may display when the                                            keyless ignition start button without
anti-theft alarm has been armed.      This message displays and a sound      having the brake pressed. The
                                      will be heard when there may be an     brake needs to be pressed when
Service Vehicle Messages              electrical or another system problem   starting the engine. See Ignition
                                      with the vehicle. Have your vehicle    Positions on page 9‑20 for more
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING              checked by your dealer if this         information.
This message displays when the        message keeps appearing.
electronic sensors that control
the air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you
notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
                                                                           Instruments and Controls            5-51

Tire Messages                          To acknowledge the message,
                                                                                    WARNING (Continued)
                                       press the RESET button.
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE                     A message reappears every
                                       10 minutes until the condition is         message is displayed. Drive
This message may be displayed                                                    cautiously and check your tire
when one or more of the tires is       corrected.
                                                                                 pressures as soon as you can.
overinflated. This message also        LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE
displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT             LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT                                                      This message displays when one or
REAR to indicate which tire is                                                  more of the tires is underinflated.
affected. You can receive more than              { WARNING                      This message also displays LEFT
one tire pressure message at a                                                  FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
                                        When the LOW TIRE                       REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
time. To read other messages that
                                        PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT                   which tire is affected. Multiple
may have been sent at the same
time, press the RESET button . If a     message is displayed on the             chimes sound and the tire pressure
tire pressure message appears on        Driver Information Center, your         light on the instrument panel cluster
the DIC, stop as soon as you can.       vehicle's handling capabilities         turns on when this message is
Have the tire pressures checked         will be reduced during severe           displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
and set to those shown on the Tire      maneuvers. The active handling          on page 5‑24. You can receive more
and Loading Information label. See      system will be affected. See            than one tire pressure message at a
Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑59,           Active Handling System on               time. To read other messages that
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14,       page 9‑37. If you drive too fast,       may have been sent at the same
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66, and        you could lose control of your          time, press the RESET button. If a
Tire Pressure Monitor System on         vehicle. You or others could be         tire pressure message appears on
page 10‑68. The DIC also shows          injured. Do not drive over 90 km/h      the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
the tire pressure values. See Driver    (55 mph) when the LOW TIRE
Information Center (DIC) on             PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
page 5‑25.
                                                               (Continued)
5-52       Instruments and Controls

Have the tire pressures checked        page 10‑69 for more information.      This message displays when
and set to those shown on the Tire     If the warning comes on and stays     one or more of the tires is flat.
and Loading Information label. See     on, there may be a problem with the   This message also displays LEFT
Run-Flat Tires on page 10‑59,          TPMS. See your dealer.                FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14,                                            REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
Tire Pressure on page 10‑66, and       TIRE FLAT                             which tire is affected. Multiple
Tire Pressure Monitor System on                                              chimes sound and the tire pressure
page 10‑68. The DIC also shows                  { WARNING                    light on the instrument panel cluster
the tire pressure values. See Driver                                         comes on when this message is
Information Center (DIC) on             When the LOW TIRE                    displayed. See Tire Pressure Light
page 5‑25.                              PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT                on page 5‑24.
                                        message is displayed on the
To acknowledge the message,                                                  This message is followed by
                                        Driver Information Center, your
press the RESET button.                                                      the MAXIMUM SPEED 90 km/h
                                        vehicle's handling capabilities
A message reappears every                                                    (55 MPH) message, and then by
10 minutes until the condition is       will be reduced during severe        the REDUCED HANDLING
corrected.                              maneuvers. If you drive too fast,    message. The Active Handling
                                        you could lose control of your       System will intervene more quickly
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR                    vehicle. You or others could be      when a flat tire has been detected.
This message displays if a part         injured. Do not drive over 55 mph    Adjust your driving accordingly.
on the Tire Pressure Monitor            (90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE
System (TPMS) is not working            PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
properly. The tire pressure light       message is displayed. Drive
also flashes and then remains on        cautiously and check your tire
during the same ignition cycle. See     pressures as soon as you can.
Tire Pressure Light on page 5‑24.
Several conditions may cause this
message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
                                                                        Instruments and Controls               5-53

You can receive more than one tire     Transmission Messages                    TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
pressure message at a time. To                                                  ENGINE
read other messages that may have      SERVICE TRANSMISSION
been sent at the same time, press                                               This message displays and four
                                       This message displays when there         chimes sound if the transmission
the RESET button. If a tire pressure   is a problem with the transmission.
message appears on the DIC, stop                                                fluid temperature rises above
                                       See your dealer for service.             132°C (270°F) or rises rapidly.
as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those     SHIFT TO PARK                            The transmission may shift gears or
shown on the Tire and Loading                                                   apply the torque converter clutch to
                                       If the vehicle has an automatic          reduce the fluid temperature. Driving
Information label. See Run-Flat
                                       transmission, this message displays      aggressively or driving on long hills
Tires on page 10‑59, Vehicle Load
                                       if the vehicle is not in P (Park) when   can cause the transmission fluid
Limits on page 9‑14, Tire Pressure
                                       the engine is being turned off. The      temperature to be higher than
on page 10‑66, and Tire Pressure
                                       vehicle will be in ACCESSORY.            normal. If this message appears,
Monitor System on page 10‑68. The
                                       Once the shift lever is moved to         you may continue to drive at a
DIC also shows the tire pressure
                                       P (Park), the vehicle will turn off.     slower speed. Monitor the
values. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.             The vehicle will remain in               transmission fluid temperature
                                       ACCESSORY, without the 20 minute         and allow it to cool to at least
To acknowledge the message,                                                     110°C (230°F). The transmission
                                       time-out period, until the shift lever
press the RESET button.                                                         fluid temperature can be monitored
                                       is moved to P (Park) or until the
A message reappears every                                                       with the gauges button on the DIC.
                                       driver presses the pushbutton to
10 minutes until the condition is                                               See “DIC Operation and Displays”
                                       restart the vehicle. See Ignition
corrected.                                                                      under Driver Information Center
                                       Positions on page 9‑20 for more
                                       information.                             (DIC) on page 5‑25 and Automatic
                                                                                Transmission Fluid on page 10‑23.
                                                                                Also check the engine coolant
                                                                                temperature. If it is also hot, see
                                                                                Engine Overheating on page 10‑34.
5-54      Instruments and Controls

If this message is displayed during   Vehicle Reminder                        set to the default states. See
normal vehicle operation on flat                                              Vehicle Personalization on
roads, the vehicle may need
                                      Messages                                page 5‑55 for more information.
service. See your dealer for an       ACCESSORY MODE ON
inspection.                                                                   SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT
                                      This message displays when the          RECALL
If driving in a performance or        vehicle is in accessory mode.
competitive manner, the use of                                                If the vehicle has a manual
(S) Sport Automatic Mode or           ICE POSSIBLE                            transmission, this message displays
(S) Sport Manual Paddle Shift                                                 if you try to recall the memory
                                      This message displays when              positions when the ignition is on
gear selection is recommended.        the outside air temperature is
See Automatic Transmission on                                                 and the parking brake is not set.
                                      cold enough to create icy road          If the vehicle is on, you must set
page 9‑28 for more information.       conditions. Adjust your driving         the parking brake in order for the
To acknowledge the message, press     accordingly.                            memory positions to recall. See
the RESET button. The message                                                 “Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
reappears every 10 minutes until      OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
                                                                              Wheel” under Power Seat
this condition changes. If you do     This message displays for a few         Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
not press the RESET button, the       seconds if a RKE transmitter that is    information.
message remains on the display        not labeled 1 or 2 is used and you
until the condition changes.          try to personalize the features on
                                      the vehicle by pressing the OPTION
                                                                              Washer Fluid Messages
UPSHIFT NOW                           button. The personalization system      CHECK WASHER FLUID
See Manual Transmission on            will not recognize the transmitter
page 9‑32.                            and the DIC will not display the        See Washer Fluid on page 10‑37.
                                      current driver number or the menus
                                      used to set personalizations. The
                                      personalization features will then be
                                                                           Instruments and Controls               5-55
                                         .   The Head-Up Display (HUD)           .   A valid RKE transmitter is
Vehicle                                      position and dimming level,             detected upon opening the
Personalization                              if your vehicle has this feature.       driver door.
Many features on your vehicle
                                         .   The instrument panel cluster        If more than one valid RKE
can be personalized. This means              dimming level and last selected     transmitter is detected upon
that the operation of these features         DIC display.                        opening the driver door, the driver
can be set to operate differently        Separate personalization settings       preferences for the lowest driver
depending on who is driving the          are saved for two different drivers.    number will be recalled.
vehicle. See “Personal Options”          One of the Remote Keyless Entry         If an RKE transmitter that is
later in this section for the features   (RKE) transmitters is assigned to       not labelled 1 or 2 is used, the
that you can personalize.                driver 1. The other is assigned to      personalization system will not
The personalization settings for         driver 2. The backs of the RKE          recognize the transmitter. The Driver
other features are automatically         transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to     Information Center (DIC) will not
updated and saved as the driver          correspond to each driver.              display a current driver number
adjusts them. These include the          The current driver's preferences are    and the features that are normally
following settings and presets:          recalled when one of the following      programmed through the DIC will be
                                         occurs:                                 set to the default states. Also, if the
.   The radio presets, tone, volume,                                             OPTION button is pressed, the DIC
    fade, balance, equalization (EQ)     .   The lock or unlock button on the    does not display the menus used to
    settings, and source (radio              RKE transmitter, labelled 1 or 2,   set personalizations, but instead
    or CD).                                  is pressed.                         displays OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
.   The last climate control setting.    .   The appropriate memory              for a few seconds.
                                             button, 1 or 2, located on the
                                             driver door is pressed. See
                                             “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
                                             Steering Wheel” under Power
                                             Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3 for
                                             more information.
5-56      Instruments and Controls

Entering the Personal                 2. Press the OPTION button and          Personal Options
Options Menu                             you will enter the PERSONAL          The following options are available
To enter the personal options menu,      OPTIONS menu.                        for programming:
use the following steps:                 The DIC will display the current     Display Units: This option allows
1. If you have an automatic              driver number (1 or 2) for a few     you to choose the measurement
   transmission vehicle, turn the        seconds and then will display        units.
   vehicle on with the shift lever       instructions on which buttons
                                         to use for setting the               Press the OPTION button until
   in P (Park).                                                               DISPLAY UNITS appears on the
                                         personalizations. The RESET
   If you have a manual                  button is used to select a setting   display, then press the RESET
   transmission vehicle, turn the        for a particular feature. The        button to scroll through the following
   vehicle on with the parking           OPTION button is used to move        modes:
   brake set.                            to the next feature.                 .   ENGLISH (default)
   To avoid excessive drain on the    3. Press the OPTION button              .   METRIC
   battery, it is recommended that       while the instruction screen is
   the headlamps are turned off.         displayed to enter the first         If you choose ENGLISH, all
                                         personalization menu item.           information will be displayed in
                                                                              English units.
                                      4. Once you have cycled through
                                         all of the personal options,         If you choose METRIC, all
                                         pressing the OPTION button           information will be displayed in
                                         a final time exits the personal      metric units.
                                         options menu. In addition, if        When the mode you want is
                                         no button is pressed within          selected, press the OPTION button
                                         45 seconds, the DIC will exit        to set your choice and advance to
                                         the personal options menu.           the next personal option.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls               5-57

Auto Memory Recall (Automatic          When the mode you want is               Press the OPTION button until
Transmission only): If your            selected, press the OPTION button       AUTO EXIT RECALL appears on
automatic transmission vehicle has     to set your choice and advance to       the display, then press the RESET
the memory package, you may have       the next personal option.               button to scroll through the following
this option. This option allows the    Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle       modes:
driver seat, the telescopic steering   has the memory package, you may         .   YES
column, if your vehicle has this       have this option. This option allows
feature, and the outside rearview                                              .   NO (default)
                                       the driver seat and telescopic
mirrors to automatically move to the   steering column, if your vehicle has    If you choose YES, when you turn
current driver's set position when     this feature, to automatically move     the ignition off and open the driver
the engine starts.                     to the current driver's exit position   door or press the unlock button on
Press the OPTION button until          when one of the following occurs:       the RKE transmitter, the seat and
AUTO MEMORY RECALL appears                                                     the telescopic steering wheel, if your
                                       .   The vehicle is turned off or in     vehicle has this feature, will return
on the display, then press the             Retained Accessory Power
RESET button to scroll through the                                             to their stored exit positions for an
                                           (RAP) or accessory mode and         easy exit or an easy entrance when
following modes:                           the driver door is opened.          returning to the vehicle.
.   YES                                .   The vehicle is turned off or in     The seat and steering wheel will
.   NO (default)                           RAP and the unlock button on        only return to the stored driving
If you choose YES, the driver seat,        the RKE transmitter is pressed.     position if you press the appropriate
the outside rearview mirrors and the   In order for the Auto Exit Recall       memory button or activate the Auto
telescopic steering column, if your    feature to work on an automatic         Memory Recall feature.
vehicle has this feature, positions    transmission vehicle, the vehicle       If you choose NO, this option will
are recalled when you turn the         must be in P (Park). On a manual        turn off.
ignition on.                           transmission vehicle, the parking
If you choose NO, this option will     brake must be set.
turn off.
5-58       Instruments and Controls

When the mode you want is                If you choose ON, the parking          When the mode you want is
selected, press the OPTION button        lamps, the high-beam headlamps,        selected, press the OPTION button
to set your choice and advance to        and the back-up lamps will come        to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.                on for 20 seconds during low light     the next personal option.
Approach Lights: This option             periods when all of the following      Twilight Delay: This option
briefly turns on the parking lamps,      occur:                                 allows you to set the amount of time
the high-beam headlamps, and the         .   You press the unlock button on     you want the parking lamps and
back-up lamps during low light               the RKE transmitter.               high-beam headlamps to remain on
periods when the RKE transmitter         .   Both of the doors are closed.      after you exit the vehicle. This will
is used to unlock the vehicle.                                                  occur when the vehicle is off or in
                                         .   The vehicle is off or in RAP.      RAP and the headlamps are on due
Press the OPTION button until
APPROACH LIGHTS appears on               The lamps remain on for 20 seconds     to the automatic headlamp system.
the display, then press the RESET        or until a door is opened, the lock    The parking lamps and high-beam
button to scroll through the following   button on the RKE transmitter is       headlamps will remain on until the
modes:                                   pressed, or the vehicle is no longer   driver selected time expires, the
                                         off or in RAP.                         exterior lamp control is activated,
.   OFF                                                                         or the vehicle is no longer off or
                                         See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)         in RAP.
.   ON (default)                         System on page 2‑3 for more
If you choose OFF, this option will      information.
turn off.
                                                                          Instruments and Controls                5-59

Press the OPTION button until            Flash at Unlock: This option             Flash at Lock: This option
TWILIGHT DELAY appears on the            activates the front and rear turn        activates the front and rear turn
display, then press the RESET            signals for two short flashes when       signals for one long flash when the
button to scroll through the following   the unlock or hatch/trunk button on      lock button on the RKE transmitter
modes:                                   the RKE transmitter is pressed. This     is pressed. This will only occur
.   OFF                                  will only occur when the vehicle         when the vehicle is off. If the lock
                                         is off.                                  button on the RKE transmitter is
.   15 S                                                                          pressed again within five seconds,
                                         Press the OPTION button until
.   30 S (default)                       FLASH AT UNLOCK appears on               the horn will sound regardless of
                                         the display, then press the RESET        which setting you have selected.
.   90 S
                                         button to scroll through the following   Press the OPTION button until
If you choose OFF, this option will      modes:                                   FLASH AT LOCK appears on the
turn off.                                                                         display, then press the RESET
                                         .   YES (default)
If you choose 15 S, the twilight                                                  button to scroll through the following
delay time will be set to 15 seconds.
                                         .   NO                                   modes:
If you choose 30 S, the twilight         If you choose YES, the front and         .   YES (default)
delay time will be set to 30 seconds.    rear turn signals will flash twice
                                         when you press the unlock button or
                                                                                  .   NO
If you choose 90 S, the twilight         the hatch/trunk button on the RKE        If you choose YES, the front and
delay time will be set to 90 seconds.    transmitter.                             rear turn signals will flash once
When the mode you want is                If you choose NO, this option will       when you press the lock button on
selected, press the OPTION button        turn off.                                the RKE transmitter.
to set your choice and advance to                                                 If you choose NO, this option will
the next personal option.                When the mode you want is
                                         selected, press the OPTION button        turn off.
                                         to set your choice and advance to
                                         the next personal option.
5-60       Instruments and Controls

When the mode you want is                When the mode you want is                an authorized RKE transmitter,
selected, press the OPTION button        selected, press the OPTION button        however, will not be able to open
to set your choice and advance to        to set your choice and advance to        the door, even with a transmitter in
the next personal option.                the next personal option.                the vehicle.
FOB Reminder: This option                Passive Door Locking: This               You may temporarily disable the
sounds the horn three times when         option allows you to select whether      passive door locking feature by
the driver door is closed and there is   the doors automatically lock during      pressing the door unlock switch for
a RKE transmitter inside the interior    normal vehicle exit. When the            three seconds on an open door.
of the vehicle. This will only occur     ignition is turned off and all doors     Passive door locking will then
when the vehicle is off.                 become closed, the vehicle will          remain disabled until a door lock
Press the OPTION button until FOB        determine how many RKE                   switch is pressed or until the power
REMINDER appears on the display,         transmitters remain in the vehicle       mode transitions from the off
then press the RESET button to           interior. If at least one RKE            power mode.
scroll through the following modes:      transmitter has been removed from        Press the OPTION button until
                                         the interior of the vehicle, the doors   PASSIVE DOOR LOCKING appears
.   YES                                  will lock after a short delay.           on the display, then press the
.   NO (default)                         For example, if there are two RKE        RESET button to scroll through the
If you choose YES, the horn will         transmitters in the vehicle and one      following modes:
sound three times when a RKE             is removed, the other will be locked     .   OFF (default)
transmitter is inside of the vehicle     in. The RKE transmitter locked in
while the ignition is turned off         the vehicle can still be used to start   .   SILENT
and the driver door is closed.           the vehicle or unlock the doors,         .   HORN
                                         if needed. A person approaching the
If you choose NO, this option will       outside of the locked vehicle without    If you choose OFF, this option will
turn off.                                                                         turn off.
                                                                        Instruments and Controls                5-61

If you choose SILENT, the doors will    Passive Door Unlock: This option        Auto Unlock: This option allows
automatically lock a short time after   allows you to select which doors        you to select whether the driver
you remove a RKE transmitter from       will automatically unlock when you      door, both doors, or neither door
the interior of the vehicle and close   approach and open the driver door       automatically unlocks when the shift
both doors.                             with the RKE transmitter. See Door      lever is moved into P (Park) for
If you choose HORN, the doors will      Locks on page 2‑8 for more              automatic transmission vehicles or
automatically lock and the horn will    information.                            when the ignition is turned off or is
sound a short time after you remove     Press the OPTION button until           in RAP for manual transmission
a RKE transmitter from the interior     PASSIVE DOOR UNLOCK appears             vehicles.
of the vehicle and close both doors.    on the display, then press the          Press the OPTION button until
If you are parking in a quiet area      RESET button to scroll through the      AUTO UNLOCK appears on the
and do not want the horn to sound       following modes:                        display, then press the RESET
when the doors lock, press the lock     .   DRIVER                              button to scroll through the following
button on the RKE transmitter                                                   modes:
                                        .   BOTH (default)
immediately after removing it from                                              .   OFF
the interior and closing the doors.     If you choose DRIVER, only the          .
                                        driver door will automatically unlock       DRIVER
This will lock the doors and cancel
the passive locking for this ignition   when you approach and open the          .   BOTH (default)
cycle.                                  driver door with the RKE transmitter.   If you choose OFF, this option will
When the mode you want is               If you choose BOTH, both doors will     turn off.
selected, press the OPTION button       automatically unlock when you
to set your choice and advance to       approach and open the driver door
the next personal option.               with the RKE transmitter.
5-62       Instruments and Controls

If you choose DRIVER, on                For example, English will be           When the mode you want is
automatic transmission vehicles, the    displayed as ENGLISH, Spanish as       selected, press the OPTION button
driver door will automatically unlock   ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle has      to set your choice and advance to
when the shift lever is moved into      the navigation system, you will not    the next personal option.
P (Park). On manual transmission        have the Japanese language mode.       Personalize Name: This option
vehicles, the driver door will          Press the OPTION button until          allows you to type in a name or
automatically unlock when the           LANGUAGE appears on the display,       greeting that will appear on the DIC
ignition is turned off or is in RAP.    then press the RESET button to         display whenever the corresponding
If you choose BOTH, on automatic        scroll through the following modes:    RKE transmitter (1 or 2) is used or
transmission vehicles, both doors       .   ENGLISH (default)                  one of the memory buttons (1 or 2)
will automatically unlock when the                                             located on the driver door is
shift lever is moved into P (Park).     .   DEUTSCH (German)                   pressed.
On manual transmission vehicles,        .   FRANCAIS (French)                  Press the OPTION button until
both doors will automatically unlock                                           PERSONALIZE NAME appears on
when the ignition is turned off or is
                                        .   ITALIANO (Italian)
                                                                               the display, then press the RESET
in RAP.                                 .   ESPANOL (Spanish)                  button to scroll through the following
When the mode you want is               If you choose a language that          modes:
selected, press the OPTION button       you do not understand, press the       .   YES
to set your choice and advance to       OPTION and RESET buttons for
the next personal option.               five seconds. The DIC will begin
                                                                               .   NO (default)
Language: This option allows you        displaying all of the various          If you choose YES, you can type in
to select the language the DIC, the     languages one by one for as long       a name that will appear on the DIC
Head-Up Display (HUD), if your          as the buttons are pressed. When       display.
vehicle has this feature, and the       the desired language is displayed,
radio uses to display messages.         release the buttons and the DIC will
Each language mode will be              set to this language.
displayed in its own language.
                                                                       Instruments and Controls               5-63

To program a name, use the               There are alpha/numeric                 greeting is complete, keep
following procedure:                     characters and a blank space            pressing the RESET button until
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS            available.                              the display turns blank and
   menu and select the driver         6. Press the RESET button to               exits out of this option. You can
   number (1 or 2) that you would        select the letter of your choice        program up to 20 characters.
   like to program by following the      and proceed on to the next           If you choose NO, this option will
   instructions listed previously        space to the right.                  turn off.
   under “Entering the Personal          If you make a mistake and would      If a customized name or greeting
   Options Menu”.                        like to clear or replace a letter,   is not programmed, the DIC display
2. Press the OPTION button until         perform the following steps:         will show Driver 1 or Driver 2
   the PERSONALIZE NAME                  6.1. Press the RESET button to       to correspond with either the
   option appears on the display.             reach the letter you would      number on the back of the RKE
3. Select YES under                           like to change.                 transmitter (1 or 2) being used or to
   PERSONALIZE NAME by                                                        the memory button (1 or 2) that is
                                         6.2. Press the OPTION button         pressed.
   pressing the RESET button.                 to scroll through the letter
4. Press the OPTION button and                choices.                        PERSONALIZE NAME is the
   a cursor will display where                                                last option available to program in
                                         6.3. Press the RESET button          the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
   you can insert a letter.                   to select the letter and        Pressing the OPTION button after
5. Press the OPTION button                    proceed on to the next          this setting will exit you from the
   again until the letter you want            space to the right.             PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
   is displayed. To scroll through    7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the       The last item you were in prior to
   the letters faster and without        name or greeting you want is         entering PERSONAL OPTIONS will
   a beeping noise, keep the             complete. After the name or          then display on the DIC.
   OPTIONS button depressed.
5-64      Instruments and Controls

Universal Remote                      Universal Remote System              Read the instructions completely
                                                                           before attempting to program the
System                                Programming                          transmitter. Because of the steps
                                                                           involved, it may be helpful to have
See Radio Frequency Statement on
                                                                           another person assist with
page 13‑19 for information
                                                                           programming the transmitter.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)                                            Be sure to keep the original remote
rules and Industry Canada                                                  control transmitter for use in other
Standards RSS-210/220/310.                                                 vehicles, as well as for future
                                                                           programming. Only the original
The FCC Grant of Equipment
                                                                           remote control transmitter is needed
Authorization Certificate number is
                                                                           for Fixed Code programming. The
KOBFTE05A.
                                                                           programmed buttons should be
The Canadian Registration                                                  erased when the vehicle is sold
ID number is 3521A-FTE05A.                                                 or the lease ends. See “Erasing
                                                                           Universal Home Remote Buttons”
                                      This system provides a way to        in this section.
                                      replace up to three remote control
                                      transmitters used to activate        Park the vehicle outside of the
                                      devices such as garage door          garage when programming a garage
                                      openers, security systems, and       door. Be sure that people and
                                      home automation devices.             objects are clear of the garage door
                                                                           or gate being programmed.
                                      Do not use this system with any
                                      garage door opener that does not
                                      have the stop and reverse feature.
                                      This includes any garage door
                                      opener model manufactured before
                                      April 1, 1982.
                                                                      Instruments and Controls               5-65

Programming Universal Home             To program up to three devices:
Remote — Rolling Code                  1. Press START or put the vehicle
For questions or help programming         in accessory mode. See Ignition
the Universal Home Remote                 Positions on page 9‑20 for
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or            additional information.
go to www.learcar2u.com.                  Programming can only occur
Most garage door openers sold             when the vehicle is running or in
after 1996 are Rolling Code units.        accessory mode.
Programming a garage door opener                                              3. Locate in the garage, the
involves time-sensitive actions, so                                              garage door opener receiver
read the entire procedure before                                                 (motor-head unit). Locate the
starting. Otherwise, the device will                                             “Learn” or “Smart” button. It
time out and the procedure will have                                             can usually be found where
to be repeated.                                                                  the hanging antenna wire is
                                                                                 attached to the motor-head unit
                                                                                 and may be a colored button.
                                                                                 Press this button. After pressing
                                                                                 this button, complete the
                                                                                 following steps in less than
                                                                                 30 seconds.

                                       2. From inside the vehicle,
                                          press the two outside buttons
                                          at the same time for one to
                                          two seconds, and immediately
                                          release them.
5-66       Instruments and Controls

4. Immediately return to the              To program another Rolling Code          Most garage door openers sold
   vehicle. Press and hold the            device such as an additional garage      before 1996 are Fixed Code units.
   Universal Home Remote button           door opener, a security device,          Programming a garage door opener
   that will be used to control the       or home automation device, repeat        involves time-sensitive actions, so
   garage door until the garage           Steps 1 through 6, choosing a            read the entire procedure before
   door moves. The indicator light,       different function button in Step 4      starting. Otherwise, the device will
   above the selected button,             than what was used for the garage        time out and the procedure will have
   should slowly blink. This button       door opener.                             to be repeated.
   may need to be held for up to          If these instructions do not work, the
   20 seconds.                                                                     To program up to three devices:
                                          garage door opener is probably a
5. Immediately, within one second,        Fixed Code unit. Follow the              1. Press START or put the vehicle
   release the button when the            programming instructions that follow        in accessory mode. See Ignition
   garage door moves. The                 for a Fixed Code garage door                Positions on page 9‑20 for
   indicator light blinks rapidly until   opener.                                     additional information.
   programming is complete.                                                           Programming can only occur
                                          Programming Universal Home
6. Press and release the same                                                         when the vehicle is running or in
                                          Remote — Fixed Code
   button again. The garage door                                                      accessory mode.
   should move, confirming that           For questions or help programming
   programming is successful and          the Universal Home Remote
   complete.                              System, call 1-866-572-2728 or
                                          go to www.learcar2u.com.
                                                                    Instruments and Controls             5-67

                                       The hand-held transmitter
                                       can have between eight and
                                       12 dip switches depending on
                                       the brand of transmitter.
                                       The garage door opener receiver
                                       (motor head unit) could also
                                       have a row of dip switches that       Example of Eight Dip Switches
                                       can be used when programming              with Two Positions
                                       the Universal Home Remote.
                                       If the total number of switches
                                       on the motor head and
                                       hand-held transmitter is different,
2. To verify that the garage door      or if the dip switch settings are
   opener is a Fixed Code unit,        different, use the dip switch
   remove the battery cover on the     settings on the motor head unit
   hand-held transmitter supplied      to program the Universal Home         Example of Eight Dip Switches
   by the manufacturer of the          Remote. The motor head dip                with Three Positions
   garage door opener motor.           switch settings can also be used       The panel of switches might not
   If there is a row of dip switches   when the original hand-held            appear exactly as they do in the
   similar to the graphic above,       transmitter is not available.          examples above, but they
   the garage door opener is a                                                should be similar.
   Fixed Code unit. If you do not
   see a row of dip switches,
   return to the previous section,
   “Programming Universal Home
   Remote – Rolling Code.”
5-68      Instruments and Controls

   The switch positions on the
                                           .    If a switch is set between
   hand-held transmitter could be               the up and down position,
   labeled as follows:                          write “Middle.”
   .    A switch in the up position             The switch settings written
        could be labeled as “Up,”               down in Step 3 now
        “+,” or “On.”                           become the button strokes
                                                to be entered into the
   .    A switch in the down                    Universal Home Remote in
        position could be labeled as            Step 5. Be sure to enter the
        “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”                  switch settings written down
   .    A switch in the middle                  in Step 3, in order from left
        position could be labeled as            to right, into the Universal
        “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”            Home Remote, when                  A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)
                                                completing Step 5.
3. Write down the eight to 12 switch                                               B. Middle Button (Middle, 0,
   settings from left to right as       4. From inside the vehicle, first             or Neutral)
   follows:                                firmly press all three buttons
                                                                                   C. Right Button (Down, -, or Off)
   .                                       at the same time for about
        When a switch is in the up
                                           three seconds. Release the           5. The indicator lights blink slowly.
        position, write “Left.”
                                           buttons to put the Universal            Enter each switch setting
   .    When a switch is in the            Home Remote into                        from Step 3 into the vehicle's
        down position, write “Right.”      programming mode.                       Universal Home Remote. You
                                                                                   have two and one-half minutes to
                                                                                   complete Step 5. Now press one
                                                                                   button on the Universal Home
                                                                                   Remote for each switch setting
                                                                                   as follows:
                                                                         Instruments and Controls                5-69
   .    If you wrote “Left,” press
        the left button (A) in the
                                        7. Press and hold the button            Universal Remote System
                                           that will be used to control the
        vehicle.                           garage door until the garage
                                                                                Operation
   .    If you wrote “Right,” press        door moves. The indicator light      Press and hold the appropriate
        the right button (C) in the        above the selected button            button for at least one-half second.
        vehicle.                           should slowly blink. This button     The indicator light comes on while
                                           may need to be held for up to        the signal is being transmitted.
   .    If you wrote “Middle,” press       55 seconds.
        the middle button (B) in the                                            Operation can occur:
        vehicle.                        8. Immediately release the button       .   If the vehicle is in
                                           when the garage door moves.
6. After entering all of the switch                                                 accessory mode.
                                           The indicator light blinks rapidly
   positions, again, firmly press and      until programming is complete.       .   If the vehicle is running.
   release all three buttons at the
   same time. The indicator lights      9. Press and release the same           .   If the vehicle is in Retained
   turn on.                                button again. The garage door            Accessory Mode (RAP). See
                                           should move, confirming that             Retained Accessory Power
                                           programming is successful and            (RAP) on page 9‑23 for more
                                           complete.                                information.
                                        To program another Fixed Code           .   Up to an additional 10 minutes
                                        device such as an additional garage         after RAP finishes.
                                        door opener, a security device,         .   Up to 10 minutes after any door
                                        or home automation device, repeat           is opened.
                                        Steps 1 through 9, choosing a
                                        different button in Step 7 than what
                                        was used for the garage door
                                        opener.
5-70      Instruments and Controls

Reprogramming Universal                2. Once the indicator lights begin to
Home Remote Buttons                       blink, release both buttons. The
                                          codes from all buttons are
Any of the three buttons can be           erased.
reprogrammed by repeating the
instructions.                          For help or information on the
                                       Universal Home Remote System,
Erasing Universal Home                 call the customer assistance phone
Remote Buttons                         number under Customer Assistance
The programmed buttons should be       Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
erased when the vehicle is sold or     page 13‑5 or Customer Assistance
the lease ends.                        Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.

To erase either Rolling Code or
Fixed Code on the Universal Home
Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside
   buttons at the same time for
   approximately 20 seconds, until
   the indicator lights, located
   directly above the buttons, begin
   to blink rapidly.
                                                                                                                       Lighting        6-1

Lighting                                                      Exterior Lighting                       To override AUTO mode, turn the
                                                                                                      control to off.
                                                              Exterior Lamp Controls                  To reset to AUTO mode, turn the
Exterior Lighting                                                                                     control to exterior lamps and then
 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1                                                           back to AUTO. Automatic mode also
 Exterior Lamps Off                                                                                   resets when the vehicle is turned off
  Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2                                                and then back on again if the control
 Headlamp High/Low-Beam                                                                               is left in the AUTO position.
  Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2                                               ; (Parking Lamps):     Turns on the
 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2                                                  parking lamps together with the
 Daytime Running                                                                                      following:
  Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2             The exterior lamp control is located
 Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3            to the left of the steering wheel on    .   Sidemarker Lamps
 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4                        the multifunction lever.                .   Taillamps
 Turn and Lane-Change Signals                                 O (Exterior Lamp Control):       Turn
  (Auto Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
                                                                                                      .   License Plate Lamps
                                                              the band with this symbol on it to
 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5        operate the exterior lamps.
                                                                                                      .   Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Lighting                                             The exterior lamp band has four         The parking brake indicator
 Instrument Panel Illumination                                positions:                              light comes on and stays on when
   Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5                                            the parking lamps are on with the
 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6               O (Off):   Turns off all lamps.         engine off and the ignition to
 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6              AUTO (Automatic): Sets the              ACC/ACCESSORY.
                                                              exterior lamps to automatic mode.       5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Lighting Features                                             AUTO mode turns the exterior
 Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6                                                    headlamps, together with the
                                                              lamps on and off depending on how       previously listed lamps and lights.
 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7                     much light is available outside the
 Exterior Lighting Battery                                    vehicle.
  Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-2      Lighting

Exterior Lamps Off                      Flash-to-Pass                           The DRL system makes the front
                                                                                turn signal lamps come on when the
Reminder                                To use the flash-to-pass feature,       following conditions are met:
A warning chime will sound if the       briefly pull the turn signal lever
                                        toward you. The high-beam
                                                                                .   It is still daylight and the ignition
exterior lamp control is left on in                                                 is on.
either the headlamp or parking lamp     indicator flashes to indicate to the
position and the driver door is         other driver that you intend to pass.   .   The exterior lamp control is in
opened with the ignition off.           If the low-beam headlamps are off           the AUTO position.
                                        and the fog lamps are on, the fog
                                        lamps flash.
                                                                                .   The transmission is not in
Headlamp High/                                                                      P (Park) or the parking brake
Low-Beam Changer                                                                    is off.
                                        Daytime Running
                                                                                .   The parking brake is off or the
To change the headlamps from low        Lamps (DRL)                                 vehicle speed is greater than
beam to high, push the turn signal
lever all the way forward. To change    Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can             13 km/h (8 mph).
from high to low beam, pull the lever   make it easier for others to see the    When DRL are on, only the front
rearward.                               front of your vehicle during the day.   turn signal lamps will be on. The
                                        Fully functional daytime running        parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
                                        lamps are required on all vehicles      panel lights, or other exterior lamps
                                        first sold in Canada.                   will not be on when the DRL are
                                                                                being used.



While the high beams are on, this
light on the instrument cluster will
also be lit.
                                                                                                    Lighting         6-3

When it is dark enough outside, the       If it is dark enough outside and         Twilight Sentinel
front turn signal lamps turn off and      the exterior lamp control is off, a
the normal low-beam headlamps             HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED                      Twilight Sentinel® is an automatic
turn on.                                  message will display on the Driver       headlamp system. When activated,
                                          Information Center (DIC). See Lamp       this feature turns your headlamps
When it is bright enough outside,                                                  and parking lamps on and off by
the regular lamps go off, and the         Messages on page 5‑44.
                                                                                   sensing how dark it is outside.
front turn signal lamps will take over.   Turning the exterior lamp control
If the vehicle is started in a dark       to off a second time, or turning on      Be sure not to cover the light sensor
garage, the automatic headlamp            the headlamps will remove the            on the top of the instrument panel.
system comes on immediately.              HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED                      AUTO: Activates the system.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage,       message in the DIC. If the parking
it takes approximately one minute         lamps or the fog lamps were turned       If the band is already in the AUTO
for the automatic headlamp system         on instead, the HEADLAMPS                position when you start your vehicle,
to change to DRL if it is light           SUGGESTED message will                   Twilight Sentinel is automatically
outside. During that delay, the           continue to be displayed.                enabled.
instrument panel cluster may not          The regular headlamp system              If it is dark outside, your vehicle
be as bright as usual. Make sure          should be turned on when needed.         headlamps and parking lamps will
the instrument panel brightness                                                    turn on automatically.
knob is in the full bright position.      To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
                                          lamp control to the off position or      Once it is bright enough outside, the
See Instrument Panel Illumination                                                  headlamps and parking lamps will
Control on page 6‑5 for more              shift into P (Park). The DRL will stay
                                          off until the control is toggled again   automatically turn back off.
information.
                                          or the vehicle is shifted out of         Twilight Sentinel may also turn on
                                          P (Park).                                when you drive through a dimly
                                          This procedure applies only to           lit area.
                                          vehicles first sold in the United        Once you leave the dimly lit area, it
                                          States.                                  may take about one minute before
                                                                                   the Twilight Sentinel turns off.
6-4      Lighting

During this brief delay, the           See “Personal Options” under              Turn and Lane-Change
instrument cluster may not be as       Vehicle Personalization on
bright as usual. Make sure the         page 5‑55.
                                                                                 Signals (Auto Signal)
instrument panel dimmer is set to      The regular headlamp system
full brightness. See Instrument        should be turned on when needed.
Panel Illumination Control on
page 6‑5.
                                       Hazard Warning Flashers
To temporarily disable Twilight
                                       The hazard warning flashers warn
Sentinel, turn the band to O.          others that you have a problem. The
To turn Twilight Sentinel back on,     button is located near the center of      An arrow on the instrument panel
turn the band to O again, then         the instrument panel.                     cluster flashes in the direction of the
release it.                            | : Press to make the front and           turn or lane change.
If the Twilight Sentinel has the       rear turn signal lamps flash on and       Move the lever all the way up or
headlamps turned on and you turn       off. Press again to turn the              down to signal a turn.
the ignition off, the headlamps will   flashers off.
                                                                                 Raise or lower the lever until the
stay on for a period of time while     The hazard warning flashers work          arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
you leave the vehicle.                 no matter what mode the ignition is       change. Release the lever and the
Use the Driver Information Center to   in, even if the ignition is turned off.   turn signal automatically flashes
turn Twilight Sentinel on or off and   When the hazard warning flashers          three times. If more flashes are
to increase or decrease the length     are on, the turn signals will             desired, continue to hold the lever.
of the delayed illumination period.    not work.
                                                                                                 Lighting         6-5

The lever returns to its starting       Fog Lamps                               Interior Lighting
position when it is released.
                                        Use fog lamps for better vision in
If after signaling a turn or lane       foggy or misty conditions.              Instrument Panel
change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb may       The fog lamps control is located on     Illumination Control
be burned out.                          the multifunction lever next to the
                                        exterior lamp control.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.      # (Fog Lamps): Turning the band
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on       to this position will turn the fog
page 10‑51.                             lamps on.

Turn Signal on Chime                    When you turn the fog lamps on,
                                        the fog lamp light will appear on the
A chime sounds if the turn signal       instrument panel cluster to indicate
has been on for more than 1.2 km        that the fog lamps and the parking
(0.75 miles) of driving.                lamps are on.
If you need to leave the turn           If you turn the high-beam
signal on for more than 1.2 km          headlamps on, the fog lamps will
(0.75 miles), turn off the signal and   turn off. They will turn on again       The knob for this feature is located
then turn it back on.                   when you switch to low-beam             on the left side of the instrument
                                        headlamps.                              panel.
                                        The ignition must be on for the fog     Push the knob in to turn on the
                                        lamps to operate.                       interior lights.
                                        Some localities have laws that
                                        require the headlamps to be on
                                        along with the fog lamps.
6-6      Lighting

Turn and hold the knob                  Courtesy Lamps                           Lighting Features
clockwise to brighten the lights
or counterclockwise to dim them.        When any door or the hatch/trunk
During the day, this knob will adjust   lid is opened, the interior lamps will   Entry/Exit Lighting
the instrument panel brightness and     go on unless it is bright outside.       With entry lighting, the interior
at night will adjust all interior       You can also turn the courtesy           lamps will come on when entering
lighting.                               lamps on and off by pressing the         the vehicle. To illuminate your exit,
Be sure not to have this knob           instrument panel brightness knob.        the interior lamps come on for about
turned all the way down with the                                                 20 seconds when the engine is
lamps on during the day. The Driver     Reading Lamps                            turned off .
Information Center (DIC) may not be     The inside rearview mirror includes      To turn the entry and exit lighting off,
visible.                                two reading lamps. The lamps will        quickly turn the courtesy lamps on
                                        go on when a door is opened. When        and off by pressing the instrument
                                        the doors are closed, press each         panel brightness knob.
                                        lamp switch to turn them on
                                        individually.
                                                                               Lighting   6-7

Battery Power Protection               Exterior Lighting Battery
This vehicle has a feature to help     Saver
prevent the battery from being         If the manual parking lamps or
drained in case any of the following   headlamps have been left on, the
lamps are left on: the underhood       exterior lamps will turn off as soon
lamp, if your vehicle has this         as the ignition is turned off or
feature, vanity mirror lamps, cargo    Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
lamps, reading lamps, console,         active. This protects against
or glove box lamps. If any of these    draining the battery in case you
lamps are left on, they will           have accidentally left the headlamps
automatically time-out after about     or parking lamps on. The battery
10 minutes. To reset it, all of the    saver does not work if the
above lamps must be turned off or      headlamps are turned on after the
the ignition key on.                   ignition switch is turned to off.
                                       If you need to leave the lamps on,
                                       use the exterior lamp control to turn
                                       the lamps back on.
6-8   Lighting

                 2 NOTES
                                                                                                 Infotainment System                 7-1

Infotainment                                               Introduction                          To minimize taking your eyes off the
                                                                                                 road while driving, do the following
System                                                     Infotainment
                                                                                                 while the vehicle is parked:
                                                                                                 .   Become familiar with the
                                                           Determine which radio the vehicle         operation and controls of the
Introduction                                               has and read the following pages to       audio system.
 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1    become familiar with its features.
 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
                                                                                                 .   Set up the tone, speaker
                                                                                                     adjustments, and preset radio
 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2             { WARNING                       stations.
Radio                                                       Taking your eyes off the road        For more information, see Defensive
 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5          for extended periods could           Driving on page 9‑2.
 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8        cause a crash resulting in injury
 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10                                                  Notice: Contact your dealer
                                                            or death to you or others. Do        before adding any equipment.
 Diversity Antenna System . . . . 7-11
 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-11                   not give extended attention to
                                                            entertainment tasks while driving.   Adding audio or communication
Audio Players                                                                                    equipment could interfere with
 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11                                          the operation of the engine, radio,
                                                           This system provides access to        or other systems, and could
 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
                                                           many audio and non‐audio listings.    damage them. Follow federal
Phone                                                                                            rules covering mobile radio and
 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18                                          telephone equipment.
                                                                                                 The vehicle has Retained
                                                                                                 Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
                                                                                                 the audio system can be played
                                                                                                 even after the ignition is turned off.
7-2      Infotainment System

See Retained Accessory Power             Operation
(RAP) on page 9‑23 for more
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.

Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate and
LOCKED displays if the radio is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
When the when the ignition is in
the off position, a blinking red light               Single CD Radio Shown, Six-Disc CD Radio Similar
on the upper left side of the radio
indicates that TheftLock® is armed.      The vehicle has one of these radios      deterrent feature is set. For more
                                         as its audio system.                     information, see Theft-Deterrent
                                         An indicator light on the upper left     Feature on page 7‑2.
                                         side of the radio flashes when the
                                         ignition is off, to indicate the theft
                                                                              Infotainment System                7-3

Playing the Radio                      For XM™:                               .   Press and hold the O / e knob
                                                                                  until the level changes to the
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press         Press 4 to retrieve four different         middle position.
to turn the system on and off. Turn    categories of information related
to increase or decrease the volume.    to the current song or channel:        Adjusting the Speakers
MUTE: Press to silence the             Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,   (Balance/Fade)
system. Press again to turn the        or Channel Number/Channel Name.
                                                                              O / e (Balance/Fade): To adjust
sound on.                              Audio Settings                         the Balance:
This button is not available on the
                                       Press and hold O / e when no           Press and release O /    e until
Six-Disc CD Radio.
                                       tone or speaker control is displayed   BALANCE displays.
4 (Information):  Press until the      to adjust all tone and speaker
desired display is shown, then hold                                           .   Turn the O / e knob to move
                                       controls to the middle position.
for two seconds until the radio        AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED                    the sound toward the right or the
beeps once to change the default       displays.                                  left speakers.
display. The selected display is now
the default.                           Adjusting the Tone
                                                                              .   Press and hold the O / e knob
                                       (Bass/Treble)                              until the level changes to the
For RDS:                                                                          middle position.
Press 4 to change the display. The
                                       O / e (Bass/Treble): To adjust
                                       the bass or treble:
display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and        Press and release O / e until
the name of the program (if            BASS or TREBLE displays.
available).
                                       .   Turn the O / e knob to
                                           increase or to decrease the
                                           level.
7-4      Infotainment System

To adjust the Fade:                     For vehicles with the Bose sound           or AUTO VOLUME MAX
                                        system:                                    (maximum). Each higher
Press and release   O / e until                                                    setting provides more volume
FADE displays
                                        .   Press AUTO EQ to select
                                            equalization settings from EQ1         compensation at faster vehicle
.   Turn the O / e knob to move             through EQ6.                           speeds.
    the sound toward the front or the   .   Selecting CUSTOM or changing        3. Press AUTO n until AUTO
    rear speakers.                          bass or treble, returns the EQ to      VOLUME OFF displays to turn
.   Press and hold the O / e knob           the manual bass and treble             automatic volume off.
    until the level changes to the          settings.                           For vehicles with the Bose sound
    middle position.                    AUTO n (Automatic Volume):              system:
AUTO EQ (Automatic                      Automatic volume automatically          Vehicles with the Bose sound
Equalization): The radio saves          adjusts the audio system to make        system include Bose AudioPilot®
separate AUTO EQ settings for           up for road and wind noise, by          noise compensation technology.
each preset and source.                 increasing the volume as vehicle        AudioPilot continuously adjusts
                                        speed increases.                        the audio system equalization to
For vehicles without the Bose sound
                                        For vehicles without the Bose sound     compensate for background noise.
system:
                                        system:                                 This feature is most effective at
.   Press AUTO EQ to select                                                     lower radio volume settings where
    equalization settings designed      1. Set the volume at the desired        background noise can affect how
    for CLASSICAL, POP, ROCK,              level.                               well the audio is heard. At higher
    JAZZ, TALK, and COUNTRY.                                                    volume settings, there may be little
                                        2. Press AUTO n to select
.   Selecting CUSTOM or changing                                                or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For
                                           AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum),           additional information on AudioPilot,
    bass or treble, returns the EQ to      AUTO VOLUME MED (medium),
    the manual bass and treble                                                  visit bose.com/audiopilot.
    settings.
                                                                                 Infotainment System                 7-5

To use AudioPilot:                     Radio                                     With RDS, the radio can:
1. Set the volume at the desired                                                 .   Seek to stations broadcasting
   level.                              AM-FM Radio                                   the selected type of
                                                                                     programming.
2. Press AUTO n until AUTO             Radio Data System (RDS)                   .   Receive announcements
   VOLUME ON displays.
                                       RDS features are available for use            concerning local and national
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO             only on FM stations that broadcast            emergencies.
   VOLUME OFF displays to turn         RDS information. The station name         .   Display messages from radio
   off AudioPilot.                     or call letters display while the radio
                                                                                     stations.
                                       is tuned to an RDS station.
Radio Messages                                                                   .   Seek to stations with traffic
                                       This system relies upon receiving
CAL ERR (Calibration Error):                                                         announcements.
                                       specific information from these
Displays if the radio is no longer     stations and works only when the          .   Provide the time of day.
configured properly for the vehicle.   information is available. In rare
The vehicle must be returned to
                                                                                 .   Provide a program type (PTY)
                                       cases, a radio station can broadcast          for current programming.
your dealer for service.               incorrect information that causes the
LOC (Locked): Displays when the        radio features to work improperly.
                                                                                 .   Provide the name of the program
TheftLock system has locked up.        If this happens, contact the radio            being broadcast.
The vehicle must be returned to        station.
your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
cannot be corrected, contact your
dealer.
7-6      Infotainment System

RDS Messages                           4 (Information):     If the current     TRAF (Traffic): TA (traffic) displays
                                       station has a message, INFO             when the station broadcasts traffic
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or
                                                                               announcements.
national emergencies. When an          displays. Press 4 to see the
alert announcement comes on the        message. The message can display        Press TRAF and the radio seeks
current radio station, ALERT!          the artist, song title, call in phone   to a station that broadcasts traffic
displays. The announcement is          numbers, etc.                           announcements. When a station is
heard, even if the volume is low                                               found, the radio stops seeking and
                                       If the entire message is not
or a CD is playing. If a CD is                                                 TA displays. NO TRAFFIC INFO
                                       displayed, parts of the message
playing, play stops during the                                                 displays if a station that broadcasts
                                       appears every three seconds. To
announcement. Alert                                                            traffic announcements cannot be
                                       scroll through the message, press
announcements cannot be                                                        found.
turned off.                            and release 4. A new group of
                                       words displays after every press        Press TRAF to turn off the traffic
ALERT! is not affected by tests of     of the button. Once the complete        announcements if TA is on the
the emergency broadcast system.        message has displayed, INFO             display.
This feature is not supported by all   disappears from the display until       The radio plays the traffic
RDS stations.                          another new message is received.        announcement even if the volume
                                       The last message can be displayed       is low. The radio interrupts the play
                                       by pressing this button. The last       of a CD if the last tuned station
                                       message is displayed until a new        broadcasts traffic announcements.
                                       message is received or the radio is
                                                                               This function does not apply to XM
                                       tuned to a different station.
                                                                               Satellite Radio Service.
                                       NO INFO displays when a message
                                       is not available from a station.
                                                                               Infotainment System              7-7

Finding a Station                       To scan preset stations:               Storing Radio Stations
BAND: Press to switch between           Press and hold © or ¨ for              Drivers are encouraged to store
FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.              four seconds until PRESET SCAN         radio station while the vehicle is
O /e (Tune): Turn to select radio       displays. The radio goes to the        parked. See Defensive Driving on
stations.                               next preset station, plays for a few   page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio
                                        seconds, then goes to the next         stations using the presets, favorites
© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the           preset station. Press © or ¨ again     button, and steering wheel controls,
previous or to the next station and                                            if the vehicle has this feature.
stay there.                             or press one of the pushbuttons to
                                        stop scanning presets.                 Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
The radio only stops at stations with                                          and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2),
a strong signal.                        The radio only scans stations with
                                                                               and equalization settings for each
                                        a strong signal.
© SCAN ¨ :    Press and hold © or ¨                                            station can be programmed on the
for two seconds until FREQUENCY         1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons):              six numbered pushbuttons.
SCAN displays. The radio goes to        Press to play stations that are
                                                                               To set presets:
a station, plays for a few seconds,     programmed to the radio preset
then goes on to the next station.       pushbuttons.                           1. Tune to a radio station.
Press © or ¨ again to stop scanning.                                           2. Press AUTO EQ to select the
                                                                                  equalization.
                                                                               3. Press and hold one of the six
                                                                                  numbered pushbuttons until the
                                                                                  radio beeps once.
                                                                               4. Repeat the steps for each
                                                                                  pushbutton.
7-8      Infotainment System

Satellite Radio                         t SEEK u : Press to go to the          Finding a Category (CAT)
                                        previous or to the next XM channel.    Station
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
                                        t SCAN u : Press and hold t or         To select an XM station by category:
XM is a satellite radio service based   u for two seconds until
in the 48 contiguous United States                                             1. Press the CAT button. The last
                                        FREQUENCY SCAN displays. The              selected category displays.
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM           radio goes to a channel, plays for
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of   a few seconds, then goes on to the     2. Turn the O /    e knob to select
programming and commercial-free
                                        next station. Press t or u again          a category.
music, coast to coast, and in
                                        to stop scanning.
digital-quality sound. A service fee                                           3. Press t or u to go to a
is required to receive the XM           To scan preset stations:                  category's station. SEEKING
service. If XM Service needs to be                                                CATEGORY displays.
reactivated, the radio will display     Press and hold t or u for
                                        four seconds until PRESET SCAN         4. To go to another station within
"No Subscription Please Renew" on
                                        displays. The radio goes to the           that category, press the CAT
channel XM1. For more information,
                                        next preset station, plays for a few      button to display the category,
contact XM at www.xmradio.com or
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., and         seconds, then goes to the next            then press t or u to go to
www.xmradio.ca or                       preset station. Press t or u again        another station.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.               or press one of the pushbuttons to     If the radio cannot find the desired
                                        stop scanning presets.                 category, NONE displays and the
Finding an XM Channel
                                        1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons):              radio returns to the last station
BAND: Press to switch between           Press to play channels that are        tuned.
FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2.              programmed to the radio preset
O /e (Tune): Turn to manually           pushbuttons.
select an XM channel.
                                                                              Infotainment System                7-9

SCAN: To scan the stations within     Storing XM Channels                     XM Radio Messages
a category:
                                      Drivers are encouraged to store         XL (Explicit Language
1. Press CAT. The last selected       XM channels while the vehicle is        Channels): These channels, or any
   category displays.                 parked. See Defensive Driving on        others, can be blocked by calling
                                      page 9‑2. Tune to stored radio          1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
2. Turn the O /   e knob to select    stations using the presets, favorites   1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
   a category.                        button, and steering wheel controls,    Updating: The encryption code in
3. Press and hold t or u until a      if the vehicle has this feature.        the receiver is being updated, and
   beep sounds and SCAN               Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,    no action is required. This process
   CATEGORY displays. The radio       and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2),       should take no longer than
   begins scanning the stations in    and equalization settings for each      30 seconds.
   the category.                      station can be programmed on the        No Signal: The system is
                                      six numbered pushbuttons.
4. Press   t or u to stop scanning.                                           functioning correctly, but the vehicle
                                      To set presets:                         is in a location that is blocking the
                                      1. Tune to a channel.                   XM signal. When the vehicle is
                                                                              moved into an open area, the signal
                                      2. Press AUTO EQ to select the          should return.
                                         equalization.
                                                                              Loading XM: The audio system is
                                      3. Press and hold one of the six        acquiring and processing audio and
                                         numbered pushbuttons until           text data. No action is needed. This
                                         the radio beeps once.                message should disappear shortly.
                                      4. Repeat the steps for each            CH Off Air: This channel is not
                                         pushbutton.                          currently in service. Tune in to
                                                                              another channel.
7-10      Infotainment System

CH Unauth: This channel is             XM Locked: The XM receiver in            Radio Reception
blocked or cannot be received with     the vehicle may have previously
your XM Subscription package.          been in another vehicle. For security    Frequency interference and static
                                       purposes, XM receivers cannot be         can occur during normal radio
CH Unavail: This previously                                                     reception if items such as cell phone
assigned channel is no longer          swapped between vehicles. If this
                                       message is received after having         chargers, vehicle convenience
assigned. Tune to another station.                                              accessories, and external electronic
If this station was one of the         the vehicle serviced, check with
                                       your dealer.                             devices are plugged into the
presets, choose another station                                                 accessory power outlet. If there is
for that preset button.                Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this    interference or static, unplug the
No Info: No artist, song title,        message will alternate with the XM       item from the accessory power
category, or text information is       Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This   outlet.
available at this time on this         label is needed to activate the
channel. The system is working         service.                                 AM
properly.                              Unknown: If this message is              The range for most AM stations
                                       received when tuned to channel 0,        is greater than for FM, especially
No Subscription Please Renew:
                                       there may be a receiver fault.           at night. The longer range can
XM subscription needs to be
reactivated. Contact XM at             Consult with your dealer.                cause station frequencies to
                                                                                interfere with each other. For better
www.xmradio.com or call                Chk XMRcvr: If this message does
                                                                                radio reception, most AM radio
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.             not clear within a short period of
and www.xmradio.ca or call             time, the receiver may have a fault.     stations boost the power levels
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.              Consult with your dealer.                during the day, and then reduce
                                                                                these levels during the night. Static
Not Found: There are no channels                                                can also occur when things like
available for the selected category.                                            storms and power lines interfere
The system is working properly.                                                 with radio reception. When this
                                                                                happens, try reducing the treble on
                                                                                the radio.
                                                                                   Infotainment System                 7-11

FM Stereo                                 This interference may occur when          Audio Players
                                          making or receiving phone calls,
FM signals only reach about
                                          charging the phone's battery,
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although
                                          or simply having the phone on. This       CD Player
the radio has a built-in electronic
                                          interference causes an increased          Care of the CD Player
circuit that automatically works to
                                          level of static while listening to the
reduce interference, some static                                                    Do not add labels to a CD; it could
                                          radio. If static is received while
can occur, especially around tall                                                   get caught in the CD player. Use a
                                          listening to the radio, unplug the
buildings or hills, causing the sound                                               marking pen to write on the top of
                                          cellular phone and turn it off.
to fade in and out.                                                                 the CD if a description is needed.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service               Diversity Antenna System                  Do not use CD lens cleaners, they
XM Satellite Radio Service gives          The AM-FM antenna is a hidden             could damage the CD player.
digital radio reception from coast to     self‐tuning system. It optimizes the      Notice: If a label is added to a
coast in the 48 contiguous United         AM and FM signals relative to the         CD, more than one CD is inserted
States, and in Canada. Just as            vehicle's position and radio station      into the slot at a time, or an
with FM, tall buildings or hills can      source. No maintenance or                 attempt is made to play scratched
interfere with satellite radio signals,   adjustments are needed.                   or damaged CDs, the CD player
causing the sound to fade in and                                                    could be damaged. While using
out. In addition, traveling or standing   Satellite Radio Antenna                   the CD player, use only CDs in
under heavy foliage, bridges,                                                       good condition without any label,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss        For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio      load one CD at a time, and keep
of the XM signal for a period of time.    Service, the antenna is located on        the CD player and the loading slot
                                          the roof or on the trunk lid of the       free of foreign materials, liquids,
Cellular Phone Usage                      vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of        and debris.
Cellular phone usage may cause            obstructions for clear radio
                                          reception.                                If an error displays, see “CD
interference with the vehicle's radio.                                              Messages” later in this section.
7-12      Infotainment System

Care of CDs                             Using the CD Player                     Six-Disc CD Radio:
Store CDs in their original cases or    The CD player can play smaller          If more than one CD has been
other protective cases and away         8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an          loaded, a number for each CD
from direct sunlight and dust. The      adapter ring.                           displays.
CD player scans the bottom of           A CD in the player stays in the         M (Load):  Press to load CDs into
the disc. If the bottom of a CD is      player when the ignition is turned      the CD player.
damaged it may not play properly or     off. When the ignition or radio is
at all. Do not touch the bottom of a                                            To insert one CD:
                                        turned on, the CD starts to play
CD while handling it. Pick up CDs       where it stopped, if it was the last    1. Press   M.
by grasping the outer edges or the      selected audio source.
edge of the hole and the outer edge.                                            2. Load a CD and insert the CD
                                        Loading a CD                               partway into the slot, label side
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take
                                                                                   up when INSERT CD # displays.
a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen a     Single CD Radio:
                                                                                   The player pulls the CD in.
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral    Insert the CD partway into the slot,
detergent solution mixed with water,                                            To insert multiple CDs:
                                        label side up, until the player pulls
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
                                        the CD in. The CD begins playing        1. Press and hold M for
                                        automatically.                             two seconds. Two beeps sound
the edge.
                                        The CD symbol displays when a CD           and LOAD ALL DISCS displays.
                                        is inserted, and the track number       2. Load a CD and insert the CD
                                        displays when each new track starts        partway into the slot, label side
                                        to play.                                   up when INSERT CD # displays.
                                                                                   The player pulls the CD in.
                                                                                3. Wait for INSERT CD # to display
                                                                                   after the previous CD is loaded,
                                                                                   then load the next CD. The CD
                                                                                   player takes up to six CDs.
                                                                                   Infotainment System            7-13

To load more than one CD but                © SCAN ¨ :    To scan one CD,           CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
less than six, complete Steps 1             press and hold either arrow for         a CD when listening to the radio.
through 3. When finished loading            more than two seconds until SCAN        CD displays when a CD is in the
CDs, press M to cancel the loading          displays and a beep sounds. The         player. If your system has a remote
function. The radio begins to play          radio goes to the next track, plays     playback device, pressing this
the last CD loaded.                         for 10 seconds, then goes to the        button a second time allows the
                                            next track. Press either arrow again    remote device to play.
Playing a CD                                to stop scanning.                       Z (Eject):   Press to eject a CD
O /e (Tune):     Turn to go to the          To scan all loaded CDs, press and       from the Single CD Radio and the
next or previous track.                     hold either arrow for more than         Six‐Disc CD Radio.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold to              four seconds until SCAN displays        Single CD Radio: Press   Z to
reverse within the current track.           and a beep sounds. Use this feature
                                                                                    eject a CD.
                                            to listen to 10 seconds of the first
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold            track of each loaded CD. Press          Six-Disc CD Radio:
to fast forward through the current         either arrow again to stop scanning.
track.                                                                              Press Z to eject the CD that is
                                            AUTO EQ (Automatic                      currently playing.
© SEEK ¨ :     Press the left arrow         Equalization): Press to select the
to go to the start of the current track     equalization setting while playing      To eject multiple CDs:
if more than eight seconds have             a CD. The equalization is stored
played. Press the right arrow to go                                                 1. Press and hold Z for
                                            when a CD is played. For more              two seconds. A beep sounds
to the start of the next track. If either   information on AUTO EQ, see
arrow is held or pressed more than                                                     and EJECT ALL displays.
                                            “AUTO EQ” listed previously in this
once, the player continues moving           section.                                2. The ejected CD can be removed
backward or forward through                                                            when REMOVE DISC displays.
the CD.                                     BAND: Press to listen to the radio
                                            when a CD is playing. The inactive         To stop ejecting the CDs, press
                                            CD(s) remains inside the radio for         M or Z.
                                            future listening.
7-14      Infotainment System

The CD is automatically pulled          Six-Disc CD Radio:
                                                                               .   Press and release RDM until
back into the player if the CD is not                                              RANDOM ALL DISCS displays
                                        .   Press RPT until REPEAT                 to play the tracks on all of the
removed after 25 seconds. Pushing           displays to repeat a track.
a CD back into the player before the                                               CDs that are loaded in random
25‐second time period is complete       .   Press RPT until REPEAT ONE             order.
causes the player to sense an error,        DISC displays to repeat an         .   Press and release RDM until
the CD player tries to eject the CD         entire CD.                             RANDOM OFF displays to turn
several times before stopping.          .   Press RPT until REPEAT OFF             off random play.
Wait for the timer to expire before         displays to turn off repeat.       R (Song List):   The Song List
pressing Z again. Pressing Z            RDM (Random): Press to hear the        feature can save 20 track selections.
repeatedly after trying to push a CD    tracks in random, rather than          To save tracks:
in manually causes the CD player's      sequential order, on one CD or all
25-second eject timer to reset.         of the loaded CDs.                     1. If S-LIST is displayed,
                                        Single CD Radio:                          press R to turn it off.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a
track or an entire CD over again.       Press and release RDM until            2. Select the desired CD by
Single CD Radio:                        RANDOM DISC PLAY displays.                pressing the numbered
                                        Press and release RDM until               pushbutton and then use ¨ or
Press RPT to hear a track over
again; REPEAT displays. Press           RANDOM OFF displays to turn off           O / e knob to select the track
                                        random play.                              to be saved.
again to turn off repeat; REPEAT
OFF displays.                           Six-Disc CD Radio:                     3. Press and hold R until a beep
                                        .   Press and release RDM until           sounds and ADDED SONG
                                            RANDOM DISC PLAY displays             displays.
                                            to play the tracks on one CD in    4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to save
                                            random order. Once all tracks on      other selections.
                                            this disc have played, RANDOM
                                            DISC PLAY will repeat.
                                                                               Infotainment System              7-15

SONGLIST FULL displays if more         To delete the entire song list:          Supported File Structure
than 20 selections are stored.                                                  Radios with the MP3 feature support
                                       1. Press R to turn song list on.
To play tracks:                           S-LIST displays.                      up to:
1. Press R. One beep sounds and
                                                                                .   50 folders
                                       2. Press and hold R for more than
   S-LIST displays. The recorded          four seconds. One beep sounds         .   11 folders in depth
   tracks begin to play in the order      and SONGLIST EMPTY displays
   they were saved.
                                                                                .   50 playlists
                                          to confirm that the song list has     .
                                          been deleted.                             255 files
2. Press © or ¨ to go back or
   forward within the saved tracks.    If a CD is ejected, and the song list
                                                                                .   10 sessions
To delete tracks:                      contains saved tracks from that CD,      Root Directory:
                                       those tracks are automatically
                                                                                The root directory is treated as a
1. Press R to turn song list on.       deleted from the song list. Any
                                                                                folder. Files are stored in the root
   S-LIST displays.                    tracks saved to the song list again
                                                                                directory when the disc or storage
                                       are added to the bottom of the list.
2. Press © or ¨, and use                                                        device does not contain folders.
                                       To end song list mode,                   Files accessed from the root
   the O / e knob to select the
                                       press R. One beep sounds and             directory display as F1 ROOT.
   desired track to be deleted.
                                       S-LIST is removed from the display.      Empty Folder:
3. Press and hold R until SONG
                                       MP3 Format                               Folders that do not contain files are
   REMOVED displays.
                                       Radios with the MP3 feature can          skipped, and the player advances to
After a track has been deleted, the                                             the next folder that contains files.
                                       only play CD-R discs. Do not mix
remaining tracks are moved up the
                                       standard audio and MP3 files on the
list. When another track is added to
                                       same disc.
the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
7-16        Infotainment System

Supported Bit Rates                     Playing an MP3                           { (Previous Folder):       Press to
The following bit rates are             Insert a CD partway into the slot,       go to the first track in the previous
supported: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,            label side up. The player pulls it in,   folder. Press and hold to reverse
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,     and READING displays. The CD             through the current track.
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps,           should begin playing and the CD          | (Next Folder): Press to go to
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and       symbol displays.                         the first track in the next folder.
320 kbps or a variable bit rate.                                                 Press and hold to fast forward the
                                        If the ignition or radio is turned off
File Naming                             with a CD-R in the player, it stays      current track.
                                        in the player. When the ignition or      RDM (Random): Press to hear
ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags are
                                        radio is turned on, the CD-R starts      the tracks in random, rather than
supported. The track name
                                        to play where it stopped, if it was      sequential order, on one CD, one
contained in the ID3 tag is shown
                                        the last selected audio source.          folder, or all of the loaded CDs.
on the display. The display only
shows up to 32 characters for track     As each new track starts to play,        Press and release RDM until:
and file names.                         the track number displays.               .   RANDOM DISC PLAY displays
If the track name is not contained in   Order of Play                                to play the tracks on the CD in
the ID3 tag, the display shows the                                                   random order.
                                        Tracks are played sequentially in
file name without the file extension.
                                        the following order:                     .   RANDOM FOLDER displays to
Playlists                               1. Playlists.                                play the tracks in the folder in
                                                                                     random order.
Playlists that do not have a .m3u       2. Files contained in the root
or .wpl extension may not work.            directory.
                                                                                 .   RANDOM ALL DISCS displays
                                                                                     to play the tracks on all of the
Preprogrammed playlists created by      3. Files contained in folders.               CDs that are loaded in random
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
                                        O /e (Tune): Turn to go to the               order.
Jukebox™ software are supported
and cannot be edited using the          next or previous track.                  .   RANDOM OFF displays to turn
radio.                                                                               off random play.
                                                                                 Infotainment System               7-17

RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a         BAND: Press to listen to the radio          Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
track, CD, or folder over again.      when a CD is playing. The inactive          the radio’s front auxiliary input jack
Press and release RPT until:          CD remains inside the radio for             to use a portable audio player. The
                                      future listening.                           radio displays AUX INPUT DEVICE
.   REPEAT displays to repeat a                                                   when a device is connected and
    track.                            CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play
                                      a CD when listening to the radio.           begins playing audio from that
.   REPEAT ONE DISC displays to       The CD symbol displays when a CD            device.
    repeat a CD.                      is loaded.                                  Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn
.   REPEAT FOLDER displays to                                                     to increase or decrease the volume
    repeat a folder.                  Auxiliary Devices                           of the portable player. Additional
                                                                                  volume adjustments can be made
.   REPEAT OFF displays to turn off   Using the Auxiliary Input Jack              from the portable device.
    repeated play.
                                      The radio system has an auxiliary           BAND: Press to listen to the radio
© SEEK ¨ :    Press © to go to the    input jack located on the right side        while a portable audio device is
start of the current track, if more   of the faceplate. This is not an audio      playing. The portable audio device
than eight seconds have played.       output; do not plug the headphone           continues playing.
Press ¨ to go to the next track.      set into the front auxiliary input jack.
                                                                                  CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
Press © or ¨ more than once to        An external audio device can be
                                                                                  play a CD while a portable audio
continue moving backward or           connected to the auxiliary input jack
                                                                                  device is playing. Press again and
forward through the CD.               for use as another source for audio
                                                                                  the system begins playing audio
                                      listening.
4 (Information):  Press to display                                                from the connected portable audio
the artist name and album contained   Drivers are encouraged to set up            player. If a portable audio player is
in the ID3 tag.                       any auxiliary device while the              connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE
                                      vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive       displays. If a portable audio player
                                      Driving on page 9‑2.                        is not connected, AUX INPUT
                                                                                  DEVICE does not display.
7-18       Infotainment System
                                        .     Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.   Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
Phone                                         The system may not work with         can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
                                              all cell phones. See “Pairing a      phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
Bluetooth                                     Phone” in this section for more      make and receive phone calls. The
For vehicles equipped with                    information.                         system can be used while the key is
Bluetooth‐capability, the system        .     If the cell phone has voice          in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
can interact with many cell phones,           dialing capability, learn to use     position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing:                                     that feature to access the           system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
                                              address book or contact list.        Not all phones support all functions,
.   Placement and receipt of calls                                                 and not all phones are guaranteed
    in a hands-free mode.                     See “Voice Pass-Thru” in this
                                              section for more information.        to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
.   Sharing of the cell phone’s                                                    system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth
    address book or contact list
                                        .     See “Storing and Deleting Phone      for more information on compatible
    with the vehicle.                         Numbers” in this section for         phones.
                                              more information.
To minimize driver distraction,                                                    Voice Recognition
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
                                                     { WARNING                     The Bluetooth system uses voice
                                                                                   recognition to interpret voice
.   Become familiar with the                When using a cell phone, it            commands to dial phone numbers
    features of the cell phone.             can be distracting to look too         and name tags.
    Organize the phone book and             long or too often at the screen of
    contact lists clearly and delete        the phone or the infotainment          For additional information say “Help”
    duplicate or rarely used entries.       (navigation) system. Taking your       while you are in a voice
    If possible, program speed dial         eyes off the road too long or          recognition menu.
    or other shortcuts.                     too often could cause a crash
.   Review the controls and                 resulting in injury or death. Focus
    operation of the infotainment           your attention on driving.
    system.
                                                                               Infotainment System              7-19

Noise: Keep interior noise levels       Bluetooth Controls                      Pairing Information
to a minimum. The system may not                                                .   Up to five cell phones can be
                                        Use the buttons located on the
recognize voice commands if there                                                   paired to the Bluetooth system.
                                        steering wheel to operate the
is too much background noise.
                                        in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See        .   The pairing process is disabled
When to Speak: A short tone             Steering Wheel Controls on                  when the vehicle is moving.
sounds after the system responds        page 5‑3 for more information.
indicating when it is waiting for a                                             .   Pairing only needs to be
voice command. Wait until the tone
                                        b g (Push To Talk):   Press to              completed once, unless the
                                        answer incoming calls, to confirm           pairing information on the cell
and then speak.
                                        system information, and to start            phone changes or the cell phone
How to Speak: Speak clearly in          speech recognition.                         is deleted from the system.
a calm and natural voice.
                                        c (Phone On Hook): Press to             .   Only one paired cell phone can
Audio System                            end a call, reject a call, or cancel        be connected to the Bluetooth
                                        an operation.                               system at a time.
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through the         Pairing                                 .   If multiple paired cell phones
vehicle's front audio system                                                        are within range of the system,
                                        A Bluetooth cell phone must be
speakers and overrides the audio                                                    the system connects to the first
                                        paired to the Bluetooth system and
system. Use the audio system                                                        available paired cell phone in the
                                        then connected to the vehicle before
volume knob, during a call, to                                                      order that they were first paired
                                        it can be used. See your cell phone
change the volume level. The                                                        to the system. To link to a
                                        manufacturer's user guide for
adjusted volume level remains in                                                    different paired phone, see
                                        Bluetooth functions before pairing
memory for later calls. To prevent                                                  “Connecting to a Different
                                        the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
missed calls, a minimum volume                                                      Phone” later in this section.
                                        is not connected, calls will be made
level is used if the volume is turned
                                        using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
down too low.
                                        if available. Refer to the OnStar
                                        owner's guide for more information.
7-20      Infotainment System

Pairing a Phone                            After the PIN is successfully          Deleting a Paired Phone
                                           entered, the system prompts you
1. Press and hold   b g for                to provide a name for the paired
                                                                                  If the phone name you want to
   two seconds.                                                                   delete is unknown, see “Listing All
                                           cell phone. This name will be          Paired and Connected Phones.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.”                        used to indicate which phones
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
                                           are paired and connected to the        1. Press and hold   b g for
                                           vehicle, see “Listing All Paired          two seconds.
   with instructions and a four‐digit      and Connected Phones” later in
   Personal Identification Number          this section for more information.     2. Say “Bluetooth.”
   (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.                                              3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
                                        6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
4. Start the pairing process on the        additional phones.                        for which phone to delete.
   cell phone that you want to pair.                                              4. Say the name of the phone you
   For help with this process, see      Listing All Paired and Connected             want to delete.
   your cell phone manufacturers        Phones
   user guide.                          The system can list all cell phones       Connecting to a Different Phone
5. Locate the device named “Your        paired to it. If a paired cell phone is   To connect to a different cell phone,
   Vehicle” in the list on the cell     also connected to the vehicle, the        the Bluetooth system looks for the
   phone. Follow the instructions       system responds with “is connected”       next available cell phone in the
   on the cell phone to enter the       after that phone name.                    order in which all the available cell
   PIN that was provided in Step 3.                                               phones were paired. Depending
                                        1. Press and hold   b g for               on which cell phone you want to
                                           two seconds.                           connect to, you may have to use
                                        2. Say “Bluetooth.”                       this command several times.
                                        3. Say “List.”                            1. Press and hold   b g for
                                                                                     two seconds.
                                                                                  2. Say “Bluetooth.”
                                                                               Infotainment System               7-21

3. Say “Change phone.”                 Digit Store: This command allows         Using the “Digit Store” Command
   .    If another cell phone is       a phone number to be stored as a         If an unwanted number is
        found, the response will be    name tag by entering the digits one      recognized by the system, say
        “<Phone name> is now           at a time.                               “Clear” at any time to clear the last
        connected.”                    Delete: This command is used to          number.
   .    If another cell phone is not   delete individual name tags.             To hear all of the numbers
        found, the original phone      Delete All Name Tags: This               recognized by the system, say
        remains connected.             command deletes all stored               “Verify” at any time.
                                       name tags in the Hands‐Free
Storing and Deleting Phone             Calling Directory and the OnStar         1. Press and hold   b g for
Numbers                                Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.        two seconds.
The system can store up to             Using the “Store” Command                2. Say “Digit Store.”
30 phone numbers as name tags                                                   3. Say each digit, one at a time,
in the Hands‐Free Directory that is    1. Press and hold   b g for                 that you want to store. After
shared between the Bluetooth and          two seconds.                             each digit is entered, the system
OnStar systems.                                                                    repeats back the digit it heard
                                       2. Say “Store.”
The following commands are used                                                    followed by a tone. After the
                                       3. Say the phone number or group            last digit has been entered, say
delete and store phone numbers.
                                          of numbers you want to store all         “Store”, and then follow the
Store: This command will store            at once with no pauses, then             directions given by the system
a phone number, or a group of             follow the directions given by the       to save a name tag for this
numbers as a name tag.                    system to save a name tag for            number.
                                          this number.
7-22       Infotainment System

Using the “Delete” Command             Using the “List” Command                Using the “Dial” or “Call”
                                                                               Command
1. Press and hold   b g for            1. Press and hold     b g for
   two seconds.                           two seconds.                         1. Press and hold   b g for
2. Say “Delete.”                       2. Say “Directory.”                        two seconds.

3. Say the name tag you want to        3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”            2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
   delete.                             4. Say “List.”                          3. Say the entire number without
                                                                                  pausing or say the name tag.
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
                                       Making a Call                           Once connected, the person called
                                       Calls can be made using the             will be heard through the audio
This command deletes all stored                                                speakers.
                                       following commands.
name tags in the Hands‐Free
Calling Directory and the OnStar       Dial or Call: The dial or               Using the “Digit Dial” Command
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.   call command can be used
                                                                               The digit dial command allows a
                                       interchangeably to dial a phone
To delete all name tags:                                                       phone number to be dialed by
                                       number or a stored name tag.
                                                                               entering the digits one at a time.
1. Press and hold   b g for            Digit Dial: This command allows         After each digit is entered, the
   two seconds.                        a phone number to be dialed by          system repeats back the digit it
2. Say “Delete all name tags.”         entering the digits one at a time.      heard followed by a tone.
Listing Stored Numbers                 Re‐dial: This command is used to        If an unwanted number is
                                       dial the last number used on the cell   recognized by the system, say
The list command will list all the     phone.                                  “Clear” at any time to clear the
stored numbers and name tags.                                                  last number.
                                                                                  Infotainment System                 7-23

To hear all of the numbers              Receiving a Call                           Three‐Way Calling
recognized by the system, say
                                        When an incoming call is received,         Three‐way calling must be
“Verify” at any time.
                                        the audio system mutes and a ring          supported on the cell phone and
1. Press and hold      b g for          tone is heard in the vehicle.              enabled by the wireless service
   two seconds.                                                                    carrier.
                                        .   Press b g to answer the call.
2. Say “Digit Dial.”                                                               1. While on a call, press   b g.
                                        .   Press i to ignore a call.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,                                                  2. Say “Three‐way call.”
   that you want to dial. After each    Call Waiting                               3. Use the dial or call command to
   digit is entered, the system
                                        Call waiting must be supported on             dial the number of the third party
   repeats back the digit it heard
                                        the cell phone and enabled by the             to be called.
   followed by a tone. After the last
                                        wireless service carrier.
   digit has been entered,                                                         4. Once the call is connected,
   say “Dial.”                          .   Press b g to answer an                    press b g to link all the callers
Once connected, the person called           incoming call when another call           together.
will be heard through the audio             is active. The original call is
                                            placed on hold.                        Ending a Call
speakers.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command             .   Press b g again to return to the       Press   i to end a call.
                                            original call.
1. Press and hold      b g for
   two seconds.
                                        .   To ignore the incoming call, no
                                            action is required.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
                                        .   Press i to disconnect the
Once connected, the person called
                                            current call and switch to the call
will be heard through the audio
                                            on hold.
speakers.
7-24      Infotainment System

Muting a Call                           To Transfer Audio from the               Voice Pass-Thru
                                        Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call, all sounds from inside                                            Voice pass‐thru allows access to
the vehicle can be muted so that the    During a call with the audio in the      the voice recognition commands on
person on the other end of the call     vehicle:                                 the cell phone. See your cell phone
cannot hear them.                                                                manufacturer's user guide to see if
                                        1. Press   b g.                          the cell phone supports this feature.
To mute a call, press   b g and then    2. Say “Transfer Call.”
say “Mute Call.”                                                                 To access contacts stored in the cell
                                        To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth       phone:
To cancel mute, press b    g and        System from a Cell Phone
then say “Un‐mute Call.”                                                         1. Press and hold   b g for
                                        During a call with the audio on the         two seconds.
Transferring a Call                     cell phone, press b g. The audio         2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
Audio can be transferred between        transfers to the vehicle. If the audio      responds “Bluetooth ready”,
the Bluetooth system and the cell       does not transfer to the vehicle, use       followed by a tone.
phone.                                  the audio transfer feature on the
                                        cell phone. See your cell phone          3. Say “Voice.” The system
The cell phone must be paired           manufacturer's user guide for more          responds “OK, accessing
and connected with the Bluetooth        information.                                <phone name>.”
system before a call can be
                                                                                    The cell phone's normal prompt
transferred. The connection process
                                                                                    messages will go through its
can take up to two minutes after the
                                                                                    cycle according to the phone's
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
                                                                                    operating instructions.
                                                                             Infotainment System   7-25

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency           Clearing the System
(DTMF) Tones                        Unless information is deleted out
The Bluetooth system can send       of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,
numbers and the numbers stored      it will be retained indefinitely. This
as name tags during a call. You     includes all saved name tags in
can use this feature when calling   the phone book and phone pairing
a menu‐driven phone system.         information. For information on how
Account numbers can also be         to delete this information, see the
stored for use.                     previous sections on “Deleting a
                                    Paired Phone” and “Storing and
Sending a Number or Name Tag        Deleting Phone Numbers.”
During a Call
                                    Other Information
1. Press b g. The system
   responds “Ready”, followed by    The Bluetooth® word mark and
   a tone.                          logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
                                    SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
2. Say “Dial.”                      by General Motors is under license.
3. Say the number or name tag       Other trademarks and trade names
   to send.                         are those of their respective owners.
                                    See Radio Frequency Statement on
                                    page 13‑19 for FCC information.
7-26   Infotainment System

                             2 NOTES
                                                                                                               Climate Controls              8-1

Climate Controls                                                 Climate Control Systems
                                                                 Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems                                          With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
 Dual Automatic Climate Control
  System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents
 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
 Passenger Compartment Air
  Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7




                                                                 A. Driver Temperature Controls           F.   Air Conditioning
                                                                 B. Display                               G. Fan Control
                                                                 C. Passenger Temperature Control         H. Air Delivery Mode Control
                                                                 D. AUTO                                  I.   Defrost
                                                                 E. Recirculation                         J.   Rear Window Defogger
8-2      Climate Controls

When the vehicle is first started,       After a 10 second display of the          vehicle until warmer air is
the display shows the driver's           current settings, the word AUTO,          available. The system starts out
temperature setting, the outside         the driver's temperature setting and      blowing air at the floor but may
temperature, the fan speed, and the      the outside temperature will be           change modes automatically as
air delivery, for about 10 seconds.      shown. The system operates to             the vehicle warms up to maintain
The outside temperature is shown         reach the set temperature as quickly      the chosen temperature setting.
in the center of the display. The        as possible. The AUTO control             The length of time needed for
digital display will show the readings   system works best with the windows        warm up depends on the outside
in Fahrenheit or Celsius. See            up and the removable roof installed       temperature and the length of
“Personal Options” under Vehicle         or the convertible top up.                time that has elapsed since the
Personalization on page 5‑55 for         1. Press the AUTO button.                 vehicle was last driven.
information on changing your             2. Adjust the temperature to a         3. Wait for the system to regulate.
display.                                    comfortable setting between            This may take from 10 to
                                            16°C (60°F) and 32°C (90°F).           30 minutes. Then adjust the
Automatic Operation                                                                temperature, if necessary.
                                            Choosing the coldest or warmest
AUTO (Automatic): Press the                 temperature setting will not        Do not cover the solar sensor
AUTO button to place the entire             cause the system to heat or cool    located in the center of the
system in the automatic mode.               any faster. A setting of 23°C       instrument panel, near the
When automatic operation is active,         (73°F) is suggested.                windshield. For more information
the system automatically controls                                               on the solar sensor, see “Sensors”
the inside temperature, the air             In cold weather, the system will
                                            start at reduced fan speeds to      later in this section.
delivery mode, and the fan speed.
                                            avoid blowing cold air into your
                                                                                      Climate Controls             8-3

Manual Operation                         Pressing the arrows will delete         To change the current mode, select
                                         AUTO from the digital display. The      one of the following:
Driver Power/Temperature: Press
                                         fan graphics with the fan speed bars    H (Vent): Air is directed to the
the driver temperature knob to turn
                                         will be shown. The AUTO button          instrument panel outlets, with some
the climate control system off. This
                                         must be pressed to return to the        air directed to the floor outlets.
is the only setting that completely
                                         automatic fan control.
shuts off the fan. The digital display                                           % (Bi-Level): Air is divided
shows only the outside temperature.      If the airflow seems low when the       between the instrument panel and
The driver and the passenger set         fan speed is at the highest setting,    floor outlets.
temperature and the air intake mode      the passenger compartment air filter
can still be adjusted when the           may need to be replaced. For more       6 (Floor):     Air is directed to the
climate control is off.                  information, see Passenger              floor outlets, with some air directed
                                         Compartment Air Filter on page 8‑7.     to the windshield and side window
Passenger Power/Temperature:                                                     defogger outlets.
Press the passenger temperature          N (Air Delivery Mode Control):
knob to turn the passenger's climate     Press this button to manually lock in   - (Floor/Defog):      This mode clears
control system on or off. Turn the       the current air delivery setting and    the windows of fog or moisture. Air
knob to increase or decrease the         to stop the automatic mode control.     is directed to the windshield and the
temperature for the passenger. If the    Pressing N deletes AUTO from the        floor outlets, with a small amount
passenger's climate control system       digital display and the mode            to the side window outlets. In this
is off, the driver's temperature knob    graphics will be shown. To change       mode, the system automatically
will control the temperature for the                                             turns off the recirculation and runs
                                         the setting, press N again. The         the air conditioning compressor
entire vehicle.
                                         AUTO button must be pressed to          unless the outside temperature is at
x 9 w (Fan):      Press to increase      return to the automatic mode            or below freezing. The recirculation
or decrease the fan speed. The fan       selection.                              mode cannot be selected while in
speed setting will appear in the                                                 the defog mode.
display.
8-4      Climate Controls

1 (Defrost): This mode clears the         ^ (Air Conditioning Off):              On hot days, open the windows to
windows of fog or frost more quickly.     Press to turn the air conditioning     let hot inside air escape; then close
Air is directed to the windshield, with   compressor off. Press AUTO to          them. This helps to reduce the time
a small amount directed to the side       return to automatic operation.         it takes for the vehicle to cool down.
window outlets. The indicator light       When in AUTO, the air conditioning     It also helps the system to operate
comes on and the digital display will     compressor comes on automatically,     more efficiently.
show the defrost mode symbol and          as needed.                             For quick cool down on hot
fan speed when the front defrost          Air conditioning does not operate      days press the AUTO button and
mode is being used. In this mode,         at temperatures below about 2°C to     adjust the temperature to a cool,
the system automatically turns off        4°C (35°F to 40°F). In temperatures    comfortable setting. To achieve
the recirculation and runs the air        above 4°C (40°F), the air              maximum cool down, do the
conditioning compressor, unless the       conditioning cannot be turned off      following:
outside temperature is at or below        in defrost and defog, as it helps to
freezing. Recirculation cannot be         remove moisture from the vehicle.
                                                                                 1. Select  H mode.
selected while in the defrost mode.       It also helps to keep the windows      2.   Press ?.
Pressing 1 again will return the          clear.
system to the last operating mode.                                               3. Select the a/c on.
                                          You may notice a slight change in
For severe ice conditions, turn the       engine performance when the air        4. Select the coolest temperature.
driver's temperature knob to 32°C         conditioning compressor shuts off      5. Select the highest fan speed.
(90°F) while in defrost mode.             and turns on again. This is normal.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the    The system is designed to make
windows are clear.                        adjustments to help with fuel
                                          economy while still maintaining the
                                          selected temperature.
                                                                                     Climate Controls             8-5

Using these settings together for       Sensors                                 If the outside temperature goes up,
long periods of time may cause the                                              the displayed temperature will not
                                        The solar sensor on the vehicle
air inside of your vehicle to become                                            change until:
                                        monitors the solar heat and uses
too dry. To prevent this from                                                   .   The vehicle's speed is above
                                        the information to maintain the
happening, after the air in the                                                     19 km/h (12 mph) for
                                        selected temperature when
vehicle has cooled, turn the                                                        five minutes.
                                        operating in AUTO mode by
recirculation mode off.
                                        automatically adjusting the             .   The vehicle's speed is above
The air conditioning system             temperature, fan speed, and air             52 km/h (32 mph) for two and
removes moisture from the air, so       delivery system. The system may             one‐half minutes.
a small amount of water might drip      also supply cooler air to the side
under the vehicle while idling or       of the vehicle facing the sun. The      These delays prevent false
after turning off the engine. This is   recirculation mode will also be         readings. If the temperature goes
normal.                                 activated, as necessary. Do not         down, the outside temperature
                                        cover the solar sensor located on       will be shown when you start the
? (Recirculation): Press to turn                                                vehicle. If it has been turned off
the recirculation mode on or off. An    the top of the instrument panel near
                                        the windshield or the system will       for less than three hours, the
indicator light comes on to show                                                temperature will be recalled from
that recirculation is on. This mode     not work properly.
                                                                                the previous vehicle operation.
prevents outside air from entering      There is also a sensor located
your vehicle. It can be used to         behind the front bumper. This           There is also an inside temperature
prevent outside air and odors from      sensor reads the outside air            sensor located to the left of the
entering your vehicle and to help       temperature and helps to maintain       ignition switch. The automatic
cool the air inside your vehicle more   the temperature inside the vehicle.     climate control system uses this
quickly. Recirculation mode is not      Any cover on the front of the vehicle   sensor to receive information, so if
available in defrost or defog mode.     could give a false reading in the       you block or cover it, the system will
                                        temperature.                            not function properly.
8-6     Climate Controls

Rear Window Defogger                   The vehicle has heated outside         Air Vents
                                       rearview mirrors. The mirrors will
The rear window defogger uses a                                               Use the tab located on the air
                                       heat to help clear fog or frost from
warming grid to remove fog or frost                                           outlets to change the direction of
                                       the surface of the mirrors when the
from the rear window.                                                         the airflow.
                                       rear window defogger button is
The rear window defogger only          pressed.
                                                                              Operation Tips
works when the engine is running.
                                       For vehicles with a power              .   Clear away any ice, snow,
= (Rear Window Defogger):              convertible top, the rear window
                                                                                  or leaves from the air inlets at
Press to turn the rear window          defogger and heated mirrors are
                                                                                  the base of the windshield that
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear   automatically disabled when the
                                                                                  may block the flow of air into
as much snow from the rear window      power convertible top is moving
                                                                                  your vehicle.
as possible. An indicator light        or down.
comes on to show that the rear                                                .   Use of non-GM approved hood
                                       Notice: Do not use anything
window defogger is on.                                                            deflectors may adversely affect
                                       sharp on the inside of the rear
                                                                                  the performance of the system.
The rear window defogger turns off     window. If you do, you could
about 10 minutes after the button      cut or damage the warming grid,        .   Keep the area around the base
is pressed when traveling less than    and the repairs would not be               of the instrument panel console
48 km/h (30 mph). If turned on         covered by the vehicle warranty.           and air path under the seats
again, the defogger only runs for      Do not attach a temporary vehicle          clear of objects to help circulate
about five minutes before turning      license, tape, a decal, or anything        the air inside of your vehicle
off. The defogger can also be turned   similar to the defogger grid.              more effectively.
off by turning off the engine.
                                                                                   Climate Controls            8-7

Maintenance                             The passenger compartment air
                                        filter is located on the passenger
                                        side of the engine compartment
Passenger Compartment                   near the battery. See Engine
Air Filter                              Compartment Overview on
                                        page 10‑10.
The passenger compartment air
filter removes certain particles from   To check or replace the air filter:
the air including pollen and dust
particles. Reductions in airflow,
which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter
may need to be replaced. See
Maintenance Replacement Parts on                                              3. Remove the filter and install the
page 11‑8.                                                                       new air filter.
Notice: Driving without a                                                     4. Replace the filter cover.
passenger compartment air filter
in place can cause water and                                                  5. Attach the retainer clips.
small particles, like paper and
leaves, to be pulled into your
climate control system which may
cause damage to it. Make sure           1. Remove the cover retainer
you always replace the old filter          clips (A) from the passenger
with a new one.                            compartment air filter cover.
                                        2. Remove the cover.
8-8   Climate Controls

                         2 NOTES
                                                                                                                         Driving and Operating                                 9-1

Driving and                                                     Shifting Into Park (Automatic
                                                                 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       9-24
                                                                                                                           Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39
                                                                                                                           Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-43
Operating                                                       Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
                                                                Parking (Manual
                                                                                                                 9-25      Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-43

                                                                 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       9-26     Cruise Control
                                                                Parking Over Things                                        Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Driving Information
 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2                 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   9-26     Fuel
 Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2           Engine Exhaust                                              Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3                 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26            Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-49
 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3      Running the Vehicle While                                  Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4      Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27      and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5                                                                             California Fuel
 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6           Automatic Transmission                                       Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
 Racing or Other Competitive                                    Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-28                      Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-50
   Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7    Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29           Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
 Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-9                                                                                Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10                   Manual Transmission                                         Filling a Portable Fuel
 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-10                         Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-32                    Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11           Brakes
 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13                                                                             Towing
                                                                Antilock Brake                                             General Towing
 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14                    System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34              Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Starting and Operating                                          Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .               9-18        Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36       Conversions and Add-Ons
 Front Air Dam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        9-19                                                                   Add-On Electrical
                                                               Ride Control Systems                                         Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .         9-20        Traction Control
 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .            9-21         System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
 Retained Accessory                                             Active Handling System . . . . . 9-37
   Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        9-23
9-2        Driving and Operating

Driving Information                         WARNING (Continued)
                                                                                Death and injury associated with
                                                                                drinking and driving is a global
                                                                                tragedy.
Defensive Driving                        Driver distraction can cause
                                         collisions resulting in injury or      Alcohol affects four things that
Defensive driving means “always                                                 anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
expect the unexpected.” The first        possible death. These simple
                                         defensive driving techniques           judgment, muscular coordination,
step in driving defensively is to wear                                          vision, and attentiveness.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on     could save your life.
page 3‑9.                                                                       Police records show that
                                                                                almost 40 percent of all motor
                                         Drunk Driving                          vehicle-related deaths involve
            { WARNING                                                           alcohol. In most cases, these
 Assume that other road users                     { WARNING                     deaths are the result of someone
                                                                                who was drinking and driving.
 (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other     Drinking and then driving is           In recent years, more than
 drivers) are going to be careless       very dangerous. Your reflexes,         17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
 and make mistakes. Anticipate           perceptions, attentiveness, and        deaths have been associated with
 what they might do and be ready.        judgment can be affected by even       the use of alcohol, with about
 In addition:                            a small amount of alcohol. You         250,000 people injured.
   .   Allow enough following            can have a serious — or even
       distance between you and          fatal — collision if you drive after
       the driver in front of you.       drinking.
   .   Focus on the task of driving.     Do not drink and drive or ride with
                         (Continued)     a driver who has been drinking.
                                         Ride home in a cab; or if you are
                                         with a group, designate a driver
                                         who will not drink.
                                                                               Driving and Operating                9-3

For persons under 21, it is against    Control of a Vehicle                     Average reaction time is about
the law in every U.S. state to drink                                            three‐fourths of a second. But
alcohol. There are good medical,       The following three systems              that is only an average. It might be
psychological, and developmental       help to control the vehicle while        less with one driver and as long as
reasons for these laws.                driving — brakes, steering, and          two or three seconds or more with
                                       accelerator. At times, as when           another. Age, physical condition,
The obvious way to eliminate the       driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
leading highway safety problem is                                               alertness, coordination, and
                                       ask more of those control systems        eyesight all play a part. So do
for people never to drink alcohol      than the tires and road can provide.
and then drive.                                                                 alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
                                       Meaning, you can lose control of         But even in three‐fourths of a
Medical research shows that            the vehicle. See Traction Control        second, a vehicle moving at
alcohol in a person's system           System (TCS) on page 9‑36 and            100 km/h (60 mph) travels
can make crash injuries worse,         Active Handling System on                20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot
especially injuries to the brain,      page 9‑37.                               of distance in an emergency, so
spinal cord, or heart. This means      Adding non‐dealer accessories can        keeping enough space between
that when anyone who has been          affect vehicle performance. See          the vehicle and others is important.
drinking — driver or passenger — is    Accessories and Modifications on
in a crash, that person's chance of                                             And, of course, actual stopping
                                       page 10‑4.                               distances vary greatly with the
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not                                            surface of the road, whether it is
been drinking.
                                       Braking                                  pavement or gravel; the condition
                                       See Brake System Warning Light on        of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
                                       page 5‑21.                               or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
                                                                                brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
                                       Braking action involves perception       and the amount of brake force
                                       time and reaction time. Deciding to      applied.
                                       push the brake pedal is perception
                                       time. Actually doing it is
                                       reaction time.
9-4      Driving and Operating

Avoid needless heavy braking.           Under certain weather or operating   Magnetic Speed Variable
Some people drive in spurts, heavy      conditions, occasional brake         Assist Steering System
acceleration followed by heavy          squeak, squeal, or other noise
braking, rather than keeping pace       might be heard with the vehicle's    This system continuously adjusts
with traffic. This is a mistake. The    performance braking system.          the effort felt when steering at all
brakes might not have time to cool      This brake system is designed        vehicle speeds. It provides ease
between hard stops. The brakes will     for superior fade resistance and     when parking, yet a firm, solid feel
wear out much faster with a lot of      consistent operation using high      at highway speeds.
heavy braking. Keeping pace with        performance brake pads. Brake        Steering Tips
the traffic and allowing realistic      noise and brake dust are normal
following distances eliminates a lot    and do not affect system             It is important to take curves at a
of unnecessary braking. That means      performance.                         reasonable speed.
better braking and longer brake life.   Adding non‐dealer accessories can    Traction in a curve depends on the
If the engine ever stops while          affect vehicle performance. See      condition of the tires and the road
the vehicle is being driven, brake      Accessories and Modifications on     surface, the angle at which the
normally but do not pump the            page 10‑4.                           curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,                                            While in a curve, speed is the one
the pedal could get harder to push      Steering                             factor that can be controlled.
down. If the engine stops, there will                                        If there is a need to reduce speed,
still be some power brake assist but    Power Steering                       do it before entering the curve, while
it will be used when the brake is       If power steering assist is lost     the front wheels are straight.
applied. Once the power assist is       because the engine stops or the
used up, it can take longer to stop                                          Try to adjust the speed so you can
                                        system is not functioning, the       drive through the curve. Maintain a
and the brake pedal will be harder      vehicle can be steered but it will
to push.                                                                     reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
                                        take more effort.                    accelerate until out of the curve, and
                                                                             then accelerate gently into the
                                                                             straightaway.
                                                                                Driving and Operating               9-5

Steering in Emergencies                                                          Off-Road Recovery
There are times when steering can                                                The vehicle's right wheels can drop
be more effective than braking. For                                              off the edge of a road onto the
example, you come over a hill and                                                shoulder while driving.
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for      An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around      close attention and a quick decision.
the problem.                          If holding the steering wheel at the
The vehicle can perform very well     recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
in emergencies like these. First      positions, it can be turned a full
apply the brakes. See Braking on      180 degrees very quickly without
                                      removing either hand. But you have         If the level of the shoulder is
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as                                              only slightly below the pavement,
much speed as possible from a         to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
                                      quickly straighten the wheel once          recovery should be fairly easy.
collision. Then steer around the                                                 Ease off the accelerator and
problem, to the left or right         you have avoided the object.
                                                                                 then, if there is nothing in the way,
depending on the space available.     The fact that such emergency               steer so that the vehicle straddles
                                      situations are always possible is a        the edge of the pavement.
                                      good reason to practice defensive
                                      driving at all times and wear safety
                                      belts properly.
9-6      Driving and Operating

Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm     Skidding                                  Of course, traction is reduced when
(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn,                                              water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
                                       In a skid, a driver can lose control
until the right front tire contacts                                              material is on the road. For safety,
                                       of the vehicle. Defensive drivers
the pavement edge. Then turn the                                                 slow down and adjust your driving
                                       avoid most skids by taking
steering wheel to go straight down                                               to these conditions. It is important
                                       reasonable care suited to existing
the roadway.                                                                     to slow down on slippery surfaces
                                       conditions, and by not overdriving
                                                                                 because stopping distance is longer
                                       those conditions. But skids are
Loss of Control                        always possible.
                                                                                 and vehicle control more limited.
Let us review what driving experts                                               While driving on a surface with
                                       The three types of skids correspond
say about what happens when the                                                  reduced traction, try to avoid
                                       to the vehicle's three control
three control systems — brakes,                                                  sudden steering, acceleration,
                                       systems. In the braking skid,
steering, and acceleration — do not                                              or braking, including reducing
                                       the wheels are not rolling. In the
have enough friction where the tires                                             vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
                                       steering or cornering skid, too much
meet the road to do what the driver                                              gear. Any sudden changes could
                                       speed or steering in a curve causes
has asked.                                                                       cause the tires to slide. You might
                                       tires to slip and lose cornering force.
                                                                                 not realize the surface is slippery
In any emergency, do not give up.      And in the acceleration skid, too
                                                                                 until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
Keep trying to steer and constantly    much throttle causes the driving
                                                                                 recognize warning clues — such as
seek an escape route or area of        wheels to spin.
                                                                                 enough water, ice, or packed snow
less danger.                           If the vehicle starts to slide, ease      on the road to make a mirrored
                                       your foot off the accelerator pedal       surface — and slow down when you
                                       and quickly steer the way you             have any doubt.
                                       want the vehicle to go. If you start
                                                                                 Remember: Antilock brakes help
                                       steering quickly enough, the vehicle
                                                                                 avoid only the braking skid.
                                       may straighten out. Always be ready
                                       for a second skid if it occurs.
                                                                            Driving and Operating              9-7

Racing or Other                        Except ZO6, ZR1, and Grand            ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only:
                                       Sport: Be sure to check the oil       For racing or competitive driving, it
Competitive Driving                    level often during racing or other    is recommended that the loading of
Racing or competitive driving may      competitive driving and keep the      the vehicle be limited to the driver
affect the vehicle warranty. See the   level at or near 1 L (1 qt) above     only, with no other cargo, and that
warranty book before using the         the upper mark that shows the         tires be inflated to 180 kPa (26 psi)
vehicle for racing or other            proper operating range on the         for a maximum speed of 230 km/h
competitive driving.                   engine oil dipstick. After the        (143 mph).
                                       competitive driving, remove           If the vehicle is a ZO6, ZR1,
Notice: If you use the vehicle
                                       excess oil so that the level on       or Grand Sport model, it has
for racing or other competitive
                                       the dipstick is not above the         greaseable outer ends on both of
driving, the engine may use more
                                       upper mark that shows the             the rear toe‐links. Under normal
oil than it would with normal use.
                                       proper operating range.               use, lubrication should be performed
Low oil levels can damage the
engine. For information on how         ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only:       as described in the maintenance
to add oil, see Engine Oil on          For racing or competitive driving,    schedule. See Scheduled
page 10‑15.                            it is recommended that the brake      Maintenance on page 11‑2 and
                                       fluid be replaced with a high         Recommended Fluids and
ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport Only:
                                       performance brake fluid that has      Lubricants on page 11‑6. If using
Be sure to check the oil level
                                       a dry boiling point greater than      the vehicle for racing, lubrication
often during racing or other
                                       279°C (534°F). After conversion to    should be performed at the end of
competitive driving and keep the
                                       the high performance brake fluid,     each racing day. See your dealer
level at or near the upper mark
                                       follow the brake fluid service        for lubrication and make sure any
that shows the proper operating
                                       recommendations outlined by the       needed repairs are made at once.
range on the engine oil dipstick.
                                       fluid manufacturer. Do not use        Proper procedures for performing
                                       silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids.       these services can be found in
                                                                             the service manual. See Service
                                                                             Publications Ordering Information
                                                                             on page 13‑15.
9-8      Driving and Operating

If the vehicle is used for racing or   When performed as instructed,         3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2,
other competitive driving, the rear    these procedures will not damage         five times. This should take
axle fluid temperatures may be         the brakes. During the burnishing        about 10 minutes.
higher than would occur in normal      procedure, the brake pads will        4. After completing the 50 stops,
driving. We recommend that the         smoke and produce an odor. The           cool the brakes by driving for
rear axle fluid be drained and         braking force and pedal travel may       8 km (5 mi) at 97 kph (60 mph).
refilled with new fluid after every    increase. After the procedure is
24 hours of racing or competitive      complete, the brake pads may          As with all high performance brake
driving. See Recommended Fluids        appear white at the rotor contact.    systems, some amount of brake
and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for                                              squeal is normal.
what fluid to use.                     Street High Performance Brake
                                       Burnishing Procedure                  Racing/Track Brake Burnish
ZR1 Brake Burnish Procedure                                                  Procedure
                                       Run this procedure in a safe
Notice: These procedures are           manner and in compliance with all     To prepare the ZR1 brake system
specific to the ZR1 with ceramic       local and state ordinances/laws       for track events and racing, the
brake rotors. These procedures         regarding motor vehicle operation.    Street High Performance Brake
should not be run on other             Run this procedure only on dry        Burnish as described previously
Corvette models as damage may          pavement.                             should be completed.
result.                                1. From a stop, accelerate as         In addition to completing the Street
Notice: The new vehicle break‐in          rapidly as possible without        High Performance Brake Burnishing
period should be completed                activating traction control to a   Procedure, the following procedure
before performing the brake               speed of 97 kph (60 mph).          needs to be completed to make the
burnish procedure or damage                                                  ZR1 brake system ready for track
                                       2. Use enough pedal force to          events and racing.
may occur to the powertrain/              completely stop the vehicle in
engine. See New Vehicle Break-In          four to five seconds. If ABS       This procedure should only be run
on page 9‑18.                             activates, braking is too hard.    on a track and only on dry
                                                                             pavement.
                                                                             Driving and Operating             9-9

Notice: Brake pedal fade will         Driving on Wet Roads                        WARNING (Continued)
occur during this track burnish
procedure and can cause brake         Rain and wet roads can reduce
pedal travel and force to increase.   vehicle traction and affect your
                                      ability to stop and accelerate.          Flowing or rushing water creates
This could extend stopping                                                     strong forces. Driving through
distance until the brakes are fully   Always drive slower in these types
                                      of driving conditions and avoid          flowing water could cause the
burnished.
                                      driving through large puddles and        vehicle to be carried away. If this
1. Drive a normal first lap and not   deep‐standing or flowing water.          happens, you and other vehicle
   too aggressive.                                                             occupants could drown. Do not
2. Laps 2 and 3 should be
   gradually driven faster and more
                                                { WARNING                      ignore police warnings and be
                                                                               very cautious about trying to drive
   aggressive, while allowing for      Wet brakes can cause crashes.           through flowing water.
   reduced brake output and            They might not work as well in
   increased stopping distance         a quick stop and could cause           Hydroplaning
   due to brake fade.                  pulling to one side. You could
                                       lose control of the vehicle.           Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
3. Lap 4 as near to full speed,
                                                                              can build up under the vehicle's
   while allowing for reduced brake    After driving through a large          tires so they actually ride on the
   output and increased stopping       puddle of water or a car/vehicle       water. This can happen if the road
   distance due to brake fade.         wash, lightly apply the brake          is wet enough and you are going
4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cool         pedal until the brakes work            fast enough. When the vehicle is
   down laps                           normally.                              hydroplaning, it has little or no
5. Lap 7 should be normal driving                              (Continued)    contact with the road.
   or an easy out lap.                                                        There is no hard and fast rule about
                                                                              hydroplaning. The best advice is to
                                                                              slow down when the road is wet.
9-10       Driving and Operating

Other Rainy Weather Tips               Other driving tips include:
Besides slowing down, other wet        .   Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
                                                                                         { WARNING
weather driving tips include:          .   Keep interior temperature cool.      If you do not shift down, the
.   Allow extra following distance.                                             brakes could get so hot that they
                                       .   Keep your eyes moving — scan         would not work well. You would
.   Pass with caution.                     the road ahead and to the sides.
                                                                                then have poor braking or even
.   Keep windshield wiping             .   Check the rearview mirror and        none going down a hill. You could
    equipment in good shape.               vehicle instruments often.           crash. Shift down to let the engine
.   Keep the windshield washer fluid                                            assist the brakes on a steep
    reservoir filled.                  Hill and Mountain Roads                  downhill slope.
.   Have good tires with proper        Driving on steep hills or through
    tread depth. See Tires on          mountains is different than driving
    page 10‑58.                        on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
                                       driving in these conditions include:
                                                                                         { WARNING
.   Turn off cruise control.
                                       .   Keep the vehicle serviced and        Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
                                           in good shape.                       or with the ignition off is
Highway Hypnosis                                                                dangerous. The brakes will have
                                       .   Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Always be alert and pay attention                                               to do all the work of slowing down
                                           tires, cooling system, and
to your surroundings while driving.                                             and they could get so hot that
                                           transmission.
If you become tired or sleepy, find                                             they would not work well. You
a safe place to park the vehicle       .   Shift to a lower gear when going     would then have poor braking or
and rest.                                  down steep or long hills.            even none going down a hill. You
                                                                                could crash. Always have the
                                                                                engine running and the vehicle
                                                                                in gear when going downhill.
                                                                                  Driving and Operating              9-11
.   Stay in your own lane. Do not
    swing wide or cut across the
                                         Winter Driving                             Try not to break the fragile traction.
                                                                                    If you accelerate too fast, the drive
    center of the road. Drive at         Driving on Snow or Ice                     wheels will spin and polish the
    speeds that let you stay in your                                                surface under the tires even more.
    own lane.                            Drive carefully when there is snow
                                         or ice between the tires and the           The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
.   Top of hills: Be                     road, creating less traction or grip.      on page 9‑34 improves vehicle
    alert — something could be in        Wet ice can occur at about 0°C             stability during hard stops on
    your lane (stalled car, accident).   (32°F) when freezing rain begins to        slippery roads, but apply the brakes
.   Pay attention to special road        fall, resulting in even less traction.     sooner than when on dry pavement.
    signs (falling rocks area, winding   Avoid driving on wet ice or in             Allow greater following distance
    roads, long grades, passing or       freezing rain until roads can be
                                                                                    on any slippery road and watch
    no-passing zones) and take           treated with salt or sand.
                                                                                    for slippery spots. Icy patches can
    appropriate action.                  Drive with caution, whatever the           occur on otherwise clear roads in
                                         condition. Accelerate gently so            shaded areas. The surface of a
                                         traction is not lost. Accelerating too     curve or an overpass can remain
                                         quickly causes the wheels to spin          icy when the surrounding roads
                                         and makes the surface under the            are clear. Avoid sudden steering
                                         tires slick, so there is even less         maneuvers and braking while
                                         traction.                                  on ice.
                                                                                    Turn off cruise control on slippery
                                                                                    surfaces.
9-12         Driving and Operating

Blizzard Conditions
                                              WARNING (Continued)                    WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the         If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
vehicle unless there is help nearby.                                             .   Adjust the climate control
                                          .   Clear away snow from around            system to a setting that
If possible, use the Roadside
                                              the base of your vehicle,              circulates the air inside the
Assistance Program (U.S. and
                                              especially any that is blocking        vehicle and set the fan speed
Canada) on page 13‑8 or Roadside
                                              the exhaust pipe.
Assistance Program (Mexico) on                                                       to the highest setting. See
page 13‑10. To get help and keep          .   Check again from time to               Climate Control System in
everyone in the vehicle safe:                 time to be sure snow does              the Index.
                                              not collect there.
.     Turn on the hazard warning                                                For more information about
      flashers.                           .   Open a window about 5 cm          carbon monoxide, see Engine
                                              (2 in) on the side of the         Exhaust on page 9‑26.
.     Tie a red cloth to an outside
                                              vehicle that is away from the
      mirror.                                                                   Snow can trap exhaust gases
                                              wind to bring in fresh air.
                                                                                under your vehicle. This can
            { WARNING                     .   Fully open the air outlets
                                              on or under the instrument
                                                                                cause deadly CO (Carbon
                                                                                Monoxide) gas to get inside.
    Snow can trap engine exhaust              panel.
                                                                                CO could overcome you and kill
    under the vehicle. This may                                  (Continued)    you. You cannot see it or smell
    cause exhaust gases to get                                                  it, so you might not know it is in
    inside. Engine exhaust contains                                             your vehicle. Clear away snow
    Carbon Monoxide (CO) which                                                  from around the base of your
    cannot be seen or smelled. It can                                           vehicle, especially any that is
    cause unconsciousness and even                                              blocking the exhaust.
    death.
                           (Continued)
                                                                                 Driving and Operating             9-13

Run the engine for short periods        If the Vehicle is Stuck                    Rocking the Vehicle to Get
only as needed to keep warm, but                                                   it Out
be careful.                             Slowly and cautiously spin the
                                        wheels to free the vehicle when            Turn the steering wheel left and
To save fuel, run the engine for only   stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.          right to clear the area around the
short periods as needed to warm                                                    front wheels. Turn off any traction
the vehicle and then shut the engine    If stuck too severely for the traction
                                                                                   system. Shift back and forth
off and close the window most of        system to free the vehicle, turn the
                                                                                   between R (Reverse) and a forward
the way to save heat. Repeat this       traction system off and use the
                                                                                   gear, or with a manual transmission,
until help arrives but only when you    rocking method.
                                                                                   between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
feel really uncomfortable from the                                                 R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
cold. Moving about to keep warm                   { WARNING                        little as possible. To prevent
also helps.                                                                        transmission wear, wait until the
                                         If the vehicle's tires spin at high       wheels stop spinning before shifting
If it takes some time for help to
                                         speed, they can explode, and you          gears. Release the accelerator
arrive, now and then when you run
                                         or others could be injured. The           pedal while shifting, and press
the engine, push the accelerator
                                         vehicle can overheat, causing an          lightly on the accelerator pedal
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This         engine compartment fire or other          when the transmission is in gear.
keeps the battery charged to restart     damage. Spin the wheels as little         Slowly spinning the wheels in the
the vehicle and to signal for help       as possible and avoid going               forward and reverse directions
with the headlamps. Do this as little    above 55 km/h (35 mph).                   causes a rocking motion that could
as possible to save fuel.                                                          free the vehicle. If that does not get
                                                                                   the vehicle out after a few tries, it
                                        For information about using tire
                                                                                   might need to be towed out. If the
                                        chains on the vehicle, see Tire
                                                                                   vehicle does need to be towed out,
                                        Chains on page 10‑80.
                                                                                   see Towing the Vehicle on
                                                                                   page 10‑86.
9-14     Driving and Operating

Vehicle Load Limits                                                   Tire and Loading Information
                                           { WARNING                  Label
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can       Do not load the vehicle
carry. This weight is called the   any heavier than the Gross
vehicle capacity weight and        Vehicle Weight Rating
includes the weight of all         (GVWR), or either the
occupants, cargo and all           maximum front or rear Gross
nonfactory‐installed options.      Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Two labels on your vehicle         This can cause systems to
show how much weight it may        break and change the way the
properly carry, the Tire and       vehicle handles. This could
Loading Information label and      cause loss of control and a
the Certification label.           crash. Overloading can also
                                   shorten the life of the vehicle.            Label Example
                                                                      A vehicle specific Tire and
                                                                      Loading Information label is
                                                                      attached to the center pillar
                                                                      (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With
                                                                      the driver's door open, you will
                                                                      find the label attached below
                                                                      the door latch. This label shows
                                                                      the number of occupant seating
                                                                      positions (A), and the maximum
                                                                      vehicle capacity weight (B) in
                                                                      kilograms and pounds.
                                                                          Driving and Operating          9-15

The Tire and Loading                  Steps for Determining Correct            the amount of available cargo
Information label also shows the      Load Limit                               and luggage load capacity
size of the original equipment        1. Locate the statement                  is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
tires (C) and the recommended            “The combined weight of               (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
cold tire inflation pressures (D).       occupants and cargo should         5. Determine the combined
For more information on tires            never exceed XXX kg or                weight of luggage and cargo
and inflation see Tires on               XXX lbs” on your vehicle's            being loaded on the vehicle.
page 10‑58 and Tire Pressure             placard.                              That weight may not safely
on page 10‑66.                                                                 exceed the available cargo
                                      2. Determine the combined
There is also important loading          weight of the driver and              and luggage load capacity
information on the vehicle               passengers that will be riding        calculated in Step 4.
Certification label. It tells you        in your vehicle.                   6. If your vehicle will be towing
the Gross Vehicle Weight                                                       a trailer, the load from your
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross           3. Subtract the combined
                                         weight of the driver and              trailer will be transferred to
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for                                                  your vehicle. Consult this
the front and rear axle. See             passengers from XXX kg or
                                         XXX lbs.                              manual to determine how this
“Certification Label” later in this                                            reduces the available cargo
section.                              4. The resulting figure equals           and luggage load capacity of
                                         the available amount of cargo         your vehicle.
                                         and luggage load capacity.
                                         For example, if the “XXX”             Your vehicle is neither
                                         amount equals 1400 lbs and            designed nor intended to tow
                                         there will be five 150 lb             a trailer.
                                         passengers in your vehicle,
9-16      Driving and Operating




            Example 1                          Example 2                           Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for      A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for      A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
   Example 1 = (400 kg) (181 lbs)      Example 2 = 181 kg (400 lbs)        Example 3 = 181 kg (400 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @       B. Subtract Occupant Weight @       B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
   68 kg (150 lbs) × 1 = 68 kg         68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg        91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 181 kg
   (150 lbs)                           (300 lbs)                           (400 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo     C. Available Cargo Weight = 45 kg   C. Available Cargo Weight =
   Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs)           (100 lbs)                           0 kg (0 lbs)
                                                                          Driving and Operating          9-17

Refer to your vehicle's Tire and      your vehicle, called the Gross
Loading Information label for         Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).             WARNING (Continued)
specific information about your       The GVWR includes the weight
vehicle's capacity weight and         of the vehicle, all occupants,         maximum front or rear Gross
seating positions. The combined       fuel and cargo. Never exceed           Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
weight of the driver, passengers      the GVWR for your vehicle,             This can cause systems to
and cargo should never exceed         or the Gross Axle Weight               break and change the way the
your vehicle's capacity weight.       Rating (GAWR) for either the           vehicle handles. This could
                                      front or rear axle.                    cause loss of control and a
Certification Label                                                          crash. Overloading can also
                                      Do not load your vehicle               shorten the life of the vehicle.
                                      with more weight than it was
                                      designed to carry. See “Steps
                                      for Determining Correct Load          Notice : Overloading the
                                      Limit” earlier in this section.       vehicle may cause damage.
                                                                            Repairs would not be covered
                                                                            by the vehicle warranty. Do
                                               { WARNING                    not overload the vehicle.
                                       Do not load the vehicle
                                       any heavier than the Gross
                                       Vehicle Weight Rating
                                       (GVWR), or either the
A vehicle specific Certification                            (Continued)
label is attached to the rear
edge of the driver's door. It tells
you the gross weight capacity of
9-18       Driving and Operating

If you put things inside your                                           Starting and
vehicle — like suitcases,                  WARNING (Continued)
tools, packages or anything                                             Operating
                                       .    Never stack heavier
else — they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to           things, like suitcases,      New Vehicle Break-In
stop or turn quickly, or if there is       inside the vehicle so that   Follow these recommended
a crash, they will keep going.             some of them are above       guidelines during the first 2 414 km
                                           the tops of the seats.       (1,500 miles) of driving this vehicle.
          { WARNING                    .   Do not leave an              Parts have a break-in period and
                                                                        performance will be better in the
                                           unsecured child restraint
 Things you put inside your                                             long run.
                                           in your vehicle.
 vehicle can strike and injure                                          For the first 322 km (200 miles):
 people in a sudden stop or
                                       .   When you carry something
                                           inside the vehicle, secure
                                                                        .   To break in new tires, drive at
 turn, or in a crash.                                                       moderate speeds and avoid hard
                                           it whenever you can.
  .   Put things in the rear area                                           cornering for the first 322 km
      of your vehicle. Try to                                               (200 miles).
      spread the weight evenly.                                         .   New brake linings also need a
                       (Continued)                                          break- in period. Avoid making
                                                                            hard stops during the first
                                                                            322 km (200 miles). This is
                                                                            recommended every time
                                                                            brake linings are replaced.
                                                                             Driving and Operating           9-19

For the first 80 km (500 miles):     For the first 2 414 km (1,500 miles):
.   Avoid full throttle starts and   .   Do not participate in track
                                                                                         { WARNING
    abrupt stops.                        events, sport driving schools,         ZR1s, and ZO6s with RPO ULZ,
.   Do not exceed 4,000 rpm.             or similar activities during the       contain parts made from carbon
                                         first 2 414 km (1,500 miles).          fiber.
.   Avoid driving at any one
    constant speed, fast or slow,
                                     .   Check engine oil with every            When damaged, the exposed
    including the use of cruise          refueling and add if necessary.        edges can be very sharp.
    control.                             Oil and fuel consumption may be        A person could be injured by
                                         higher than normal during the
.   Avoid downshifting to brake                                                 these sharp edges. Use caution
                                         first 2 414 km (1,500 miles).
    or slow the vehicle when the                                                when washing the vehicle,
    engine speed will exceed                                                    coming in contact with,
                                     Front Air Dam                              or removing damaged carbon
    4000 rpm.
                                     The vehicle is equipped with a front       fiber parts. See your dealer for
.   Do not let the engine labor.     air dam which has minimal ground           replacement.
    Never lug the engine in high     clearance.
    gear at low speeds. With a
    manual transmission, shift to    Vehicles with the ZR1 package,            Under normal operation, these
    the next lower gear. This rule   or ZO6 vehicles with RPO ULZ, also        components will occasionally
    applies at all times, not just   come with a splitter made from            contact some road surfaces (speed
    during the break-in period.      carbon fiber.                             bumps, driveway ramps, etc.). This
                                                                               can be heard inside the vehicle as
                                                                               a scraping noise. This is normal and
                                                                               does not indicate a problem.
                                                                               Use care when approaching bumps
                                                                               or objects on road surfaces and
                                                                               avoid them when possible.
9-20      Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions                    / (START):      Press this button       In an emergency, if the vehicle must
                                      while your foot is on the brake for     be shut off while driving:
                                      an automatic transmission, or while     1. Brake using a firm and steady
                                      pressing in the clutch for a manual        pressure. Do not pump the
                                      transmission, to start the engine.         brakes repeatedly. This may
                                      If the vehicle is in OFF or Retained       deplete power assist, requiring
                                      Accessory Power (RAP) mode, the            increased brake pedal force.
                                      Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
                                      transmitter must be inside the          2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
                                      vehicle to start the engine.               can be done while the vehicle is
                                                                                 moving. After shifting to neutral,
                                      9 Acc. (STOPPING THE ENGINE/               firmly apply the brakes and steer
                                      OFF/ACCESSORY): When the                   the vehicle to a safe location.
                                      vehicle is stopped with the engine
                                      on, press the button once to turn the   3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
                                      engine off.                                to P (Park) with an automatic
The vehicle has an electronic                                                    transmission, or Neutral with a
keyless ignition with a push-button   Do not turn the engine off when the        manual transmission. Turn the
start.                                vehicle is moving. This will cause a       ignition to OFF.
In order to shift out of P (Park),    loss of power assist in the brake
                                      and steering systems and disable        4. Set the parking brake. See
the vehicle must be running or in                                                Parking Brake on page 9‑35
Acc. mode and the regular brake       the airbags.
pedal must be applied.
                                                                                  Driving and Operating             9-21

                                         If an automatic vehicle is not             Starting the Engine
          { WARNING                      correctly placed in P (Park) a SHIFT
                                         TO PARK message will display on            Move the shift lever to P (Park)
 Turning off the vehicle while           the Driver Information Center (DIC).       or N (Neutral) for an automatic
 moving may cause loss of power                                                     transmission. For a manual
 assist in the brake and steering        For more information, see                  transmission the vehicle can be
 systems and disable the airbags.        Transmission Messages on                   started in Neutral or any other
 While driving, only shut the            page 5‑53.                                 gear as long as the clutch pedal is
 vehicle off in an emergency.            When the engine is off, press this         pressed. To restart a vehicle with a
                                         button to place the vehicle in             manual transmission when you are
                                         accessory mode. ACCESSORY                  already moving, use the Neutral
5. If the vehicle must be shut off                                                  position only. To restart a vehicle
                                         MODE ON will display on the Driver
   while driving, turn the ignition to                                              with an automatic transmission
                                         Information Center (DIC). This mode
   ACC/ACCESSORY.                                                                   when you are already moving, use
                                         allows you to use things like the
When the engine is on or the             radio and the power windows while          N (Neutral).
vehicle is in accessory power            the engine is off. Use accessory           Notice: Do not try to shift to
mode, it is recommended that a           mode if you must have the vehicle          P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
manual transmission be placed            in motion while the engine is off, for     If you do, you could damage the
in R (Reverse). An automatic             example, if the vehicle is being           transmission. Shift to P (Park)
transmission must be placed in           pushed or towed.                           only when the vehicle is stopped.
P (Park). Then press the Acc.
                                         After being in accessory mode for          The RKE transmitter must be inside
button to turn the engine off and
                                         about 10 minutes, the vehicle will         the vehicle for the ignition to work.
place the vehicle in RAP. See
                                         automatically enter RAP or OFF,
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
                                         depending on if the doors are
on page 9‑23 for more information.
                                         opened or closed.
9-22       Driving and Operating

Cell phone chargers can interfere         2. When the engine begins                   4. If the engine does not start and
with the operation of the Keyless            cranking, let go of the button and          no DIC message is displayed,
Access System. Battery chargers              the engine cranks automatically             wait 15 seconds before trying
should not be plugged in when                until it starts. If the battery in the      again to let the cranking motor
starting or turning off the engine.          RKE transmitter is weak, the                cool down.
To start the vehicle, do the following:      DIC displays FOB BATTERY                    If the engine does not start after
                                             LOW. You can still drive the                5-10 seconds, especially in very
1. For vehicles with an automatic            vehicle.
   transmission, with your foot on                                                       cold weather (below −18°C
   the brake pedal, press the                See “Battery Replacement”                   or 0°F), it could be flooded with
   START button located on the               under Remote Keyless Entry                  too much gasoline. Try pushing
   instrument panel. For vehicles            (RKE) System Operation on                   the accelerator pedal all the way
   with a manual transmission, you           page 2‑3 for more information.              to the floor while cranking for up
   must also press in the clutch             If the fob battery is dead, you             to 15 seconds maximum. Wait at
   pedal while pressing the START            need to insert the fob into the             least 15 seconds between each
   button.                                   fob slot to enable engine                   try, to allow the cranking motor
                                             starting. See “NO FOBS                      to cool down. When the engine
   If there is not an RKE transmitter        DETECTED” under Key and                     starts, let go of the accelerator.
   in the vehicle or if there is             Lock Messages on page 5‑42.                 If the vehicle starts briefly but
   something causing interference                                                        then stops again, repeat these
   with it, the DIC will display          3. Do not race the engine
                                             immediately after starting it.              steps. This clears the extra
   NO FOBS DETECTED. See Key                                                             gasoline from the engine.
   and Lock Messages on                      Operate the engine and
   page 5‑42 for more information.           transmission gently until the
                                             oil warms up and lubricates
                                             all moving parts.
                                                                              Driving and Operating              9-23

Notice: Cranking the engine for          Notice: The engine is designed         R (Reverse) and set the parking
long periods of time, by pressing        to work with the electronics in        brake after you turn off the engine
the START button immediately             the vehicle. If electrical parts       by pressing and holding the Acc.
after cranking has ended, can            or accessories are added, you          (Off/Accessory) button.
overheat and damage the                  could change the way the engine        If the RKE transmitter is not
cranking motor, and drain the            operates. Before adding electrical     detected inside the vehicle when it
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds        equipment, check with your             is turned to off, the DIC displays
between each try, to allow the           dealer. If you do not, the engine      NO FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
cranking motor to cool down.             might not perform properly. Any
                                         resulting damage would not be          See Key and Lock Messages on
The vehicle has a                                                               page 5‑42 for more information.
Computer-Controlled Cranking             covered by the vehicle warranty.
System. This feature assists in          Stopping the Engine
starting the engine and protects                                                Retained Accessory
components. Once cranking has            If the vehicle has an automatic        Power (RAP)
been initiated, the engine continues     transmission, move the shift lever
                                         to P (Park) and press and hold the     These vehicle accessories can be
cranking for a few seconds or until                                             used for up to 10 minutes after the
the vehicle starts. If the engine does   Acc. (Off/Accessory) button, located
                                         on the instrument panel, until the     engine is turned off:
not start, cranking automatically
stops after 15 seconds to prevent        engine shuts off. If the shift lever   .   Audio System
cranking motor damage. To prevent        is not in P (Park), the engine shuts
                                         off and the vehicle goes into the
                                                                                .   Power Windows
gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is       accessory mode. The DIC displays       These features continue to work
already running.                         SHIFT TO PARK. Once the shifter is     up to 10 minutes after the engine
                                         moved to P (Park), the vehicle turns   is turned off or until either door is
                                         off. If the vehicle has a manual       opened. If a door is opened, the
                                         transmission, it is recommended        power windows and audio system
                                         that you move the shift lever to       will shut off.
9-24      Driving and Operating

Shifting Into Park                      1. Hold the brake pedal down            Leaving the Vehicle with the
                                           and set the parking brake. See       Engine Running (Automatic
(Automatic Transmission)                   Parking Brake on page 9‑35 for       Transmission)
                                           more information.
         { WARNING                      2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)             { WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of          by holding in the button on the
the vehicle if the shift lever is not      lever and pushing the lever all       It can be dangerous to leave the
fully in P (Park) with the parking         the way toward the front of the       vehicle with the engine running.
                                           vehicle.                              The vehicle could move suddenly
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine       3. Press the Acc. button (ignition       if the shift lever is not fully in
running, the vehicle can move              switch) to turn the engine off.       P (Park) with the parking brake
suddenly. You or others could be                                                 firmly set. And, if you leave the
injured. To be sure the vehicle will                                             vehicle with the engine running,
not move, even when you are on                                                   it could overheat and even catch
fairly level ground, use the steps                                               fire. You or others could be
that follow.                                                                     injured. Do not leave the vehicle
                                                                                 with the engine running.
                                                                                   Driving and Operating             9-25

If you have to leave the vehicle          Torque Lock (Automatic                     If torque lock does occur, you may
with the engine running, be sure          Transmission)                              need to have another vehicle push
the vehicle is in P (Park) and the                                                   yours a little uphill to take some of
parking brake is firmly set before        If you are parking on a hill and you       the pressure from the transmission
you leave it. After you have moved        do not shift the transmission into         parking pawl, so you can pull the
the shift lever into P (Park), hold       P (Park) properly, the weight of the       shift lever out of P (Park).
down the regular brake pedal. See if      vehicle may put too much force on
                                          the parking pawl in the
you can move the shift lever away
                                          transmission. You may find it difficult
                                                                                     Shifting Out of Park
from P (Park) without first pushing
the button on the lever. If you can, it   to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).   Shift lock release prevents shifting
means that the shift lever was not        This is called “torque lock.”              out of P (Park) unless the vehicle is
fully locked into P (Park).               To prevent torque lock, set the            running or in accessory mode and
                                          parking brake and then shift into          the brake pedal is applied.
                                          P (Park) properly before you leave         The shift lock release is always
                                          the driver seat. To find out how, see      functional except in the case of an
                                          “Shifting Into P (Park)” previously in     uncharged or low voltage (less than
                                          this section.                              9‐volt) battery. See Jump Starting
                                          When you are ready to drive, move          on page 10‑82 for more information.
                                          the shift lever out of P (Park) before
                                          you release the parking brake.
9-26       Driving and Operating

To shift out of P (Park) use the       Parking (Manual                         Engine Exhaust
following:
                                       Transmission)
1. Apply the brake pedal.
                                       Before you get out of the vehicle,                { WARNING
2. Release the parking brake. See      move the shift lever into R (Reverse)
   Parking Brake on page 9‑35.         and firmly apply the parking brake.     Engine exhaust contains carbon
                                       Once the shift lever has been           monoxide (CO) which cannot be
3. Press the shift lever button.                                               seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
                                       placed into R (Reverse) with the
4. Move the shift lever to the         clutch pedal pressed in, you can        can cause unconsciousness and
   desired position.                   turn the ignition off and release the   even death.
If you still are unable to shift out   clutch.                                 Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
of P (Park):                                                                    .   The vehicle idles in areas
1. Fully release the shift lever       Parking Over Things                          with poor ventilation (parking
   button.                             That Burn                                    garages, tunnels, deep snow
2. While holding down the brake                                                     that may block underbody
   pedal, press the shift lever                  { WARNING                          airflow or tail pipes).
   button again.                                                                .   The exhaust smells or
                                        Things that can burn could touch
3. Move the shift lever to the                                                      sounds strange or different.
                                        hot exhaust parts under the
   desired position.                    vehicle and ignite. Do not park         .   The exhaust system leaks
If you still cannot move the shift      over papers, leaves, dry grass,             due to corrosion or damage.
lever from P (Park), consult your       or other things that can burn.          .   The vehicle exhaust system
dealer or a professional towing                                                     has been modified, damaged
service.                                                                            or improperly repaired.
                                                                                                       (Continued)
                                                                           Driving and Operating              9-27

                                      Running the Vehicle
     WARNING (Continued)
                                      While Parked
                                                                                       { WARNING
 .   There are holes or openings                                              It can be dangerous to get out
                                      It is better not to park with the
     in the vehicle body from                                                 of the vehicle if the automatic
                                      engine running. But if you ever have
     damage or after market                                                   transmission shift lever is not fully
                                      to, here are some things to know.
     modifications that are not                                               in P (Park) with the parking brake
     completely sealed.                                                       firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If unusual fumes are detected or
                                                { WARNING                     Do not leave the vehicle when
if it is suspected that exhaust is     Idling a vehicle in an enclosed        the engine is running unless you
coming into the vehicle:               area with poor ventilation is          have to. If you have left the
                                       dangerous. Engine exhaust may          engine running, the vehicle can
 .   Drive it only with the windows
                                       enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust      move suddenly. You or others
     completely down.
                                       contains carbon monoxide (CO)          could be injured. To be sure the
 .   Have the vehicle repaired         which cannot be seen or smelled.       vehicle will not move, even when
     immediately.                                                             you are on fairly level ground,
                                       It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the        and even death. Never run the          always set the parking brake and
engine running in an enclosed          engine in an enclosed area that        move the shift lever to P (Park).
area such as a garage or a             has no fresh air ventilation. For
building that has no fresh air         more information, see Engine          Follow the proper steps to be sure
ventilation.                           Exhaust on page 9‑26.                 the vehicle will not move. See
                                                                             Shifting Into Park (Automatic
                                                                             Transmission) on page 9‑24.
9-28       Driving and Operating

Automatic                                            { WARNING
                                                                                     P (Park) when the vehicle is
                                                                                     running. If you cannot shift out of
Transmission                               It is dangerous to get out of the
                                                                                     P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
                                                                                     lever and push the shift lever all the
                                           vehicle if the shift lever is not fully   way into P (Park) as you maintain
                                           in P (Park) with the parking brake        brake application. Then press the
                                           firmly set. The vehicle can roll.         shift lever button and move the shift
                                           Do not leave the vehicle when the         lever into another gear. See Shifting
                                           engine is running unless you              Out of Park on page 9‑25.
                                           have to. If you have left the             R (Reverse): Use this gear to
                                           engine running, the vehicle can           back up.
                                           move suddenly. You or others              Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
                                           could be injured. To be sure the          while the vehicle is moving
                                           vehicle will not move, even when          forward could damage the
                                           you are on fairly level ground,           transmission. The repairs would
                                           always set the parking brake and          not be covered by the vehicle
There are several different positions      move the shift lever to P (Park).         warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
for the shift lever.                       See Shifting Into Park (Automatic         after the vehicle is stopped.
P (Park): This position locks the          Transmission) on page 9‑24.
                                                                                     To rock the vehicle back and forth to
rear wheels. It is the best position to                                              get out of snow, ice, or sand without
use when starting the engine              Be sure the shift lever is fully in        damaging the transmission, see If
because the vehicle cannot move           P (Park) before starting the engine.       the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑13.
easily.
                                          The vehicle has an automatic               N (Neutral): In this position, the
                                          transmission shift lock control            engine does not connect with the
                                          system. You have to fully apply the        wheels. To restart the engine when
                                          brakes and then press the shift lever      the vehicle is already moving, use
                                          button before you can shift from
                                                                                 Driving and Operating              9-29

N (Neutral) only. If the vehicle needs   power for passing, push the pedal
towing, see Towing the Vehicle on        down to achieve the desired level of
page 10‑86.                              acceleration.
                                         Downshifting the transmission in
          { WARNING                      slippery road conditions could result
                                         in skidding. See “Skidding” under
 Shifting into a drive gear while the    Loss of Control on page 9‑6.
 engine is running at high speed is
 dangerous. Unless your foot is          S (Sport Mode): When in
 firmly on the brake pedal, the          S (Sport Mode), the transmission will
 vehicle could move very rapidly.        work as an automatic until you use
                                         the Manual Paddle Shift Controls,
 You could lose control and hit
                                         which activates driver manual gear
 people or objects. Do not shift                                                   The Manual Paddle Shift system is
                                         selection. See Manual Mode on
 into a drive gear while the engine      page 9‑29. While in S (Sport Mode),       activated from S (Sport Mode) by
 is running at high speed.               the transmission will have more           pushing the paddle, above the
                                         noticeable upshifts for sportier          steering wheel spokes, to up-shift
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)         vehicle performance.                      to the next gear, or pulling on the
or N (Neutral) with the engine                                                     paddle, behind the steering wheel
running at high speed may                Manual Mode                               spokes, to down-shift to the
damage the transmission. The                                                       next gear.
repairs would not be covered by          Manual Paddle Shift                       When accelerating the vehicle from
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the        While in S (Sport Mode), the paddles      a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
engine is not running at high            located on the steering wheel can         you may want to shift to 2 (Second)
speed when shifting the vehicle.         be used to manually up-shift or           or 3 (Third) gear. A higher gear
D (Drive): This position is for          down-shift the transmission.              allows you to gain more traction on
normal driving. It provides the best                                               slippery surfaces. If traction control
fuel economy. If you need more                                                     is active, upshifts are delayed to
                                                                                   increase your control of the vehicle.
9-30       Driving and Operating

See Traction Control System (TCS)         vehicle slows. The transmission         The Manual Paddle Shift system
on page 9‑36 Traction Control             will select 2 (Second) gear as the      will not allow either an up-shift or a
System (TCS).                             vehicle stops. From a stop, the         down-shift if the vehicle speed is too
The Manual Paddle Shift system            vehicle will start from and hold        fast or too slow, nor will it allow a
can be deactivated by moving the          2 (Second) gear unless the driver       start from 4 (Fourth) or higher gear.
shifter from S (Sport Mode) back          manually paddle shifts into a           If up-shifting does not occur when
to D (Drive), or by holding either        different gear or selects D (Drive).    needed, vehicle speed will be
up‐shift paddle for more than             The driver can select 1 (First) gear    limited to protect the engine.
one second.                               for maximum acceleration from
                                          a stop.                                 When the transmission gear does
The driver may choose to briefly                                                  not respond to a shift change, the
activate the Manual Paddle Shift                                                  DIC will show an X over the gear
system while in D (Drive). Tapping                                                display.
either the upshift or downshift
controls will place the transmission
in Manual Paddle Shift mode. The
driver may then exit Manual Paddle
Shift mode by holding either upshift
                                          When using the Manual Paddle
control for two seconds. The system
                                          Shift feature while in S (Sport Mode)
will return to automatic shifting after
                                          , the current gear will be displayed
10 seconds of cruising at a steady                                                When a requested shift is denied
                                          in the Driver Information (DIC),
speed, or when the vehicle comes                                                  due to the speed restrictions shown,
                                          or the Head-Up Display (HUD), if the
to a stop.                                                                        the DIC will momentarily show an X
                                          vehicle has either of these features.
While the Manual Paddle Shift                                                     over the gear display and a chime
                                          If the vehicle has a Head-Up            will sound.
gear selection system is active,
                                          Display (HUD), see Head-Up
the transmission will automatically
                                          Display (HUD) on page 5‑31.
downshift through the gears as the
                                                                                    Driving and Operating             9-31

If the vehicle has a HUD, and the         To prevent damage to the                    To prevent damage to the
transmission gear does not respond        powertrain, Manual Paddle                   powertrain, Manual Paddle
to a shift change, a chime will sound     downshifts to a lower gear cannot           downshifts to a lower gear cannot
and the HUD will momentarily show         be done above certain speeds.               be done above certain speeds.
an X over the gear display.               The maximum speed allowed for               The maximum speed allowed for
Manual Paddle Shift operation is          downshifting of gears 1 (First)             downshifting of gears 1 (First)
available for use with Cruise             through 4 (Fourth) are:                     through 4 (Fourth) are:
Control. See Cruise Control on            .   Into 4 (Fourth) gear over               .   Into 4 (Fourth) gear over
page 9‑45 Cruise Control for more             250 km/h (155 mph).                         234 km/h (145 mph).
information.                              .   Into 3 (Third) gear over                .   Into 3 (Third) gear over 176 km/h
The vehicle speeds required for               188 km/h (117 mph).                         (109 mph).
Manual Paddle Shift up-shifts             .   Into 2 (Second) gear over               .   Into 2 (Second) gear over
depend on several vehicle inputs,             120 km/h (75 mph).                          113 km/h (70 mph).
which will vary the allowed up-shift
speed by a few km/h (mph).                .   Into 1 (First) gear over                .   Into 1 (First) gear over 64 km/h
                                              68 km/h (42 mph).                           (40 mph).
For vehicles with a 2.56:1 Axle
Ratio (RPO GM8)                           For vehicles with a 2.73:1 Axle             If the driver does not request
                                          Ratio (RPO GU2)                             an upshift as the engine speed
.   Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear
                                          .
                                                                                      approaches fuel shut off rpm, the
    require approximately 35 km/h             Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear            engine speed will be limited to
    (22 mph).                                 require approximately 31 km/h           protect the engine. See Tachometer
                                              (19 mph).                               on page 5‑11 for more information.
.   Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require
    approximately 45 km/h (28 mph).       .   Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require
                                              approximately 39 km/h (24 mph).
.   Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear
    require approximately 65 km/h         .   Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear
    (41 mph).                                 require approximately 57 km/h
                                              (35 mph).
9-32       Driving and Operating

Manual Transmission                     You can shift into 1 (First) when
                                        you are going less than 64 km/h
                                                                                    Neutral: Use this position when
                                                                                    you start or idle the engine. The
                                        (40 mph). If you come to a complete         shift lever is in Neutral when it is
                                        stop and it is hard to shift into           centered in the shift pattern, not in
                                        1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral   any gear.
                                        and let up on the clutch. Press the         R (Reverse): To back up, press
                                        clutch pedal back down. Then shift          down the clutch pedal and shift into
                                        into 1 (First).                             R (Reverse). Just apply pressure
                                        2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal          to get the lever past 5 (Fifth) and
                                        as you let up on the accelerator            6 (Sixth) into R (Reverse). Let up
                                        pedal and shift into 2 (Second).            on the clutch pedal slowly while
                                        Then, slowly let up on the clutch           pressing the accelerator pedal.
                                        pedal as you press the accelerator          The six-speed manual transmission
                                        pedal.                                      has a feature that allows you
This is the shift pattern for the       3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth)            to safely shift into R (Reverse)
six-speed manual transmission.          and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),        while the vehicle is rolling at less
                                        4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the     than 5 km/h (3 mph). You will be
Here is how to operate the              same way you do for 2 (Second).             locked out if you try to shift into
transmission:                           Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as        R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal       you press the accelerator pedal.            moving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph).
and shift into 1 (First). Then slowly   To stop, let up on the accelerator
let up on the clutch pedal as you       pedal and press the brake pedal.
press the accelerator pedal.            Just before the vehicle stops, press
                                        the clutch pedal and the brake
                                        pedal, and shift to Neutral.
                                                                           Driving and Operating               9-33

Shift Speeds                        This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear for the best fuel
(Manual Transmission)               economy.
                                                        Manual Transmission Recommended
        { WARNING                                           Shift Speeds in km/h (mph)
If you skip a gear when you                                          Acceleration Shift Speed
                                    Engine
downshift, you could lose control                    1 to 2       2 to 3       3 to 4        4 to 5        5 to 6
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift    All Engines      24 (15)     40 (25)      64 (40)       72 (45)       80 (50)
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
                                    If the engine speed drops below          One to Four Shift Light
                                    900 rpm, or if the engine is not         (Manual Transmission)
                                    running smoothly, you should
                                    downshift to the next lower gear.
                                    You may have to downshift two
                                    or more gears to keep the engine
                                    running smoothly or for good
                                    engine performance.
                                    Notice: When shifting gears, do
                                    not move the shift lever around          When this light comes on, you can
                                    unnecessarily. This may damage           only shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)
                                    the transmission. Shift directly         instead of 1 (First) to 2 (Second).
                                    into the next gear.
                                                                             See One-to-Four Shift Light (Manual
                                                                             Transmission) on page 5‑22 for
                                                                             more information.
9-34      Driving and Operating

Downshifting                        The six-speed transmission has a           Brakes
(Manual Transmission)               spring that centers the shift lever
                                    near 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth). This
Do not downshift into the gear      spring helps you know which gear           Antilock Brake
shown below at a speed greater      you are in when you are shifting. Be       System (ABS)
than shown in the table:            careful when shifting from 1 (First)
                                                                               This vehicle has the Antilock
    1 (First)    80 km/h (50 mph)   to 2 (Second) or downshifting from
                                                                               Brake System (ABS), an advanced
  2 (Second)    119 km/h (74 mph)   6 (Sixth) to 5 (Fifth). The spring will
                                                                               electronic braking system that helps
                                    try to pull the shift lever toward
                                                                               prevent a braking skid.
                     163 km/h       4 (Fourth) and 3 (Third). Make sure
   3 (Third)
                    (101 mph)       you move the lever into 2 (Second)         When the engine is started and the
                                    or 5 (Fifth). If you let the shift lever   vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
                     209 km/h
  4 (Fourth)                        move in the direction of the pulling,      checks itself. A momentary motor or
                    (130 mph)
                                    you may end up shifting from               clicking noise might be heard while
                                    1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) or from            this test is going on, and it might
Notice: If you skip more than one                                              even be noticed that the brake
                                    6 (Sixth) to 3 (Third).
gear when you downshift, or if                                                 pedal moves a little. This is normal.
you race the engine when you        If the driver does not upshift as the
release the clutch pedal while      engine speed approaches fuel shut
downshifting, you could damage      off RPM, the engine speed will be
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or   limited to protect the engine. See
the transmission. Do not skip       Tachometer on page 5‑11 for more
gears or race the engine when       information.
downshifting.
                                                                               If there is a problem with ABS, this
                                                                               warning light stays on. See Antilock
                                                                               Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
                                                                               on page 5‑22.
                                                                               Driving and Operating              9-35

If driving safely on a wet road        stopping distance. If you get too         Parking Brake
and it becomes necessary to slam       close to the vehicle in front of you,
on the brakes and continue braking     there will not be enough time to          The parking brake lever is located
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a          apply the brakes if that vehicle          to the right of the center console.
computer senses that the wheels        suddenly slows or stops. Always           To set the parking brake, hold the
are slowing down. If one of the        leave enough room up ahead to             brake pedal down. Pull the parking
wheels is about to stop rolling, the   stop, even with ABS.                      brake lever up. If the ignition is on,
computer will separately work the                                                the brake system warning light will
brakes at each wheel.                  Using ABS
                                                                                 come on.
ABS can change the brake pressure      Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
                                                                                 To release the parking brake, hold
to each wheel, as required, faster     the brake pedal down firmly and let
                                                                                 the brake pedal down. Then push
than any driver could. This can help   ABS work. You might hear the ABS
                                                                                 the release button in as you move
the driver steer around the obstacle   pump or motor operating and feel
                                                                                 the parking brake lever all the
while braking hard.                    the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
                                                                                 way down.
                                       normal.
As the brakes are applied, the                                                   Notice: Driving with the parking
computer keeps receiving updates       Braking in Emergencies                    brake on can overheat the brake
on wheel speed and controls            ABS allows the driver to steer and        system and cause premature
braking pressure accordingly.          brake at the same time. In many           wear or damage to brake system
Remember: ABS does not change          emergencies, steering can help            parts. Make sure that the parking
the time needed to get a foot up to    more than even the very best              brake is fully released and the
the brake pedal or always decrease     braking.                                  brake warning light is off before
                                                                                 driving.
9-36      Driving and Operating

Brake Assist                            Ride Control Systems                     If cruise control is being used when
                                                                                 TCS begins to limit wheel spin, the
This vehicle has a brake assist                                                  cruise control will automatically
feature designed to assist the driver   Traction Control                         disengage. Cruise control may be
in stopping or decreasing vehicle       System (TCS)                             reengaged when road conditions
speed in emergency driving                                                       allow. See Cruise Control on
conditions. This feature uses the       The vehicle has a Traction Control
                                                                                 page 9‑45.
stability system hydraulic brake        System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
control module to supplement the        This is especially useful in slippery
power brake system under                road conditions. The system
conditions where the driver has         operates only if it senses that the
quickly and forcefully applied the      rear wheels are spinning too much
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly    or are beginning to lose traction.
stop or slow down the vehicle. The      When this happens, the system
stability system hydraulic brake        works the rear brakes and reduces
control module increases brake          engine power (by closing the throttle    The SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
pressure at each corner of the          and managing engine spark) to limit      message and the TCS warning light
vehicle until the ABS activates.        wheel spin.                              will come on if there is a problem
Minor brake pedal pulsation or                                                   with TCS. See Ride Control System
                                        The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
pedal movement during this time                                                  Messages on page 5‑44.
                                        message displays on the Driver
is normal and the driver should         Information Center (DIC) when TCS        When this light and the SERVICE
continue to apply the brake pedal       is limiting wheel spin. See Ride         TRACTION SYSTEM message are
as the driving situation dictates.      Control System Messages on               on, the system will not limit wheel
The brake assist feature will           page 5‑44. The system may be             spin. Adjust your driving
automatically disengage when the        heard or felt while it is working, but   accordingly.
brake pedal is released or brake        this is normal.
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
                                                                               Driving and Operating              9-37

TCS automatically comes on             Notice: When traction control             accomplished by selectively
whenever the vehicle is started.       is turned off, or Competitive             applying any one of the vehicle's
To limit wheel spin, especially in     Driving Mode is active, it is             brakes.
slippery road conditions, the system   possible to lose traction. If you         The ACTIVE HANDLING message
should always be left on. TCS can      attempt to shift with the drive           will come on when the system is
be turned off if needed.               wheels spinning with a loss of            operating. See Ride Control System
                                       traction, it is possible to cause         Messages on page 5‑44 for more
                                       damage to the transmission. Do            information. The system may be
                                       not attempt to shift when the             heard or felt while it is working. This
                                       drive wheels do not have traction.        is normal.
                                       Damage caused by misuse of the
                                       vehicle is not covered. See the
                                       warranty book for additional
To turn the system off, press the      information.
button located on the console.         Adding non‐dealer accessories can
The system can be turned on or off     affect the vehicle's performance.
at any time by pressing the ACTIVE     See Accessories and Modifications
HANDLING button. The DIC will          on page 10‑4 for more information.        The SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
display the appropriate message                                                  SYSTEM message is displayed, the
when the button is pushed.             Active Handling System                    instrument cluster light comes on,
                                       The Active Handling System is a           and a sound is heard if there is a
                                       computer controlled system that           problem with the system.
                                       helps the driver maintain directional     See Ride Control System Messages
                                       control of the vehicle in difficult       on page 5‑44 for more information.
                                       driving conditions. This is
9-38       Driving and Operating

When this light and the SERVICE                                                 The DIC will display the appropriate
ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM                                                          message when the button is
message are on, the system is not                                               pushed.
operational. Adjust your driving                                                If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
accordingly.                                                                    system detects a flat tire and the
The Active Handling System comes                                                Driver Information Center (DIC)
on automatically whenever the             To turn the system off, press         displays TIRE FLAT, or if the TPM
vehicle is started. To help maintain      the Active Handling button on         system is malfunctioning and the
directional control of the vehicle, the   the console until TRACTION            DIC displays SERVICE TIRE
system should always be left on.          SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING            MONITOR, the Active Handling
The system can be turned off if           SYSTEM — OFF is displayed.            System will be affected as follows:
needed. If the Active Handling            The system can be turned back on      .   The Active Handling System
System is turned off, the Traction        at any time by pressing the button.       cannot be turned off by the
Control System will also be turned                                                  driver.
off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
                                                                                .   If the Active Handling System is
                                                                                    off, it will be turned on
                                                                                    automatically.
                                                                                .   Competitive Driving Mode or
                                                                                    Performance Traction
                                                                                    Management is unavailable.
                                                                                .   The Active Handling System will
                                                                                    feel different in aiding and
                                                                                    maintaining directional control.
                                                                              Driving and Operating             9-39

Competitive Driving Mode              Notice: Do not attempt to
                                      shift when the drive wheels
Competitive Driving Mode,             are spinning and do not have
Performance Traction Management,      traction. This may cause damage
and Launch Control are systems        to the transmission. Damage
designed to allow increased           caused by misuse of the vehicle
performance while accelerating and/   is not covered by the vehicle
or cornering. This is accomplished                                              This light is on when the vehicle is
                                      warranty. See the warranty book           in the Competitive Driving Mode.
by regulating and optimizing the      for additional information.
engine, brakes, and suspension                                                  This optional handling mode can be
performance. These modes are          Competitive Driving Mode                  selected by pressing the ACTIVE
for use at a closed course race       (Except ZR1)                              HANDLING button on the console
track and are not intended for                                                  quickly two times. COMPETITIVE
                                      Competitive Driving Mode allows
use on public roads. They will                                                  DRIVING MODE displays in the
                                      full engine power while the Active
not compensate for a driver’s                                                   Driver Information Center (DIC).
                                      Handling System helps maintain
inexperience or lack of familiarity                                             See Ride Control System Messages
                                      directional control of the vehicle by
with the race track. Drivers who                                                on page 5‑44 for more information.
                                      selective brake application. In this
prefer to allow the system to have
                                      mode, TCS is off and Launch               When the ACTIVE HANDLING
more control of the engine, brake,
                                      Control is available. Adjust your         button is pressed again, the Active
and suspension are advised to turn
                                      driving style to account for the          Handling and TCS systems are on.
the normal traction control and
                                      available engine power. See               The TRACTION SYSTEM AND
active handling systems on. See
                                      “Launch Control” later in this            ACTIVE HANDLING-ON message
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
                                      section.                                  displays briefly in the DIC and a
on page 9‑7 for more information.
                                                                                chime is heard.
9-40       Driving and Operating

Performance Traction                   This optional handling mode
Management (ZR1)                       can be selected by pressing the
                                       ACTIVE HANDLING button on the
Performance Traction Management        console quickly two times. PERF
integrates the Traction Control,       TRAC 1 - WET ACTIVE HANDLING
Active Handling, and Selective         ON displays in the DIC.
Ride Control systems to provide
improved and consistent                To experience the performance
performance when cornering. The        benefit of this system, after entering
amount of available engine power is    a curve and at the point where
based on the mode selected, track      the driver would normally start
conditions, driver skill, and the      to increase acceleration, the
radius of each corner.                 accelerator pedal can be fully
                                       pressed. The Performance Traction        To select a mode while in
                                       Management system will modify the        Performance Traction Management,
                                       level of engine power for a smooth       turn the knob located on the
                                       and consistent corner exit.              console.
                                                                                The Performance Traction
                                                                                Management system contains five
                                                                                modes. These modes are selected
This light is on when the vehicle is                                            by turning the Selective Ride
in the Performance Traction                                                     Control/Performance Traction
Management Mode.                                                                Management knob on the center
                                                                                console. The driver scrolls up or
                                                                                down through modes 1–5 by
                                                                                rotating the knob to the right or left.
                                                                                  Driving and Operating            9-41

The following is a DIC display             PERF TRAC 3 – SPORT                      PERF TRAC 5 – RACE ACTIVE
description and the recommended            ACTIVE HANDLING ON                       HANDLING OFF
usage of each mode:                        .   For use by drivers who are           .   For use by experienced drivers
PERF TRAC 1 – WET ACTIVE                       familiar with the track                  who are familiar with the track
HANDLING ON                                .   Dry conditions only                  .   Dry conditions only
.   Intended for all driver skill levels   .   Requires more driving skill than     .   Requires more driving skill than
.   Wet or damp conditions                     mode 2                                   in other modes
    only — not intended for use in         .   Active Handling is on and more       .   Active Handling is off and engine
    heavy rain or standing water               engine power is available than in        power is available for maximum
.   Active Handling is on and engine           mode 2                                   cornering speed
    power is reduced based on                                                       Press and release the ACTIVE
                                           PERF TRAC 4 – SPORT
    conditions                                                                      HANDLING button to turn off
                                           ACTIVE HANDLING OFF
PERF TRAC 2 – DRY ACTIVE                                                            Performance Traction Management
                                           .   For use by drivers who are           and return to the Active Handling
HANDLING ON                                    familiar with the track              and Traction Control Systems. The
.   For use by less experienced            .   Dry conditions only                  TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
    drivers or while learning a new                                                 HANDLING-ON message displays
    track
                                           .   Requires more driving skill than     briefly in the DIC and a chime is
                                               modes 2 or 3                         heard.
.   Dry conditions only
                                           .   Active Handling is off and
.   Active Handling is on and engine           available engine power is the
    power is slightly reduced                  same as mode 3
9-42      Driving and Operating

Launch Control                          Launch Control is only available         A smooth, quick release of the
                                        when the following criteria are met:     clutch, while maintaining the fully
A Launch Control feature is
                                        .   Competitive Driving Mode is          pressed accelerator pedal, will
available, within Competitive Driving
                                            selected (except ZR1) or any         manage wheel slip. Complete
Mode (except ZR1) or Performance
                                            of the Performance Traction          shifts as described in Manual
Traction Management (ZR1), on
                                            Management modes are                 Transmission on page 9‑32.
vehicles with a manual transmission
to allow the driver to achieve high         selected (ZR1). The TCS light        After the vehicle is launched, the
levels of vehicle acceleration in           comes on the instrument panel        system continues in Competitive
a straight line. Launch Control is          and the appropriate DIC              Mode (except ZR1) or Performance
a form of traction control that             message displays.                    Traction Management (ZR1).
manages tire spin while launching       .   The vehicle is not moving.           Competitive Driving Mode,
the vehicle. This feature is intended                                            Performance Traction Management,
for use during closed course race
                                        .   The steering wheel is pointing
                                            straight.                            and Launch Control are systems
events where consistent zero to                                                  designed for a closed course race
sixty and quarter mile times are        .   The clutch is pressed and the        track and not intended for use on
desirable.                                  vehicle is in first gear.            public roads. The systems are not
                                        .   The accelerator pedal is rapidly     intended to compensate for lack of
                                            applied to wide open throttle.       driver experience or familiarity with
                                                                                 the race track.
                                        The Launch Control feature will
                                        initially limit engine speed as the
                                        driver rapidly applies the accelerator
                                        pedal to wide open throttle.
                                                                              Driving and Operating          9-43

Limited-Slip Rear Axle                   Except ZR1                             The setting can be changed at any
                                                                                time. Based on road conditions,
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle                                          steering wheel angle, and the
can give more traction on snow,                                                 vehicle speed, the system
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works                                              automatically adjusts to provide
like a standard axle most of the                                                the best handling while providing
time, but when traction is low, this                                            a smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
feature allows the drive wheel with                                             modes will feel similar on a smooth
the most traction to move the                                                   road. Select a new setting whenever
vehicle.                                                                        driving conditions change.

Selective Ride Control                                                          Three Driver Information
                                                                                Center (DIC) messages (SERVICE
The vehicle may have a ride control                                             RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
system called Magnetic Selective                                                INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM
Ride Control. The system provides        This knob is located on the center     SPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) display
the following performance benefits:      console. Turn it to select the         when a malfunction occurs with the
.   Reduced Impact Harshness             suspension of your choice.             Selective Ride Control system.
                                                                                Refer to Ride Control System
.   Improved Road Isolation              TOUR: Use for normal city and          Messages on page 5‑44 for more
                                         highway driving. This setting          information.
.   Improved High-Speed Stability
                                         provides a smooth, soft ride.
.   Improved Handling Response
                                         SPORT: Use where road conditions
.   Better Control of Body Ride          or personal preference demand
    Motions                              more control. This setting provides
                                         more “feel,” or response to the road
                                         conditions.
9-44      Driving and Operating

ZR1                                  SPORT: Use where road conditions       When this mode is selected,
                                     or personal preference demand          turning the Selective Ride knob
                                     more control. This setting provides    will change the Performance
                                     more “feel,” or response to the road   Traction Management mode and
                                     conditions.                            the suspension setting will be
                                     The setting can be changed at any      determined automatically. See
                                     time. Based on road conditions,        Competitive Driving Mode on
                                     steering wheel angle, and the          page 9‑39 for more information.
                                     vehicle speed, the system              Three Driver Information Center
                                     automatically adjusts to provide       (DIC) messages (SERVICE
                                     the best handling while providing a    RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS
                                     smooth ride. The Tour and Sport        INOPERATIVE, and MAXIMUM
                                     modes will feel similar on a smooth    SPEED 129 KM/H (80 MPH) display
                                     road. Select a new setting whenever    when a malfunction occurs with
This knob is located on the center   driving conditions change.             the Selective Ride Control system.
console. Turn it to select the       The Selective Ride knob will not       Refer to Ride Control System
suspension of your choice. The       display the Tour or Sport setting      Messages on page 5‑44 for more
knob will return to the center       when the Performance Traction          information.
position when released. The          Management mode is selected.
switch will illuminate the current
suspension setting.
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
                                                                                 Driving and Operating             9-45

Cruise Control                           If the vehicle is in cruise control,      + (Resume/Accelerate): Makes
                                         and has the Traction Control              the vehicle accelerate or resume a
With cruise control, a speed of          System (TCS), and it begins to            previously set speed.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can       limit wheel spin, the cruise control
be maintained without keeping your       automatically disengages. See             T (Set): Press this button at the
foot on the accelerator. Cruise          Traction Control System (TCS) on          end of the lever to set the speed.
control does not work at speeds          page 9‑36. When road conditions           Setting Cruise Control
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).            allow the cruise control to be safely
                                         used again, it can be turned              If the cruise button is on when not in
Cruise control will not work if the                                                use, it could get bumped and go into
parking brake is set, or if the master   back on.
                                                                                   cruise when not desired. Keep the
cylinder brake fluid level is low.                                                 cruise control switch off when cruise
                                                                                   is not being used.
          { WARNING                                                                1. Move the cruise control switch
 Cruise control can be dangerous                                                      to on.
 where you cannot drive safely at                                                  2. Get up to the speed desired.
 a steady speed. So, do not use
                                                                                   3. Press T at the end of the lever
 the cruise control on winding
 roads or in heavy traffic.                                                           and release it.
                                                                                   4. Take your foot off the accelerator
 Cruise control can be dangerous
                                                                                      pedal.
 on slippery roads. On such roads,
 fast changes in tire traction can                                                 When the cruise control is engaged,
 cause excessive wheel slip, and                                                   the CRUISE SET TO XX MPH
                                         The vehicle has cruise control.
 you could lose control. Do not use                                                message displays on the Driver
 cruise control on slippery roads.       9 (Off): Turns the system off.            Information Center (DIC). See
                                         R (On): Turns the system on.              Cruise Control Messages on
                                                                                   page 5‑38.
9-46       Driving and Operating

Resuming a Set Speed                     Increasing Speed While Using             Reducing Speed While Using
If the cruise control is set at a        Cruise Control                           Cruise Control
desired speed and then the brakes        If the cruise control system is          If the cruise control system is
are applied, the cruise control is       already activated,                       already activated,
disengaged without erasing the set       .   Use the accelerator pedal to get     .   Press and hold the set button
speed from memory.                                                                    until the lower speed desired is
                                             to the higher speed. Press J at
Once the vehicle speed reaches               the end of the lever, then release       reached, then release it.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,              the button and the accelerator       .   To slow down in small amounts,
move the cruise control switch               pedal. If the accelerator pedal is       briefly press J. Each time this
briefly from R to S. The vehicle             held longer than 60 seconds,             is done, the vehicle goes about
returns to the previous set speed            cruise control will turn off.            1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
and stays there.                         .   Move the cruise switch from R to     Passing Another Vehicle While
If the switch is held at resume/             S. Hold it there until desired       Using Cruise Control
accelerate, the vehicle keeps going          speed is reached, and then
faster until the switch is released or       release the switch.                  Use the accelerator pedal to
the brake is applied. Do not hold the                                             increase the vehicle speed. When
switch at resume/accelerate, unless
                                         .   To increase the vehicle speed in     you take your foot off the pedal,
you want the vehicle to go faster.           small amounts, move the switch       the vehicle will slow down to the
                                             briefly to S. Each time this is      previous set cruise speed.
                                             done, the vehicle goes about
                                             1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
                                                                                 Driving and Operating               9-47

Using Cruise Control on Hills           Cruise Control in Sport and
                                                                                   .    If driving in hilly terrain, cruise
                                        Manual Paddle Shift Gear                       control may not be able to
How well the cruise control works                                                      maintain vehicle speed if an
on hills depends upon the vehicle       Selection
                                                                                       up-shift or down-shift is not
speed, load, and the steepness          When the vehicle is in S (Sport)               selected by the driver. While
of the hills. When going up steep       and the manual paddle shift controls           driving on hilly terrain and cruise
hills, you might want to step on        are not being used, cruise control             control is active with a manual
the accelerator pedal to maintain       operates in the same manner as                 paddle shift gear selection, the
the vehicle speed. When going           D (Drive).                                     driver must select the proper
downhill, you might have to brake       When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and           gear for the terrain or select
or shift to a lower gear to keep the    the manual paddle shift controls are           D (Drive) on the gear range
vehicle's speed down. When the          being used, cruise control operates            selector for full automatic
brakes are applied the cruise control   as follows:                                    transmission operation.
is disengaged.
                                        .   If cruise control is active and a
                                            gear is selected with the manual
                                            paddle shift controls, the vehicle
                                            speed is maintained in the
                                            driver selected gear and will
                                            not automatically up-shift or
                                            down-shift the transmission
                                            while the driver’s gear selection
                                            is active.
9-48       Driving and Operating

Ending Cruise Control                  Fuel
.   To disengage cruise control,
                                       Use of the recommended fuel is
    step lightly on the brake pedal.
                                       an important part of the proper
    If the vehicle has a manual
                                       maintenance of this vehicle. To help
    transmission, lightly tap the
                                       keep the engine clean and maintain
    clutch to end the cruise control
                                       optimum vehicle performance, we
    session.
                                       recommend the use of gasoline
.   To turn off the cruise control     advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
    system, move the cruise control    Gasoline.
    switch to 9.                       Look for the TOP TIER label on the
When cruise control is disengaged,     fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
the CRUISE DISENGAGED                  enhanced detergency standards          The eighth digit of the Vehicle
message displays on the Driver         developed by auto companies. A         Identification Number (VIN) shows
Information Center (DIC). See          list of marketers providing TOP        the code letter or number that
Cruise Control Messages on             TIER Detergent Gasoline can be         identifies the vehicle's engine.
page 5‑38.                             found at www.toptiergas.com.           The VIN is at the top left of the
                                                                              instrument panel. See Vehicle
Erasing Speed Memory
                                                                              Identification Number (VIN) on
The cruise control set speed is                                               page 12‑1.
erased from memory by moving
the switch to 9 or if the ignition
is turned off.
                                                                             Driving and Operating           9-49

Recommended Fuel                         If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine   Gasoline Specifications
                                         (VIN Code T) or the 7.0L V8 engine
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine    (VIN Code E), use premium
                                                                                 (U.S. and Canada Only)
(VIN Code W), use premium                unleaded gasoline with a posted         At a minimum, gasoline should meet
unleaded gasoline with a posted          octane rating of 91 or higher. For      ASTM specification D 4814 in the
octane rating of 91 or higher. You       best performance, use premium           United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or
can also use regular unleaded            unleaded gasoline with a posted         3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
gasoline rated at 87 octane or           octane rating of 93. In an              contain an octane-enhancing
higher, but the vehicle's acceleration   emergency, you can use regular          additive called
could be slightly reduced, and a         unleaded gasoline with an octane        methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
slight audible knocking noise,           rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane    tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
commonly referred to as spark            fuel is used, do not perform any        against the use of gasolines
knock, might be heard. If the octane     aggressive driving maneuvers such       containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
is less than 87, a heavy knocking        as wide open throttle applications.     on page 9‑50 for additional
noise might be heard when driving.       You might also hear audible spark       information.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated     knock during acceleration. Refill the
at 87 octane or higher as soon as        tank with premium fuel as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you could           possible to avoid damaging the
damage the engine. If heavy              engine. If heavy knocking is heard
knocking is heard when using             when using gasoline rated at
gasoline rated at 87 octane or           91 octane or higher, the engine
higher, the engine needs service.        needs service.
9-50       Driving and Operating

California Fuel                           Fuels in Foreign                        Fuel Additives
Requirements                              Countries                               To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
If the vehicle is certified to meet       Never use leaded gasoline or any        in the United States are now
California Emissions Standards, it is     other fuel not recommended in the       required to contain additives that
designed to operate on fuels that         previous text on fuel. Costly repairs   help prevent engine and fuel system
meet California specifications. See       caused by use of improper fuel          deposits from forming, allowing the
the underhood emission control            would not be covered by the vehicle     emission control system to work
label. If this fuel is not available in   warranty.                               properly. In most cases, nothing
states adopting California Emissions                                              should have to be added to the fuel.
                                          To check the fuel availability, ask     However, some gasolines contain
Standards, the vehicle will operate       an auto club, or contact a major oil
satisfactorily on fuels meeting                                                   only the minimum amount of
                                          company that does business in the       additive required to meet U.S.
federal specifications, but emission      country where you will be driving.
control system performance might                                                  Environmental Protection Agency
be affected. The malfunction                                                      regulations. To help keep fuel
indicator lamp could turn on and the                                              injectors and intake valves clean
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.                                             and avoid problems due to dirty
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on                                                 injectors or valves, look for gasoline
page 5‑18. If this occurs, return to                                              that is advertised as TOP TIER
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.                                             Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
If it is determined that the condition                                            TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
is caused by the type of fuel used,                                               ensure gasoline meets enhanced
repairs might not be covered by the                                               detergency standards developed
vehicle warranty.                                                                 by the auto companies. A list of
                                                                                  marketers providing TOP TIER
                                                                                  Detergent Gasoline can be found
                                                                                  at www.toptiergas.com.
                                                                             Driving and Operating              9-51

For customers who do not use TOP       However, E85 (85% ethanol) and          Some gasolines that are
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,     other fuels containing more than        not reformulated for low emissions
one bottle of GM Fuel System           10% ethanol must not be used in         can contain an octane-enhancing
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel      vehicles that were not designed for     additive called
tank at every engine oil change,       those fuels.                            methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
can help clean deposits from fuel      Notice: This vehicle was not            tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel   designed for fuel that contains         where you buy gasoline whether the
System Treatment PLUS is the only      methanol. Do not use fuel               fuel contains MMT. We recommend
gasoline additive recommended by       containing methanol. It can             against the use of such gasolines.
General Motors. It is available at     corrode metal parts in the fuel         Fuels containing MMT can reduce
your dealer.                           system and also damage plastic          spark plug life and affect emission
Gasolines containing oxygenates,       and rubber parts. That damage           control system performance. The
such as ethers and ethanol, and        would not be covered under the          malfunction indicator lamp might
reformulated gasolines might be        vehicle warranty.                       turn on. If this occurs, return to your
available in your area. We                                                     dealer for service.
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
9-52     Driving and Operating

Filling the Tank

         { WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep         The tethered fuel cap is located   The fuel door release button is
sparks, flames, and smoking           behind a hinged fuel door on the   located on the instrument panel to
materials away from fuel. Do not      driver side of the vehicle.        the left of the steering wheel. Push
leave the fuel pump unattended                                           the button to release the fuel door.
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
                                                                                  Driving and Operating             9-53

                                                                                    When replacing the fuel cap, turn
                                                    { WARNING                       it clockwise until it clicks. Make
                                                                                    sure the cap is fully installed. The
                                           Fuel can spray out on you if you         diagnostic system can determine if
                                           open the fuel cap too quickly.           the fuel cap has been left off or
                                           If you spill fuel and then               improperly installed. This would
                                           something ignites it, you could          allow fuel to evaporate into the
                                           be badly burned. This spray can          atmosphere. See Malfunction
                                           happen if the tank is nearly full,       Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18.
                                           and is more likely in hot weather.
                                                                                    The CHECK GAS CAP message
                                           Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
                                                                                    displays on the Driver Information
                                           for any hiss noise to stop. Then         Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
                                           unscrew the cap all the way.             properly installed. See Fuel System
There is also a manual fuel door
release tab. It is located against the                                              Messages on page 5‑41 for more
upper trim in the rear compartment        Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not      information.
on the driver side of the vehicle. Pull   top off or overfill the tank and wait
the tab to release the fuel door.         a few seconds after you have
                                          finished pumping before removing
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
                                          the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
slowly counterclockwise.
                                          surfaces as soon as possible. See
While refueling, let the cap hang by      Exterior Care on page 10‑87.
the tether below the fuel fill opening.
9-54       Driving and Operating

                                      Filling a Portable Fuel
          { WARNING                   Container
                                                                                   WARNING (Continued)
 If a fire starts while you are
                                                                               .   Bring the fill nozzle in contact
 refueling, do not remove the
 nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
                                                 { WARNING                         with the inside of the fill
 by shutting off the pump or by       Never fill a portable fuel container         opening before operating the
 notifying the station attendant.     while it is in the vehicle. Static           nozzle. Contact should be
 Leave the area immediately.          electricity discharge from the               maintained until the filling is
                                      container can ignite the fuel                complete.
Notice: If you need a new fuel        vapor. You can be badly burned           .   Do not smoke while
cap, be sure to get the right type.   and the vehicle damaged if this              pumping fuel.
Your dealer can get one for you.      occurs. To help avoid injury to          .   Do not use a cellular phone
If you get the wrong type, it may     you and others:                              while pumping fuel.
not fit properly. This may cause        .   Dispense fuel only into
the malfunction indicator lamp to           approved containers.
light and may damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
                                        .   Do not fill a container while
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on               it is inside a vehicle, in a
page 5‑18.                                  vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
                                            or on any surface other than
                                            the ground.
                                                                 (Continued)
                                                                          Driving and Operating             9-55

Towing                                Conversions and                       Add-on equipment can drain the
                                                                            vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if
                                      Add-Ons                               the vehicle is not operating.
General Towing
                                                                            The vehicle has an airbag system.
Information                           Add-On Electrical                     Before attempting to add anything
The vehicle is neither designed nor   Equipment                             electrical to the vehicle, see
intended to tow a trailer.                                                  Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
                                      Notice: Do not add anything           Vehicle on page 3‑34 and Adding
                                      electrical to the vehicle unless      Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
                                      you check with your dealer first.     Vehicle on page 3‑35.
                                      Some electrical equipment can
                                      damage the vehicle and the
                                      damage would not be covered by
                                      the vehicle's warranty. Some
                                      add-on electrical equipment can
                                      keep other components from
                                      working as they should.
9-56   Driving and Operating

                               2 NOTES
                                                                                                                                    Vehicle Care                    10-1

                                                                                                                         Park Brake and P (Park)
Vehicle Care                                                 Automatic Transmission
                                                              Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23     Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-45
                                                             Manual Transmission                                         Wiper Blade
                                                              Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23     Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
General Information                                          Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24              Windshield Replacement . . . 10-47
 General Information . . . . . . . . . .          10-3       Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-24
 California Proposition                                      Cooling System (Engine) . . . 10-28                        Headlamp Aiming
  65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    10-3       Cooling System                                              Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
 California Perchlorate                                       (Intercooler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
  Materials Requirements . . . .                  10-3                                                                  Bulb Replacement
                                                             Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29              Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
 Accessories and                                             Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-34
  Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     10-4                                                                   Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
                                                             Overheated Engine                                           High Intensity Discharge
 Lifting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .      10-5        Protection                                                  (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Vehicle Checks                                                Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35                 Headlamps, Front Turn
 Doing Your Own                                              Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-36                     Signal and Parking
  Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8            Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37             Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9   Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38      Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
 Engine Compartment                                          Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41          Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
  Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10         Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43     Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-50
 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15        Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-22                      Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-44
                                                             Automatic Transmission Shift
                                                              Lock Control Function
                                                              Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
10-2            Vehicle Care

Electrical System                                              Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66           Jump Starting
 Electrical System                                             Tire Pressure for High-Speed                                 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
   Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      10-50       Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
 Fuses and Circuit                                             Tire Pressure Monitor                                       Towing
   Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      10-51       System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68         Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-86
 Engine Compartment Fuse                                       Tire Pressure Monitor                                        Recreational Vehicle
   Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   10-52       Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69           Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
 Instrument Panel Fuse                                         Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72           Appearance Care
   Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   10-55     Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
                                                                                                                            Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
                                                               When It Is Time for New
Wheels and Tires                                                                                                            Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
                                                                 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58                                                                Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
                                                               Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59            Different Size Tires and
 Run-Flat Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59                Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60                 Uniform Tire Quality
 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-61                        Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62                 Wheel Alignment and Tire
 Tire Terminology and                                            Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
  Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63            Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-78
                                                               Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
                                                               If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
                                                                                     Vehicle Care         10-3

General Information                   California Proposition                California Perchlorate
For service and parts needs,          65 Warning                            Materials Requirements
visit your dealer. You will receive   Most motor vehicles, including this   Certain types of automotive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained       one, contain and/or emit chemicals    applications, such as airbag
and supported service people.         known to the State of California to   initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
Genuine GM parts have one of          cause cancer and birth defects or     and lithium batteries contained in
these marks:                          other reproductive harm. Engine       Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
                                      exhaust, many parts and systems,      may contain perchlorate materials.
                                      many fluids, and some component       Special handling may be necessary.
                                      wear by-products contain and/or       For additional information, see
                                      emit these chemicals.                 www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
                                                                            perchlorate.
10-4       Vehicle Care

Accessories and                           Damage to vehicle components             When you go to your GM dealer
                                          resulting from the installation or use   and ask for GM Accessories, you
Modifications                             of non‐GM certified parts, including     will know that GM-trained and
Adding non‐dealer accessories             control module modifications, is not     supported service technicians will
to the vehicle can affect vehicle         covered under the terms of the           perform the work using genuine GM
performance and safety, including         vehicle warranty and may affect          Accessories.
such things as airbags, braking,          remaining warranty coverage for          Also, see Adding Equipment to the
stability, ride and handling,             affected parts.                          Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
emissions systems, aerodynamics,          GM Accessories are designed to           page 3‑35.
durability, and electronic systems        complement and function with other
like antilock brakes, traction control,   systems on the vehicle. Your GM
and stability control. Some of these      dealer can accessorize the vehicle
accessories could even cause              using genuine GM Accessories.
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
                                                                                           Vehicle Care           10-5

Lifting the Vehicle                                                              Notice: Lifting your vehicle
                                                 { WARNING                       improperly can damage your
                                                                                 vehicle and result in costly
          { WARNING                     Getting under a vehicle when it          repairs not covered by your
                                        is jacked up is dangerous. If the        warranty. To lift your vehicle
Lifting a vehicle can cause an          vehicle slips off the jack, you          properly, follow the advice in
injury. The vehicle can slip off the    could be badly injured or killed.        this part.
jack and roll over you or other         Never get under a vehicle when
people. You and they could be           it is supported only by a jack.          To help prevent vehicle damage:
badly injured. Find a level place                                                 .   Be sure to place a block or
to lift your vehicle. To help                                                         pad between the jack and the
prevent the vehicle from moving:                                                      vehicle.
  1.    Set the parking brake                    { WARNING                        .   Make sure the jack you are
       firmly.                          Raising the vehicle with the                  using spans at least two
  2.    Put an automatic                jack improperly positioned can                crossmember ribs.
       transmission shift lever in      damage the vehicle or the vehicle         .   Lift only in the areas shown
       P (Park), or shift a manual      may fall and cause you or others              in the following pictures.
       transmission to 1 (First) or     injury.
       R (Reverse).                                                              For additional information, see
                                                                                 your dealer and the Chevrolet
  3.   Turn off the engine.            If you ever use a jack to lift your       Corvette service manual.
To be even more certain the            vehicle, follow the instructions that
vehicle won't move, put blocks in      came with the jack, and be sure to
front of and behind the wheels.        use the correct lifting points to avoid
                                       damaging your vehicle.
10-6      Vehicle Care

Lifting From the Front




                                    1. Locate the front lifting points (A),   3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
                                       according to the illustration             making sure the jack spans at
The front lifting points can be        shown.                                    least two of the crossmember
accessed from either side of your   2. Be sure to place a block or pad           ribs (B).
vehicle, behind the front tires.       between the jack and the
                                       vehicle.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care          10-7

Lifting From the Rear




                                     1. Locate the rear lifting points (A),   3. Lift the vehicle with the jack,
                                        according to the illustration            making sure the jack spans at
The rear lifting points can be          shown.                                   least two of the crossmember
accessed from the rear of the        2. Be sure to place a block or pad          ribs (B).
vehicle, on either the driver's or      between the jack and the              For more information, see Doing
passenger's side.                       vehicle.                              Your Own Service Work on
                                                                              page 10‑8.
10-8       Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks                               WARNING (Continued)
                                                                             This vehicle has an airbag system.
                                                                             Before attempting to do your own
                                                                             service work, see Servicing the
Doing Your Own                                                               Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
                                         .   Be sure to use the proper
Service Work                                 nuts, bolts, and other          page 3‑34.
                                             fasteners. Metric and English   Keep a record with all parts receipts
          { WARNING                          fasteners can be easily         and list the mileage and the date of
                                             confused. If the wrong          any service work performed. See
You can be injured and the                   fasteners are used, parts can   Maintenance Records on page 11‑9.
vehicle could be damaged if you              later break or fall off. You
try to do service work on a vehicle          could be hurt.
without knowing enough about it.
  .   Be sure you have sufficient
                                       If doing some of your own service
      knowledge, experience, the
                                       work, use the proper service
      proper replacement parts,
                                       manual. It tells you much more
      and tools before attempting
                                       about how to service the vehicle
      any vehicle
                                       than this manual can. To order the
      maintenance task.
                                       proper service manual, see Service
                         (Continued)   Publications Ordering Information
                                       on page 13‑15.
                                                                               Vehicle Care   10-9

Hood
To open the hood:




1. Pull the hood release lever with
   this symbol on it. It is located
   inside the vehicle below the
   instrument panel on the            2. Go to the side of the vehicle and
   driver side.                          pull up on the rear edge of the
                                         hood, near the windshield.
                                      Before closing the hood, be sure all
                                      the filler caps are on properly. Then,
                                      just pull the hood down and close it
                                      firmly.
10-10     Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview
6.2 L LS3 V8 Engine (Without dry sump engine oil tank)
                                                                             Vehicle Care   10-11

A. Clutch Master Cylinder              G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
   Reservoir (If Equipped). See           to Add Engine Oil” under Brake
   Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑24.        Fluid on page 10‑41.
B. Windshield Washer Fluid             H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
   Reservoir. See “Adding Washer          “Checking Engine Oil” under
   Fluid” under Washer Fluid on           Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
   page 10‑37.                         I.   Engine Compartment Fuse
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See               Block on page 10‑52.
   “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on       J.   Passenger Compartment Air
   page 10‑38.                              Filter (Out of View). See
D. Coolant Surge Tank and                   Passenger Compartment Air
   Pressure Cap. See Engine                 Filter on page 8‑7.
   Coolant on page 10‑29.              K. Battery on page 10‑43.
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on        If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS3
   page 10‑24.                         V8 engine (without the dry sump
F.   Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.   engine oil tank) and you are facing
     See Power Steering Fluid on       the front of the vehicle.
     page 10‑36.
10-12    Vehicle Care

6.2 L LS9 V8 Engine
                                                                               Vehicle Care   10-13

A. Intercooler. See Cooling System     H. Passenger Compartment Air
   (Engine) on page 10‑28 or              Filter (Out of View). See
   Cooling System (Intercooler) on        Passenger Compartment Air
   page 10‑29.                            Filter on page 8‑7.
B. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on        I.   Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When
   page 10‑24.                              to Add Engine Oil” under
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir           Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
   and Cap. See Power Steering         J.   Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See
   Fluid on page 10‑36.                     “Changing Engine Oil and Filter”
D. Coolant Surge Tank and                   Brake Fluid on page 10‑41.
   Pressure Cap. See Engine            K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
   Coolant on page 10‑29.                 “Checking Engine Oil” under
E. Windshield Washer Fluid                Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
   Reservoir. See “Adding Washer       L.   Remote Positive (+) Terminal
   Fluid” under Washer Fluid on             (Out of View). See Jump
   page 10‑37.                              Starting on page 10‑82.
F.   Clutch Master Cylinder            M. Engine Compartment Fuse
     Reservoir (If Equipped). See         Block on page 10‑52.
     Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑24.   If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS9
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See          Supercharged V8 engine and you
   “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on       are facing the front of the vehicle.
   page 10‑38.
10-14     Vehicle Care

6.2 L LS3 V8 Engine (With dry sump engine oil tank) or 7.0 L LS7 V8 Engine
                                                                                       Vehicle Care          10-15

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on         H. Coolant Surge Tank and              Engine Oil
   page 10‑24.                             Pressure Cap. See Engine
                                           Coolant on page 10‑29.              To ensure proper engine
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.                                             performance and long life, careful
   See Power Steering Fluid on          I.   Windshield Washer Fluid           attention must be paid to engine
   page 10‑36.                               Reservoir. See “Adding Washer     oil. Following these simple, but
C. Engine Compartment Fuse                   Fluid” under Washer Fluid on      important steps will help protect
   Block on page 10‑52.                      page 10‑37.                       your investment:
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal         J.   Brake Fluid Reservoir. See        .   Always use engine oil approved
   (Out of View). See Jump                   “Brake Fluid” under Brake Fluid       to the proper specification and of
   Starting on page 10‑82.                   on page 10‑41.                        the proper viscosity grade. See
                                        K. Clutch Master Cylinder                  “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See                                                        in this section.
   “Checking Engine Oil” under             Reservoir. See Hydraulic Clutch
   Engine Oil on page 10‑15.               on page 10‑24.                      .   Check the engine oil level
                                        If the vehicle has the 6.2 L LS3           regularly and maintain the
F.   Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See                                                 proper oil level. See “Checking
     “Changing Engine Oil and Filter”   V8 engine with the manual
                                        transmission (with the dry sump            Engine Oil” and “When to Add
     under Engine Oil on                                                           Engine Oil” in this section.
     page 10‑15.                        engine oil tank) or the 7.0 L LS7
                                        V8 engine and you are facing the       .   Change the engine oil at the
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When       driver side of the vehicle.                appropriate time. See Engine Oil
   to Add Engine Oil” under
                                                                                   Life System on page 10‑22.
   Engine Oil on page 10‑15.
                                                                               .   Always dispose of engine oil
                                                                                   properly. See “What to Do with
                                                                                   Used Oil” in this section.
10-16        Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil (Except                Obtaining an accurate oil level          When to Add Engine Oil
ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport)                 reading is essential:                    (Except ZO6, ZR1, and Grand
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message             1. If the engine has been running        Sport)
displays on the Driver Information            recently, turn off the engine and
Center (DIC), check the engine                allow several minutes for the oil
oil level right away. For more                to drain back into the oil pan.
information, see Engine Oil                   Checking the oil level too soon
Messages on page 5‑40. Check the              after engine shutoff will not
engine oil level regularly; this is an        provide an accurate oil level
added reminder.                               reading.
It is a good idea to check the engine      2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with   If the oil is below the cross-hatched
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to      a paper towel or cloth, then push     area at the tip of the dipstick, add
get an accurate reading, the vehicle          it back in all the way. Remove it     1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
must be on level ground. The                  again, keeping the tip down, and      and then recheck the level. See
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow        check the level.                      “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
loop. See Engine Compartment                                                        this section for an explanation of
Overview on page 10‑10 for the                                                      what kind of oil to use. For engine
location of the engine oil dipstick.                                                oil crankcase capacity, see
                                                                                    Capacities and Specifications on
                                                                                    page 12‑2.
                                                                                          Vehicle Care           10-17

See Racing or Other Competitive         Checking Engine Oil (ZO6,                  These vehicles have a
Driving on page 9‑7 for additional      ZR1, and Grand Sport)                      racetrack‐ready dry sump
information on engine oil.                                                         engine lubrication system. This
Notice: Do not add too much                                                        high‐performance system operates
oil. Oil levels above or below                                                     differently than a standard engine
the acceptable operating range                                                     lubrication system and requires a
shown on the dipstick are harmful                                                  special procedure when checking
to the engine. If you find that                                                    the engine oil level. Follow this
you have an oil level above the                                                    procedure closely when checking
operating range, i.e., the engine                                                  the engine oil level.
has so much oil that the oil level                                                 The engine oil level must be
gets above the cross-hatched                                                       checked when the engine is warm.
area that shows the proper                                                         Cold oil level in the dry sump tank
operating range, the engine could                                                  may not indicate the actual amount
be damaged. You should drain                                                       of oil in the system. With this
out the excess oil or limit driving     A. Engine Oil Dipstick                     system, engine oil is contained in
of the vehicle and seek a service                                                  an external tank, separate from the
                                        B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
professional to remove the                                                         engine. Under normal operating
excess amount of oil.                   It is a good idea to check the engine      conditions, the oil pan under the
                                        oil level at each fuel fill. In order to   engine does not store any oil. If the
See Engine Compartment Overview
                                        get an accurate reading, the vehicle       vehicle has been parked for an
on page 10‑10 for the location of
                                        must be on level ground.                   extended period without the engine
the engine oil fill cap.
                                        The engine oil dipstick handle is a        being started, some oil will seep
Add enough oil to put the level                                                    back into the oil pan, reducing the
                                        yellow loop. The dipstick is located
somewhere in the proper operating                                                  amount of oil held in the dry sump
                                        on the dry sump engine oil tank.
range . Push the dipstick all the way                                              tank and there could be no engine
                                        See Engine Compartment Overview
back in when through.                                                              oil at all showing on the dipstick.
                                        on page 10‑10 for the location of the
                                        dry sump engine oil tank.
10-18         Vehicle Care

This is normal since the dipstick is      4. Remove the dipstick from the           See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
designed to read engine oil level            external engine oil tank and           for an explanation of what kind of oil
only after the engine has run long           clean it with a lint‐free paper        to use. For engine oil crankcase
enough to reach normal operating             towel or a cloth. Re‐insert the        capacity, see Capacities and
temperature. Do not add engine               dipstick into the external oil tank,   Specifications on page 12‑2.
oil based on cold engine dipstick            pushing it all the way in until it     See Racing or Other Competitive
readings. The engine oil level on the        stops.                                 Driving on page 9‑7 for additional
dipstick will also be inaccurate if       5. Remove the dipstick from the oil       information on engine oil.
checked while the engine is running.         tank and read the level on the         Notice: Do not add too much
1. To obtain an accurate engine oil          cross‐hatched area. Oil levels         oil. Oil levels above or below
   level reading, warm up the                that fall in the cross‐hatched         the acceptable operating range
   engine to at least 80°C (175°F).          area are normal.                       shown on the dipstick are harmful
   Cold oil will not give a correct oil                                             to the engine. If you find that
   level reading.                         When to Add Engine Oil (ZO6,
                                          ZR1, and Grand Sport)                     you have an oil level above the
2. Once the engine is warm, turn                                                    operating range, i.e., the engine
   off the engine. Checking the oil                                                 has so much oil that the oil level
   while the engine is running will                                                 gets above the cross-hatched
   result in an incorrect oil level                                                 area that shows the proper
   reading.                                                                         operating range, the engine could
3.    Wait at least five minutes (but                                               be damaged. You should drain
     not more than 20 minutes) to                                                   out the excess oil or limit driving
     allow oil to drain and settle in                                               of the vehicle and seek a service
     the engine.                          If the oil is below the cross-hatched     professional to remove the
                                          area at the tip of the dipstick, add      excess amount of oil.
                                          1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
                                          through the oil fill cap opening in the
                                          oil tank and then recheck the level.
                                                                                        Vehicle Care             10-19

See Engine Compartment Overview                                                 2. Once the oil has been drained
on page 10‑10 for the location of the                                              from the engine, remove the
external engine oil tank and fill cap.                                             engine oil filter and allow the oil
Add enough oil to put the level                                                    to drain.
somewhere in the proper operating                                               3. Re‐install both drain plugs and
range. Push the dipstick all the way                                               tighten them to 25 Y (18 lb ft).
back into the oil tank when through.                                            4. Replace the oil filter and tighten
Changing Engine Oil and Filter                                                     it to 30 Y (22 lb ft). See
(ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport)                                                        Maintenance Replacement Parts
                                                                                   on page 11‑8 for the correct
These vehicles have a                                                              filter.
racetrack‐ready dry sump
engine lubrication system. This          ZO6 Shown, ZR1 and Grand Sport         5. Oil is filled through the opening
high‐performance system operates                     Similar                       in the top of the external engine
differently than a standard engine                                                 oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.
                                         A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs
lubrication system and requires a                                               6. Add 9.9 L (10.5 quarts) of oil to
special procedure when changing          B. Seals                                  the oil tank. See Capacities and
the engine oil and filter. Follow this   1. Remove the two engine oil drain        Specifications on page 12‑2.
procedure closely when changing             plugs from the bottom of the        7. Install the oil fill cap and insert
the engine oil and filter.                  engine oil pan. One drain plug         the dipstick, if removed.
                                            drains the external oil tank via
                                            the oil transfer supply line. The
                                            other drain plug drains residual
                                            oil from the crankcase sump.
                                            Allow the oil to drain.
10-20       Vehicle Care

8. Start the engine and let it run at                                             It is recommended to use Mobil 1®
   idle for at least 15 seconds. This                                             engine oils that meet the
   will circulate the fresh engine oil                                            requirements of the dexos
   through the lubrication system.                                                specification.
9. Shut off the engine and check                                                  Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
   the oil level as described under                                               dexos is unavailable: In the event
   “Checking Engine Oil (ZO6,            This vehicle was filled at the factory   that dexos‐approved engine oil is
   ZR1, and Grand Sport).”               with dexos‐approved engine oil.          not available at an oil change or
                                                                                  for maintaining proper oil level,
Selecting the Right Engine Oil           Notice: Use only engine oil              you may use substitute engine oil
                                         that is approved to the dexos            displaying the API Starburst symbol
Selecting the right engine oil
                                         specification or an equivalent           and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
depends on both the proper oil
                                         engine oil of the appropriate            Use of oils that do not meet the
specification and viscosity grade:
                                         viscosity grade. Engine oils             dexos specification, however, may
Specification                            approved to the dexos                    result in reduced performance under
                                         specification will show the dexos        certain circumstances.
Use and ask for engine oils with
                                         symbol on the container. Failure
the dexos™ certification mark. Oils
                                         to use the recommended engine            Viscosity Grade
meeting the requirements of the
                                         oil or equivalent can result in          SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
vehicle should have the dexos
                                         engine damage not covered                grade for the vehicle. Do not
certification mark on the container.
                                         by the vehicle warranty. If you          use other viscosity oils such as
This certification mark indicates that
                                         are unsure whether the oil               SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
the oil has been approved to the
                                         is approved to the dexos
dexos specification.
                                         specification, ask your service
                                         provider.
                                                 Vehicle Care           10-21

Cold Temperature Operation: In an         What to Do with Used Oil
area of extreme cold, where the
                                          Used engine oil contains certain
temperature falls below −29°C
                                          elements that can be unhealthy for
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
                                          your skin and could even cause
be used. An oil of this viscosity
                                          cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
grade will provide easier cold
                                          your skin for very long. Clean your
starting for the engine at extremely
                                          skin and nails with soap and water,
low temperatures. When selecting
                                          or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
                                          properly dispose of clothing or rags
grade, be sure to always select
                                          containing used engine oil. See the
an oil that meets the required
                                          manufacturer's warnings about the
specification, dexos. See
                                          use and disposal of oil products.
“Specification” earlier in this section
for more information.                     Used oil can be a threat to the
                                          environment. If you change your
Engine Oil Additives/Engine               own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
Oil Flushes                               from the filter before disposal. Never
Do not add anything to the oil. The       dispose of oil by putting it in the
recommended oils with the dexos           trash or pouring it on the ground,
specification and displaying the          into sewers, or into streams or
dexos certification mark are all that     bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
is needed for good performance and        it to a place that collects used oil.
engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
10-22       Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System                  When the system has calculated          How to Reset the Engine Oil
                                        that oil life has been diminished,      Life System
When to Change Engine Oil               it indicates that an oil change is
                                        necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE              Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer that                                                engine oil is changed so that the
indicates when to change the            OIL message comes on. Change
                                        the oil as soon as possible within      system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based                                            engine oil change. To reset the
on engine revolutions and engine        the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is
                                        possible that, if driving under the     system:
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the        best conditions, the oil life system    1. Press the TRIP button so
mileage at which an oil change is       might indicate that an oil change          the OIL LIFE percentage is
indicated can vary considerably. For    is not necessary for up to a year.         displayed.
the oil life system to work properly,   The engine oil and filter must be
                                                                                2. Press RESET and hold for
the system must be reset every time     changed at least once a year and,
                                                                                   two seconds. OIL LIFE
the oil is changed.                     at this time, the system must be
                                                                                   REMAINING 100% will appear.
                                        reset. Your dealer has trained
ZO6, ZR1, and Grand Sport models        service people who will perform this    If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
have a racetrack‐ready dry sump         work and reset the system. It is also   message comes back on when the
engine lubrication system. This         important to check the oil regularly    vehicle is started, the engine oil life
high‐performance system operates        over the course of an oil drain         system has not reset. Repeat the
differently than a standard engine      interval and keep it at the proper      procedure.
lubrication system and requires a       level.
special procedure when changing
the engine oil and filter. See Engine   If the system is ever reset
Oil on page 10‑15.                      accidentally, the oil must be
                                        changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
                                        since the last oil change.
                                        Remember to reset the oil life
                                        system whenever the oil is changed.
                                                                                   Vehicle Care           10-23

Automatic Transmission                 additional information or the        Manual Transmission
                                       procedure can be found in the
Fluid                                  service manual. To purchase a
                                                                            Fluid
How to Check Automatic                 service manual, see Service          It is not necessary to check the
Transmission Fluid                     Publications Ordering Information    manual transmission fluid level.
                                       on page 13‑15.                       A transmission fluid leak is the
It is not necessary to check                                                only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
the transmission fluid level.          Notice: Use of the incorrect
                                       automatic transmission fluid         occurs, take the vehicle to the
A transmission fluid leak is the                                            dealer service department and
only reason for fluid loss. If a       may damage the vehicle, and the
                                       damages may not be covered by        have it repaired as soon as
leak occurs, take the vehicle to                                            possible. See Recommended Fluids
the dealer service department          the vehicle warranty. Always use
                                       the automatic transmission fluid     and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for
and have it repaired as soon as                                             the proper fluid to use.
possible.                              listed in Recommended Fluids
                                       and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
The vehicle is not equipped with
a transmission fluid level dipstick.   Change the fluid and filter at the
There is a special procedure for       intervals listed in Scheduled
checking and changing the              Maintenance on page 11‑2, and
transmission fluid. Because this       be sure to use the fluid listed in
procedure is difficult, this should    Recommended Fluids and
be done at the dealer service          Lubricants on page 11‑6.
department. Contact the dealer for
10-24       Vehicle Care

Hydraulic Clutch                        Refer to the Maintenance                  Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
                                        Schedule for the proper fluid to use.
It is not necessary to regularly        See Recommended Fluids and                See Engine Compartment Overview
check clutch fluid unless you           Lubricants on page 11‑6. The fluid        on page 10‑10 for the location of the
suspect there is a leak in the          requires changing every two years.        engine air cleaner/filter.
system. Adding fluid will not correct   See Scheduled Maintenance on              Notice: If you spray water into
a leak. A fluid loss in this system     page 11‑2.                                the engine air cleaner/filter intake
could indicate a problem. Have the                                                and water enters the engine air
system inspected and repaired.          How to Check and Add Fluid
                                                                                  cleaner/filter housing, you could
When to Check and What                  Visually check the clutch fluid           damage your vehicle's engine.
to Use                                  reservoir to make sure the fluid level    The repairs would not be covered
                                        is at the MIN (minimum) line on the       by your warranty. Do not spray
                                        side of the reservoir. The hydraulic      water into the engine air cleaner/
                                        clutch fluid system should be closed      filter intake and/or housing.
                                        and sealed.
                                                                                  If cleaning the vehicle with the hood
                                        Do not remove the cap to check            open, take care not to spray water
                                        the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid   directly near the filter opening of
                                        level. Remove the cap only when           the air cleaner, as shown in the
The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir    necessary to add the proper fluid         illustration, as this could damage
cap has this symbol on it. See          until the level reaches the MIN line.     the vehicle's engine.
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for reservoir location.
                                                                                          Vehicle Care         10-25

When to Inspect the Engine Air           How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter                           Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the    To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
scheduled maintenance intervals          remove the filter from the vehicle
and replace them at the first oil        and lightly shake the filter to release
change after each 80 000 km              loose dust and dirt. If the filter
(50,000 mi) interval. See Scheduled      remains covered with dirt, a new
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more        filter is required.
information. If driving in dusty/dirty   To inspect or replace the engine air
conditions, inspect the filter at each   cleaner/filter:
engine oil change.
                                         1. Open the hood. See Hood on
                                            page 10‑9.                             6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L
                                                                                        V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L
                                                                                         V8 Engine LS7 Similar
                                                                                      A. Tube
                                                                                      B. Clamp
                                                                                      C. Duct
                                                                                   2. Remove the tube (A) from the air
                                                                                      cleaner assembly.
                                                                                   3. Loosen the clamp (B) at the
                                                                                      throttle body and remove the
                                                                                      duct (C).
10-26      Vehicle Care

                                   5. Press on the top and bottom of
                                      the mass air flow sensor
                                      connector (A) and remove.




6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L                                       6.2 L V8 Engine LS9 Shown, 7.0 L
     V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L                                                 V8 Engine LS7 Similar
      V8 Engine LS7 Similar                                            6. To access the air filter element,
   A. Mass Air Flow Sensor                6.2 L V8 Engine LS3             gently pull the air cleaner
      Connector                                                           assembly upward until the
                                                                          fasteners are released from
   B. Connector Lock
                                                                          the retainer pins in the upper
4. Remove the connector lock (B)                                          radiator support.
   located at the bottom of the
                                                                          The LS3 engine has three
   mass air flow sensor
                                                                          retainer pins and the LS7 and
   connector (A).
                                                                          LS9 engines have two.
                                                                                    Vehicle Care            10-27

                                   7. To remove the filter from the
                                      LS3 and LS7 engines, remove                      { WARNING
                                      the six screws (A) securing the
                                      filter cover (B) then pull away to     Operating the engine with the air
                                      gain access to the air filter (C).     cleaner/filter off can cause you
                                                                             or others to be burned. The air
                                      To remove the filter assembly          cleaner not only cleans the air; it
                                      from the LS9 engine, remove the        helps to stop flames if the engine
                                      six screws securing the filter         backfires. Use caution when
                                      cover. The filter cover and the air
                                                                             working on the engine and do not
                                      filter are one piece.
                                                                             drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
                                   8. Inspect or replace the filter or
                                      filter cover assembly. See
6.2 L V8 Engine LS3 Shown, 6.2 L                                            Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
                                      Maintenance Replacement Parts
     V8 Engine LS9 and 7.0 L          on page 11‑8.                         off, dirt can easily get into the
      V8 Engine LS7 Similar                                                 engine, which could damage it.
                                   9. Reverse Steps 2 through 7 to          Always have the air cleaner/filter
  A. Screw                            replace the air cleaner/filter        in place when you are driving.
  B. Filter Cover                     cover.
  C. Filter
10-28       Vehicle Care

Cooling System (Engine)
                                          { WARNING                        WARNING (Continued)
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct    An electric engine cooling fan
working temperature.              under the hood can start up even      Do not run the engine if there is
                                  when the engine is not running        a leak. If you run the engine, it
                                  and can cause injury. Keep            could lose all coolant. That could
                                  hands, clothing, and tools away       cause an engine fire, and you
                                  from any underhood electric fan.      could be burned. Get any leak
                                                                        fixed before you drive the vehicle.

                                                                       Notice: Using coolant other than
                                          { WARNING                    DEX-COOL® can cause premature
                                  Heater and radiator hoses, and       engine, heater core, or radiator
                                  other engine parts, can be very      corrosion. In addition, the engine
                                                                       coolant could require changing
                                  hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
                                                                       sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
                                  you can be burned.
 7.0L Engine shown, 6.2L Engine                                        or 24 months, whichever occurs
                                                         (Continued)   first. Any repairs would not be
             similar
                                                                       covered by the vehicle warranty.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan                                         Always use DEX-COOL
B. Coolant Surge Tank with                                             (silicate-free) coolant in the
   Pressure Cap                                                        vehicle.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care           10-29

Cooling System                           Checking Coolant                      4. Tighten the bleeder valve if there
                                                                                  is coolant flowing out of the
(Intercooler)                                                                     bleeder valve.
The 6.2L LS9 supercharged                                                      5. If there is no coolant flowing out
V8 engine has an intercooler                                                      of the bleeder valve, there could
cooling system. See Engine                                                        be a leak in the system. Tighten
Compartment Overview on                                                           the bleeder valve and contact
page 10‑10 for location of the                                                    the dealer for service.
intercooler.
The intercooler cooling system has                                             Engine Coolant
a special procedure for draining
and adding coolant. Because this                                               The cooling system in the vehicle
procedure is difficult, see the dealer                                         is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
for service if the intercooler is low                                          coolant. This coolant is designed to
on coolant. The procedure can also       1. Verify that the engine and         remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
be found in the service manual. To          intercooler are no longer hot.     240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
purchase a service manual, see                                                 occurs first.
                                         2. Place a cloth to absorb possible
Service Publications Ordering               coolant loss under the driver's    The following explains the cooling
Information on page 13‑15.                  side bleeder valve (A).            system and how to check and add
                                                                               coolant when it is low. If there is a
                                         3. Loosen, but do not completely      problem with engine overheating,
                                            unscrew the bleeder valve to       see Engine Overheating on
                                            check for coolant in the system.   page 10‑34.
10-30     Vehicle Care

What to Use                          Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,         Notice: If extra inhibitors
                                     drinkable water and DEX-COOL          and/or additives are used in
        { WARNING                    coolant. If using this mixture,
                                     nothing else needs to be added.
                                                                           the vehicle cooling system, the
                                                                           vehicle could be damaged. Use
Adding only plain water or some      This mixture:                         only the proper mixture of the
other liquid to the cooling system   .   Gives freezing protection down    engine coolant listed in this
can be dangerous. Plain water            to −37°C (−34°F), outside         manual for the cooling system.
and other liquids, can boil before       temperature.                      See Recommended Fluids and
the proper coolant mixture will.                                           Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more
                                     .   Gives boiling protection up to    information.
The vehicle's coolant warning            129°C (265°F), engine
system is set for the proper             temperature.                      Never dispose of engine coolant
coolant mixture. With plain water                                          by putting it in the trash, pouring
or the wrong mixture, the engine
                                     .   Protects against rust and         it on the ground, or into sewers,
could get too hot but you would          corrosion.                        streams, or bodies of water.
not get the overheat warning. The    .   Will not damage aluminum parts.   Have the coolant changed by an
engine could catch fire and you or                                         authorized service center, familiar
                                     .   Helps keep the proper engine      with legal requirements regarding
others could be burned. Use a            temperature.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable                                          used coolant disposal. This will help
                                     Notice: If an improper coolant        protect the environment and your
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
                                     mixture is used, the engine could     health.
                                     overheat and be badly damaged.
                                     The repair cost would not be
                                     covered by the vehicle warranty.
                                     Too much water in the mixture
                                     can freeze and crack the engine,
                                     radiator, heater core, and other
                                     parts.
                                                                                       Vehicle Care            10-31

Checking Coolant                                                                When the engine is hot, the level
                                                                                could be higher than the FULL
The vehicle must be on a level
                                                                                COLD line. If the coolant is below
surface when checking the coolant
                                                                                the FULL COLD line when the
level.
                                                                                engine is hot, there could be a leak
Check to see if coolant is visible in                                           in the cooling system.
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant   The engine coolant surge tank is       If the coolant is low, add the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is         located toward the rear of the         or take the vehicle to a dealer for
boiling, do not do anything else until   engine compartment on the driver       service.
it cools down. If coolant is visible     side of the vehicle. See Engine
but the coolant level is not at or       Compartment Overview on
above the FULL COLD mark, add a          page 10‑10 for more information on
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable        location.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure       When the engine is cold, the coolant
the cooling system is cool before        level should be at the FULL COLD
this is done. See Engine Coolant on      mark on the coolant surge tank.
page 10‑29 for more information.
10-32      Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Surge Tank                         WARNING (Continued)

                                        the coolant surge tank pressure
         { WARNING                      cap — even a little — they can
You can be burned if you spill          come out at high speed. Never
coolant on hot engine parts.            turn the cap when the cooling
Coolant contains ethylene glycol        system, including the coolant
and it will burn if the engine parts    surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
are hot enough. Do not spill            Wait for the cooling system and
coolant on a hot engine.                coolant surge tank pressure cap
                                        to cool if you ever have to turn
                                        the pressure cap.                     1. When the cooling system,
                                                                                 including the coolant surge tank
         { WARNING                     If coolant is needed, add the proper      pressure cap and upper radiator
                                       DEX-COOL coolant mixture directly         hose, is no longer hot, remove
Steam and scalding liquids from a                                                the pressure cap.
hot cooling system can blow out        to the surge tank, but be sure the
and burn you badly. They are           cooling system is cool before this        Turn the pressure cap slowly
under pressure, and if you turn        is done.                                  counterclockwise about
                                                                                 one-quarter turn and then stop.
                       (Continued)
                                                                                 If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
                                                                                 stop. A hiss means there is still
                                                                                 some pressure left.
                                                                              2. Keep turning the pressure cap
                                                                                 slowly, and remove it.
                                                                                    Vehicle Care          10-33

                                                                             5. Replace the pressure cap. Be
                                                                                sure the pressure cap is
                                                                                hand-tight and fully seated.
                                                                                Check the level in the surge tank
                                                                                when the system has cooled
                                                                                down. If the coolant is not at the
                                                                                proper level, repeat Steps 1
                                                                                through 4, then reinstall the
                                                                                pressure cap. If the coolant is
                                                                                not at the proper level when the
                                                                                system cools down again, see
                                                                                the dealer.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with   4. With the coolant surge tank         Notice: If the pressure cap is
   the proper DEX-COOL coolant           pressure cap off, start the         not tightly installed, coolant loss
   mixture until the level inside        engine and let it run until the     and possible engine damage may
   stabilizes at the FULL COLD           upper radiator hose can be felt     occur. Be sure the cap is properly
   mark on the front of the              getting hot. Any time during this   and tightly secured.
   surge tank.                           procedure, watch out for the
                                         engine cooling fan.
                                         By this time, the coolant level
                                         inside the coolant surge tank
                                         may be lower. If the level is
                                         lower, add more of the proper
                                         mixture to the coolant surge tank
                                         until the level stabilizes at the
                                         FULL COLD mark on the coolant
                                         surge tank.
10-34        Vehicle Care

Engine Overheating                        Then check to see if the engine          If Steam is Coming from the
                                          cooling fan is running. If the engine    Engine
The vehicle has several indicators        is overheating, the fan should be
to warn of engine overheating.            running. If it is not, do not continue
There is an engine coolant                to run the engine and have the
                                                                                            { WARNING
temperature gauge on the                  vehicle serviced.                        Steam from an overheated engine
instrument panel cluster. See             Notice: Engine damage from               can burn you badly, even if you
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge          running your engine without              just open the hood. Stay away
on page 5‑15. The vehicle may             coolant is not covered by the            from the engine if you see or hear
also display a COOLANT OVER               vehicle warranty. See Overheated         steam coming from it. Turn it off
TEMPERATURE message on the                Engine Protection Operating              and get everyone away from the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See      Mode for information on driving          vehicle until it cools down. Wait
Engine Cooling System Messages            to a safe place in an emergency.         until there is no sign of steam or
on page 5‑39 for more information.
                                          Notice: If the engine catches fire       coolant before you open
If the decision is made not to lift the   while driving with no coolant, the       the hood.
hood but to get service help right        vehicle can be badly damaged.
away. See Roadside Assistance                                                      If you keep driving when the
                                          The costly repairs would not be          vehicles engine is overheated,
Program (U.S. and Canada) on              covered by the vehicle warranty.
page 13‑8 or Roadside Assistance                                                   the liquids in it can catch fire. You
                                          See Overheated Engine
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑10.                                                    or others could be badly burned.
                                          Protection Operating Mode on
                                          page 10‑35 for information on            Stop the engine if it overheats,
If the decision is made to lift the
                                          driving to a safe place in an            and get out of the vehicle until the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
                                          emergency.                               engine is cool.
parked on a level surface.
                                                                                                            (Continued)
                                                                                           Vehicle Care            10-35

                                          If the overheat warning is displayed     If there is no sign of steam, idle
       WARNING (Continued)                with no sign of steam:                   the engine for three minutes while
                                          1. Turn the air conditioning off.        parked. If the warning is still
    See Overheated Engine                                                          displayed, turn off the engine until it
    Protection Operating Mode on          2. Turn the heater on to the highest     cools down. Also, see “Overheated
    page 10‑35 for information on            temperature and to the highest        Engine Protection Operating Mode”
    driving to a safe place in an            fan speed. Open the windows as        next in this section.
    emergency.                               necessary.
                                          3. If in a traffic jam, shift to         Overheated Engine
If No Steam is Coming from                   N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is   Protection
the Engine                                   safe to do so, pull off the road,
                                             shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral)
                                                                                   Operating Mode
If an engine overheat warning is             and let the engine idle.              This emergency operating mode
displayed but no steam can be seen                                                 lets the vehicle be driven to a
or heard, the problem may not be          If the temperature overheat gauge is
                                          no longer in the overheat zone or an     safe place, up to 80 km (50 mi),
too serious. Sometimes the engine                                                  in an emergency situation. If an
can get a little too hot when the         overheat warning no longer
                                          displays, the vehicle can be driven.     overheated engine condition exists
vehicle:                                                                           and the messages COOLANT
                                          Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
.     Climbs a long hill on a hot day     for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe        OVER TEMPERATURE and
                                          vehicle distance from the vehicle in     REDUCED ENGINE POWER are
.     Stops after high-speed driving
                                          front. If the warning does not come      displayed, along with the check
.     Idles for long periods in traffic                                            engine light, an overheat protection
                                          back on, continue to drive normally.
                                                                                   mode which alternates firing groups
                                          If the warning continues, pull over,     of cylinders helps prevent engine
                                          stop, and park the vehicle               damage. In this mode, there is a
                                          right away.                              significant loss in power and engine
                                                                                   performance.
10-36       Vehicle Care

Driving extended distances in the       When to Check Power Steering             The level should be at the FULL
overheat protection mode should be      Fluid                                    COLD mark. If necessary, add only
avoided.                                                                         enough fluid to bring the level up to
                                        It is not necessary to regularly         the mark.
Notice: After driving in the            check power steering fluid unless
overheated engine protection            there is a leak suspected in the
operating mode, to avoid engine         system or an unusual noise is
damage, allow the engine to cool        heard. A fluid loss in this system
before attempting any repair.           could indicate a problem. Have the
The engine oil will be severely         system inspected and repaired.
degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and        How to Check Power Steering
reset the oil life system. See          Fluid
Engine Oil on page 10‑15.               To check the power steering fluid:
Power Steering Fluid                    1. Turn the ignition off and let the
                                           engine compartment cool down.
                                        2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
                                           reservoir clean.                      When the engine compartment
                                                                                 is hot, the level should be at the
                                        3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
                                                                                 HOT mark. When the engine
                                           dipstick with a clean rag.
                                                                                 compartment is cool, the level
                                        4. Replace the cap and completely        should be at the FULL COLD mark.
                                           tighten it.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑10 for reservoir location.   5. Remove the cap again and look
                                           at the fluid level on the dipstick.
                                           There are markings on both
                                           sides of the dipstick.
                                                                                     Vehicle Care          10-37

What to Use                              Adding Washer Fluid
                                                                              .   Do not mix water with
                                                                                  ready-to-use washer fluid.
To determine what kind of fluid to                                                Water can cause the solution
use, see Recommended Fluids and                                                   to freeze and damage the
Lubricants on page 11‑6. Always                                                   washer fluid tank and other
use the proper fluid.                                                             parts of the washer system.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid                                                Also, water does not clean as
may damage the vehicle and the                                                    well as washer fluid.
damages may not be covered by                                                 .   Fill the washer fluid tank only
                                         Open the cap with the washer
the vehicle's warranty. Always                                                    three-quarters full when it is
                                         symbol on it. Add washer fluid
use the correct fluid listed in                                                   very cold. This allows for
                                         until the tank is full. See Engine
Recommended Fluids and                                                            fluid expansion if freezing
                                         Compartment Overview on
Lubricants on page 11‑6.                                                          occurs, which could damage
                                         page 10‑10 for reservoir location.
                                                                                  the tank if it is
Washer Fluid                             Notice:                                  completely full.
                                          .   When using concentrated         .   Do not use engine coolant
What to Use
                                              washer fluid, follow the            (antifreeze) in the windshield
When the vehicle needs windshield             manufacturer's instructions         washer. It can damage the
washer fluid, be sure to read the             for adding water.                   windshield washer system
manufacturer's instructions before                                                and paint.
use. If the vehicle will be operating
in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
10-38      Vehicle Care

Brakes                                Notice: Continuing to drive with      Notice: Continuing to drive with
                                      worn-out brake pads could result      worn-out brake pads could result
Brake Wear (Except                    in costly brake repair.               in costly brake repair.
ZR1 and ZO6)                          Some driving conditions or climates   .   Make sure that the brakes have
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc    can cause a brake squeal when the         been given sufficient time to cool
brake pads have built-in wear         brakes are first applied or lightly       and then set the park brake.
indicators that make a high-pitched   applied. This does not mean
warning sound when the brake pads     something is wrong with the brakes.
are worn and new pads are needed.     Brake linings should always be
The sound can come and go or be       replaced as complete axle sets.
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the      Brake Wear (ZR1 and
brake pedal firmly.                   ZO6 Only)
                                      The ZR1 and ZO6 models do not
         { WARNING                    have built-in brake pad wear
                                      indicators and periodic visual
 The brake wear warning sound         inspection of the brake pads is
 means that soon the brakes will      required to determine when to
 not work well. That could lead to    replace the brake pads.                               Rear
 a crash. When the brake wear
 warning sound is heard, have the
 vehicle serviced.
                                                                                      Vehicle Care           10-39

                                                                               Brake Rotor Wear
                                                                               ZR1 and ZO6 models have ceramic
                                                                               brake rotors. Rotors should be
                                                                               visually inspected whenever the
                                                                               brake pads are replaced. Rotors
                                                                               also need to be weighed before
                                                                               brake pads are replaced to confirm
                                                                               that the rotor mass is greater than
                                                                               the wear‐out mass printed on the
                                                                               rotor. The rotor can be reused if the
                                                                               weight of the rotor is above the
                                                                               mass limit. Rotor inspection and
                Front                    The ZR1 and ZO6 also have an          weighing methods can be found in
.   Brake pads can be visually           electronic brake pad wear sensor      the service manual. See Service
    inspected through the wheel by       system. When pads are worn, the       Publications Ordering Information
    inspecting the outer brake pads      CHANGE BRAKE PADS message             on page 13‑15.
    at each wheel.                       displays in the Driver Information
                                         Center. See Brake System
.   Brake pads should be replaced        Messages on page 5‑36.
    when worn to 2 mm of pad
    thickness. New pads are 10 mm        Some driving conditions or climates
    thick.                               can cause a brake squeal when the
                                         brakes are first applied or lightly
.   In addition, brake pad inspection    applied. This does not mean
    is required any time the tires are   something is wrong with the brakes.
    removed.
                                         Brake linings should always be
                                         replaced as complete axle sets.
10-40       Vehicle Care

Brake Rotor Protector                   A rotor protector should always be
                                        installed before any wheel removal.
          { WARNING                     The protector can be installed by
                                        feeding it through the wheel spokes
 Ceramic rotors will be very hot        and slipping it over the outer edge
 after operation and touching them      of the rotor. Leave the protector
 may cause burns. Be sure brake         in place, over the rotor edge, until
 system is completely cool prior to     the wheel is re‐installed. Rotor
 installation of protector, or coming   protectors are available through
 in contact with them.                  your dealer.
                                        Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Rotors may be chipped           See your dealer if the brake pedal
if hard contact is made with the        does not return to normal height,
wheel during wheel installation         or if there is a rapid increase in
or removal. Always use the rotor        pedal travel. This could be a sign
protectors. Be sure to carefully        that brake service might be
follow wheel removal and                required.
installation instructions.
                                        Brake Adjustment
                                        Every brake stop, the disc brakes
                                        automatically adjust for wear.
                                                                                        Vehicle Care          10-41

Replacing Brake System Parts            Brake Fluid                             There are only two reasons why the
                                                                                brake fluid level in the reservoir
The braking system on a vehicle is
                                                                                might go down:
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together                                           .    The brake fluid level goes down
if the vehicle is to have really good                                               because of normal brake lining
braking. The vehicle was designed                                                   wear. When new linings are
and tested with top-quality brake                                                   installed, the fluid level goes
parts. When parts of the braking                                                    back up.
system are replaced — for example,      The brake master cylinder reservoir     .   A fluid leak in the brake
when the brake linings wear down        is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See       hydraulic system can also cause
and new ones are installed — be         Engine Compartment Overview on              a low fluid level. Have the brake
sure to get new approved                page 10‑10 for the location of the          hydraulic system fixed, since a
replacement parts. If this is not       reservoir.                                  leak means that sooner or later
done, the brakes might not work                                                     the brakes will not work well.
properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong                                            Do not top off the brake fluid.
for the vehicle, the balance between                                            Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
the front and rear brakes can                                                   If fluid is added when the linings
change — for the worse. The                                                     are worn, there will be too much
braking performance expected can                                                fluid when new brake linings are
change in many other ways if the                                                installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
wrong replacement brake parts are                                               as necessary, only when work is
installed.                                                                      done on the brake hydraulic system.
10-42       Vehicle Care

                                        Checking Brake Fluid                   What to Add
          { WARNING                     Check brake fluid by looking at the    Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
 If too much brake fluid is added, it   brake fluid reservoir. See Engine      from a sealed container. See
 can spill on the engine and burn,      Compartment Overview on                Recommended Fluids and
 if the engine is hot enough. You       page 10‑10.                            Lubricants on page 11‑6.
 or others could be burned, and         The fluid level should be above        Always clean the brake fluid
 the vehicle could be damaged.          the MIN mark on the reservoir. If it   reservoir cap and the area around
 Add brake fluid only when work         is not, have the brake hydraulic       the cap before removing it. This
 is done on the brake hydraulic         system checked to see if there is      helps keep dirt from entering the
 system. See “Checking Brake            a leak.                                reservoir.
 Fluid” in this section.                After work is done on the brake
                                        hydraulic system, make sure the                 { WARNING
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule       level is between the MIN and MAX
                                        marks.                                  With the wrong kind of fluid in
to determine when to check the
                                                                                the brake hydraulic system, the
brake fluid. See Scheduled
                                                                                brakes might not work well. This
Maintenance on page 11‑2.
                                                                                could cause a crash. Always use
                                                                                the proper brake fluid.
                                                                                      Vehicle Care           10-43

Notice:                                 For battery replacement, see your      Some vehicles have a battery
 .   Using the wrong fluid              dealer or the service manual. To       charger package. Follow the
     can badly damage brake             purchase a service manual, see         instructions provided with the
     hydraulic system parts. For        Service Publications Ordering          battery charger package to keep
     example, just a few drops          Information on page 13‑15.             the battery charged when the
     of mineral-based oil, such                                                vehicle is not in use. For vehicles
     as engine oil, in the brake                  { DANGER                     without a battery charger, see the
                                                                               following information.
     hydraulic system can
     damage brake hydraulic              Battery posts, terminals, and         Infrequent Usage: Remove the
     system parts so badly that          related accessories contain lead      black, negative (−) cable from the
     they will have to be replaced.      and lead compounds, chemicals         battery to keep the battery from
     Do not let someone put in           known to the State of California to   running down.
     the wrong kind of fluid.            cause cancer and reproductive
                                                                               See “Power Window Initialization” in
                                         harm. Wash hands after handling.
 .   If brake fluid is spilled on the                                          Power Windows on page 2‑18.
     vehicle's painted surfaces,                                               Extended Storage: Remove the
     the paint finish can be            Vehicle Storage                        black, negative (−) cable from the
     damaged. Be careful not                                                   battery or use a battery trickle
     to spill brake fluid on the
     vehicle. If you do, wash it
                                                  { WARNING                    charger.
     off immediately.                    Batteries have acid that can burn
                                         you and gas that can explode.
Battery                                  You can be badly hurt if you are
Refer to the replacement number on       not careful. See Jump Starting on
the original battery label when a        page 10‑82 for tips on working
new battery is needed.                   around a battery without
                                         getting hurt.
10-44       Vehicle Care

Rear Axle                                If the level is below the bottom of        2. Firmly apply both the parking
                                         the fill plug hole, some lubricant will       brake and the regular brake.
When to Check Lubricant                  need to be added. Add enough                  See Parking Brake on
It is not necessary to regularly         lubricant to raise the level to the           page 9‑35.
check rear axle fluid unless a leak is   bottom of the fill plug hole.                 Do not use the accelerator
suspected or an unusual noise is         What to Use                                   pedal, and be ready to turn off
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a                                                   the engine immediately if it
problem. Have it inspected and           To add lubricant when the level is            starts.
repaired.                                low or to completely refill after
                                         draining, see Recommended Fluids           3. For automatic transmission
How to Check Lubricant                   and Lubricants on page 11‑6. Then             vehicles, try to start the engine
                                         fill to the bottom of the fill plug hole      in each gear. The vehicle
                                         with the required lubricant.                  should start only in P (Park) or
                                                                                       N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
                                         Starter Switch Check                          in any other position, contact
                                                                                       your dealer for service.
                                                    { WARNING                          For manual transmission
                                                                                       vehicles, put the shift lever in
                                          When you are doing this                      Neutral, push the clutch pedal
                                          inspection, the vehicle could                down halfway, and try to start
                                          move suddenly. If the vehicle                the engine. The vehicle should
                                          moves, you or others could be                start only when the clutch pedal
                                          injured.                                     is pushed down all the way to
                                                                                       the floor. If the vehicle starts
To get an accurate reading, the                                                        when the clutch pedal is not
                                         1. Before starting this check, be             pushed all the way down,
vehicle should be on a level                sure there is enough room
surface.                                                                               contact your dealer for service.
                                            around the vehicle.
                                                                                     Vehicle Care           10-45

Automatic Transmission                3. With the engine off, turn the       Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
                                         ignition on, but do not start the   vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Shift Lock Control                       engine. Without applying the        your foot on the regular brake, set
Function Check                           regular brake, try to move the      the parking brake.
                                         shift lever out of P (Park) with    .   To check the parking brake's
          { WARNING                      normal effort. If the shift lever
                                         moves out of P (Park), contact
                                                                                 holding ability: With the engine
                                                                                 running and the transmission in
 When you are doing this                 your dealer for service.                N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
 inspection, the vehicle could                                                   pressure from the regular brake
 move suddenly. If the vehicle        Park Brake and P (Park)                    pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
 moves, you or others could be        Mechanism Check                            held by the parking brake only.
 injured.                                                                    .   To check the P (Park)
                                                { WARNING                        mechanism's holding ability:
1. Before starting this check, be                                                With the engine running, shift
   sure there is enough room           When you are doing this check,            to P (Park). Then release the
   around the vehicle. It should be    the vehicle could begin to move.          parking brake followed by the
   parked on a level surface.          You or others could be injured            regular brake.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.     and property could be damaged.
                                                                             Contact your dealer if service is
   See Parking Brake on                Make sure there is room in front      required.
   page 9‑35.                          of the vehicle in case it begins to
                                       roll. Be ready to apply the regular
   Be ready to apply the regular       brake at once should the vehicle
   brake immediately if the vehicle    begin to move.
   begins to move.
10-46       Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade Replacement                 To remove the wiper blade             3. Press down on the blade
                                        assembly:                                assembly pivot locking tab (C).
Windshield wiper blades should be                                                Pull down on the blade
inspected for wear and cracking.        1. Open the hood to gain access to
                                           the windshield wipers.                assembly (A) to release it from
See Scheduled Maintenance on                                                     the wiper arm hook (F).
page 11‑2 for more information.         2. Lift the wiper arm away from the
                                           windshield.                        4. Remove the insert from the
Replacement blades come in                                                       blade assembly (A).
different types and are removed in
different ways. For the proper type                                              The insert has two notches at
and length, see Maintenance                                                      one end that are locked by the
Replacement Parts on page 11‑8.                                                  bottom claws of the blade
                                                                                 assembly. At the notch end, pull
It is a good idea to clean or replace                                            the insert from the blade
the wiper blade assembly every six                                               assembly.
months. Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not be
covered by the vehicle's warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.                      A. Blade Assembly
                                           B. Arm Assembly
                                           C. Locking Tab
                                           D. Blade Pivot
                                           E. Hook Slot
                                           F. Arm Hook
                                                                                       Vehicle Care         10-47

To install the new wiper insert:       2. Be sure the notches are locked       Installation guide:
                                          by the bottom claws. Make sure
                                          that all other claws are properly
                                          locked on both sides of the
                                          insert slots.
                                       3. Put the blade assembly pivot in
                                          the wiper arm hook. Pull up until
                                          the pivot locking tab locks in the
                                          hook slot.
                                       4. Carefully lower the wiper arm
                                          and blade assembly onto the
                                          windshield.

1. Slide the insert (D), notched end                                           A. Claw in Notch
   last, into the end with the two                                             B. Correct Installation
   blade claws (A). Slide the insert
   all the way through the blade                                               C. Incorrect Installation
   claws at the opposite end (B).
   The plastic caps (C) will be                                                Windshield Replacement
   forced off as the insert is fully
                                                                               The windshield is part of the
   installed.
                                                                               Head-Up Display (HUD) system.
                                                                               If you ever have to get the
                                                                               windshield replaced, get one that
                                                                               is designed for HUD or the HUD
                                                                               image may look out of focus.
10-48       Vehicle Care

Headlamp Aiming                       Bulb Replacement                       High Intensity Discharge
Headlamp aim has been preset at       For the proper type of replacement     (HID) Lighting
the factory and should need no        bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
further adjustment.                   page 10‑50.                                      { WARNING
However, if the vehicle is damaged    For any bulb‐changing procedure         The low beam high intensity
in a crash, the headlamp aim may      not listed in this section, contact     discharge lighting system
be affected. Aim adjustment to the    your dealer.
                                                                              operates at a very high voltage.
low-beam headlamps may be
                                                                              If you try to service any of the
necessary if oncoming drivers flash   Halogen Bulbs                           system components, you could be
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).                                                           seriously injured. Have your
                                                { WARNING                     dealer or a qualified technician
If the headlamps need to be                                                   service them.
re-aimed, it is recommended that       Halogen bulbs have pressurized
the vehicle be taken to the dealer     gas inside and can burst if you
for service.                           drop or scratch the bulb. You or      The vehicle may have HID
                                       others could be injured. Be sure      headlamps. After an HID headlamp
                                       to read and follow the instructions   bulb has been replaced, you may
                                       on the bulb package.                  notice that the beam is a slightly
                                                                             different shade than it was originally.
                                                                             This is normal.
                                                                               Vehicle Care          10-49

Headlamps, Front Turn               To replace a high-beam or front
                                    parking/turn signal bulb:
Signal and Parking
Lamps                               1. Turn the wheel to allow access
                                       to the wheel well.




                                                                        4. Remove the headlamp bulb by
                                                                           releasing the outer tabs from the
                                                                           socket.
                                                                        5. Remove the front parking/turn
A. High-beam Headlamp                                                      signal bulb by turning the bulb
                                    2. Remove the three outer              socket counterclockwise.
B. Low-beam Headlamp                   fasteners to move the access     6. Replace the high-beam
C. Front Parking/Turn Signal           panel back.                         headlamp bulb with a new bulb
If the low-beam headlamp needs to   3. Remove the outer cover to           and reattach to the bulb socket.
be replaced, see your dealer. See      expose the high-beam headlamp       Replace the front parking/turn
High Intensity Discharge (HID)         bulb socket.                        signal bulb by turning the bulb
Lighting on page 10‑48 for more                                            socket clockwise.
information.
                                                                        7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to
                                                                           reinstall.
10-50       Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal,                5. Push the new bulb in the bulb        Electrical System
                                          socket until it snaps into place.
and Stoplamps
To replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn
                                       6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by       Electrical System
                                          first lining up the tabs on the
signal bulb:                              bottom of the lamp assembly
                                                                               Overload
1. Remove the screw from the top          with the tabs in the vehicle, then   The vehicle has fuses and circuit
   of the lamp assembly.                  slide it in.                         breakers to protect against an
                                       7. Replace the screw at the top of      electrical system overload.
                                          the lamp assembly.                   When the current electrical load is
                                                                               too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
                                       Replacement Bulbs                       and closes, protecting the circuit
                                                                               until the current load returns to
                                          Exterior Lamp          Bulb
                                                                               normal or the problem is fixed. This
                                                                Number
                                                                               greatly reduces the chance of circuit
                                       Front Parking/Turn                      overload and fire caused by
                                       Signal                    5702KA        electrical problems.
                                       Headlamp,
                                       High‐Beam Lamp              H9
                                       Sidemarker Lamp       194LL (W3W)
2. Tilt the lamp assembly
                                       Stoplamp/Taillamp/
   toward you.
                                       Turn Signal Lamp          3047K
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter
   turn counterclockwise and pull      For replacement bulbs not listed
   it out.                             here, contact your dealer.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to
   remove it from the socket.
                                                                                        Vehicle Care           10-51

Fuses and circuit breakers protect      Windshield Wipers                        Look at the silver-colored band
the following in the vehicle:                                                    inside the fuse. If the band is broken
                                        If the wiper motor overheats due to
.   Headlamp Wiring                                                              or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
                                        heavy snow or ice, the windshield
                                                                                 you replace a bad fuse with a new
.   Windshield Wiper Motor              wipers will stop until the motor cools
                                                                                 one of the identical size and rating.
                                        and will then restart.
.   Power Windows and Other                                                      If you ever have a problem on the
    Power Accessories                   Although the circuit is protected
                                                                                 road and do not have a spare fuse,
                                        from electrical overload, overload
Replace a bad fuse with a new one                                                you can borrow one that has the
                                        due to heavy snow or ice may
of the identical size and rating.                                                same amperage. Just pick some
                                        cause wiper linkage damage.
                                                                                 feature of the vehicle that you can
If there is a problem on the road       Always clear ice and heavy snow
                                                                                 get along without — like the radio or
and a fuse needs to be replaced,        from the windshield before using
                                                                                 cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,
the same amperage fuse can be           the windshield wipers.
                                                                                 if it is the correct amperage.
borrowed. Choose some feature of        If the overload is caused by an          Replace it as soon as you can.
the vehicle that is not needed to use   electrical problem and not snow or
and replace it as soon as possible.                                              Vehicles with the ZR1 package have
                                        ice, be sure to get it fixed.
                                                                                 an intercooler relay located on the
Headlamp Wiring                                                                  fan shroud. See your dealer.
                                        Fuses and Circuit
An electrical overload may cause                                                 Vehicles with the ZR1 package also
the lamps to go on and off, or in       Breakers                                 have a fuel system mini-fuse. It is
some cases to remain off. Have the      The wiring circuits in the vehicle are   located near the battery in the
headlamp wiring checked right away      protected from short circuits by a       battery storage compartment in the
if the lamps go on and off or           combination of J-Case fuses,             rear of the vehicle.
remain off.                             mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This
                                        greatly reduces the chance of fires
                                        caused by electrical problems.
10-52      Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
There is one fuse block in the
engine compartment located on the
passenger side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑10 for more information on
location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.




                                     For ZR1 models, the Fuel System      Fuse         Usage
                                     fuse is located at the battery.
                                                                                 Transmission
                                     The vehicle may not be equipped       1     Control Module/
                                     with all of the fuses, relays, and          Transmission
                                     features shown.
                                                                                 Horn, Alternator
                                                                           2
                                                                                 Sense
                                                        Vehicle Care         10-53

Fuse           Usage       Fuse         Usage          Fuse         Usage
       Antilock Brake             Odd Numbered                Fuel Pump
                            12                          20
 3     System (ABS)/Real          Fuel Injectors              (except ZR1)
       Time Damping
                                  Electronic                  Driver Side
 4     Wiper                13    Suspension            21    Low-Beam
                                  Control (Option)            Headlamp
       Stoplamps/
 5
       Back-Up Lamps              Canister Purge        22    Front Fog Lamp
                            14    Solenoid, Mass Air
 6     Oxygen Sensor                                          Passenger Side
                                  Flow Sensor
                                                        23    High-Beam
 7     Battery Main 5
                                  Air Conditioner             Headlamp
                            15
 8     Parking Lamps              Compressor
                                                              Driver Side
       Powertrain Relay           Even Numbered         24    High-Beam
                            16
 9     Input/Electronic           Fuel Injectors              Headlamp
       Throttle Control
                            17    Windshield Washer           Engine Control
       Manual                                                 Module (ECM)/
                            18    Headlamp Washer
 10    Transmission                                           Transmission
                                                        56
       Solenoids                  Passenger Side              Control
                            19    Low-Beam                    Module (TCM)/
       Antilock Brake
 11                               Headlamp                    Easy Key Module
       System
10-54         Vehicle Care

  J-Style             Usage             Micro-Relays           Usage     Mini-Relays           Usage
  Fuses
                                                          Parking                      Windshield Wiper
                                                                             45
    25          Cooling Fan                     37        Lamps,                       On/Off
                                                          Foglamps
    26          Battery Main 3                                                         Low-Beam
                                                                             47
                                                          Front                        Headlamp
                Antilock Brake                  38
    27                                                    Fog Lamp
                System
                                                          High-Beam      Spare Fuses           Usage
                Heating/Ventilation/            39
                                                          Headlamp           48        Spare
    28          Air Conditioning
                Blower                                    Headlamp           49        Spare
                                                46
                                                          Washer
    29          Battery Main 2                                               50        Spare
                                                          Fuel Pump
    30          Starter                         55                           51        Spare
                                                          (except ZR1)
    31          Audio Amplifier                                              52        Spare
    32          Intercooler Pump       Mini-Relays           Usage
                                                                             53        Spare
    33          Battery Main 1             40        Rear Defog
                                                                             54        Fuse Puller
                                                     Windshield Wiper
                                           41
  Micro-Relays            Usage                      High/Low              Diodes              Usage
         34          Horn                            Windshield Wiper        §         Diode 1
                                           42
                     Air                             Run/Accessory
                                                                             §         Wiper
         35          Conditioning          43        Crank
                     Compressor                                              §         Diode 2
                                                     Powertrain
                                           44
                     Windshield                      Ignition 1
         36
                     Washer
                                                                                 Vehicle Care         10-55

Instrument Panel Fuse
Block
The instrument panel fuse block is
located on the passenger side of the
vehicle, under the instrument panel
and under the toe-board.
Remove the carpet and toe-board
covering to access the fuse block by
pulling at the top of each corner of
the panel. Open the fuse block
cover to access the fuses.
You can remove fuses using the
fuse puller.




                                       The vehicle may not be equipped         Fuses          Usage
                                       with all of the fuses, relays, and
                                       features shown.                                  Brake
                                                                            BTSI SOL/   Transmission Shift
                                            Fuses               Usage
                                                                            STR         Interlock, Steering
                                       BCK/                                 WHL LCK     Wheel
                                                       Back‐up Lamps
                                       UP LAMP                                          Column Lock
                                       BLANK           Not Used                         Cluster, Heads‐Up
                                                                            CLSTR/HUD
                                                                                        Display
                                       BLANK           Not Used
10-56      Vehicle Care

   Fuses           Usage             Fuses           Usage              Fuses             Usage
CRUISE       Cruise Control                    Heating Ventilation/   REVERSE
                                  HVAC/                                           Reverse Lamps
SWTCH        Switch                            Air Conditioning,      LAMPS
                                  PWR SND
                                               Power Sounder
CTSY/LAMP    Courtesy Lamp                                            RUN CRNK    Run/Crank Relay
                                  IGN SWTCH/ Ignition Switch,
DR LCK       Door Locks                                                           Sensing and
                                  INTR SNSR Intrusion Sensor
                                                                      SDM/AOS     Diagnostic Module,
DRIV DR
             Driver Door Switch              Electric Inside          SWTCH       Automatic
SWITCH
                                             Rearview Mirror,         AIRBAG      Occupant Sensing
             Engine Control       ISRVM/HVAC Heating,                             Module, Airbag
ECM
             Module (ECM)                    Ventilation, Air
                                                                      SPARE       Spare
                                             Conditioning
             Exhaust
                                                                      SPARE       Spare
             Module (ZO6 &                     OnStar®
                                  ONSTAR
EXH MDL      ZR1),                             (if equipped)          SPARE       Spare
             Spare (Coupe and
                                  RDO/                                SPARE       Spare
             Convertible)                      Radio, S‐Band
                                  S‐BAND
                                                                      STOP LAMP   Stop Lamp
GM LAN
             GM LAN Devices                    Rear Fog Lamp,
RUN/CRNK                                                                          Steering Wheel
                                               Assembly Line          SWC DM
                                  REAR FOG/                                       Dimming
HTD SEAT/    Heated Seat,                      Diagnostic Link
                                  ALDL/TOP                            TELE        Telescope Switch,
WPR RLY      Wiper Relays                      Connector,
                                  SWTCH                               SWTCH/      Memory Seat
                                               Convertible Top
                                               Switch                 MSM         Module
                                                                    Vehicle Care         10-57

  Fuses            Usage         Fuses          Usage             Fuses          Usage
TONNEAU                        AUX PWR    Auxiliary Power                  Power Seats,
           Tonneau Release                                     PWR
RELSE                                                                      Memory Seat
                               BLANK      Not Used             SEATS MSM
                                                                           Module
           Tonneau Pulldown
TPA                            BLANK      Not Used
           Actuator                                            PWR/
                                                                          Power Windows,
                               BLANK      Not Used             WNDWS/
                                                                          Trunk, Fuel Door
  Fuses            Usage                                       TRUNK/
                               BLANK      Not Used                        Release
                                                               FUEL RELSE
BLANK      Blank               BLANK      Not Used
                                                               TRUNK
BLANK      Blank               BLANK      Not Used                         Trunk Release
                                                               RELSE
FUEL DR                        BLANK      Not Used             WPR DWELL Wiper Dwell
           Fuel Door Release
RELSE
                               DRVR                                        Windshield Wiper/
REAR/FOG   Rear Fog Lamps                 Driver Heated Seat   WPR/WSW
                               HTD SEAT                                    Washer
TONNEAU                        LTR        Cigarette Lighter
           Tonneau Release
RELSE
                               PASS       Passenger
TRUNK                          HTD SEAT   Heated Seat
           Trunk Release
RELSE
10-58        Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires                           WARNING (Continued)                    WARNING (Continued)
Tires                                  .   Underinflated tires pose the       .   Improperly repaired tires
                                           same danger as overloaded              can cause a crash. Only the
Your new vehicle comes with                tires. The resulting crash             dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a               could cause serious injury.            service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. If you          Check all tires frequently to          replace, dismount, and mount
ever have questions about your             maintain the recommended               the tires.
tire warranty and where to                 pressure. Tire pressure            .   Do not spin the tires in
obtain service, see your vehicle           should be checked when the             excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
Warranty booklet for details. For          tires are cold.                        on slippery surfaces such
additional information refer to        .   Overinflated tires are more            as snow, mud, ice, etc.
the tire manufacturer.                     likely to be cut, punctured,           Excessive spinning may
                                           or broken by a sudden impact           cause the tires to explode.
           { WARNING                       — such as when hitting a
                                           pothole. Keep tires at the
                                                                            See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
  .   Poorly maintained and                recommended pressure.
                                                                            Operation on page 10‑67 for
      improperly used tires are        .   Worn or old tires can cause a    inflation pressure adjustment for
      dangerous.                           crash. If the tread is badly     high-speed driving.
  .   Overloading the tires can            worn, replace them.
      cause overheating as a result    .   Replace any tires that have
      of too much flexing. There           been damaged by impacts
      could be a blowout and a             with potholes, curbs, etc.
      serious crash. See Vehicle
      Load Limits on page 9‑14.                               (Continued)
                         (Continued)
                                                                                           Vehicle Care           10-59

Winter Tires                             If using snow tires:
                                         .   Use tires of the same brand and
                                                                                              { WARNING
Consider installing winter tires on
the vehicle if frequent driving on           tread type on all four wheel            When the low tire warning light is
snow or ice covered roads is                 positions.                              displayed on the instrument panel
expected. All season tires provide       .   Use only radial ply tires of the        cluster, your vehicle's handling
good overall performance on most             same size, load range, and              capabilities will be reduced during
surfaces, but they may not offer the         speed rating as the original            severe maneuvers. If you drive
traction or the same level of                equipment tires.                        too fast, you could lose control of
performance as winter tires on snow                                                  your vehicle. You or others could
                                         Winter tires with the same speed
or ice covered roads.                                                                be injured. Do not drive over
                                         rating as the original equipment tires
Winter tires, in general, are            may not be available for H, V, W, Y,        55 mph (90 km/h) when the low
designed for increased traction on       and ZR speed rated tires. If winter         tire warning light is displayed.
snow and ice covered roads. With         tires with a lower speed rating are         Drive cautiously and check your
winter tires, there may be decreased     chosen, never exceed the tire's             tire pressures as soon as
dry road traction, increased road        maximum speed capability.                   you can.
noise, and shorter tread life. After
changing to winter tires, be alert for   Run-Flat Tires                             If a tire goes flat, you will not
changes in vehicle handling and
braking.                                 This vehicle, when new, had run-flat       need to stop on the side of the
                                         tires. There is no spare tire, no tire     road to change the tire. You can
See your dealer for details              changing equipment, and no place           keep driving, however, if driven
regarding winter tire availability and   to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat   too far or too fast, the tire may
proper tire selection. Also, see         tires perform so well without any air      be permanently damaged and
Buying New Tires on page 10‑73.          that a Tire Pressure Monitor System        you might not be able to continue
                                         (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire      driving on the tire. The tire can
                                         has lost pressure.                         be driven with no air pressure for
                                                                                    up to 105 km (65 miles) at speeds
                                                                                    slower than 90 km/h (55 mph).
10-60       Vehicle Care

The shorter the distance you drive        To locate the nearest GM or run-flat   Notice: Using liquid sealants
and the slower the speed, the             servicing facility, call Roadside      can damage the tire valves and
greater the chance that the tire will     Assistance. For phone numbers          tire pressure monitor sensors in
not have to be replaced. As soon          and Roadside Service details see       the vehicle's run-flat tires. This
as possible, contact the nearest          Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.      damage would not be covered
authorized GM or run-flat servicing       and Canada) on page 13‑8 or            by warranty. Do not use liquid
facility for inspection and repair or     Roadside Assistance Program            sealants in the vehicle's run-flat
replacement. When a tire is filled        (Mexico) on page 13‑10.                tires.
with air, it provides a cushion           The valve stems on your run-flat
between the road and the wheel.           tires have sensors that are part of    Low-Profile Tires
Because you will not have this            the Tire Pressure Monitor System
cushion when driving on a deflated                                               Low‐Profile Performance Tire
                                          (TPMS). See Tire Pressure Monitor
run-flat tire, try to avoid potholes      System on page 10‑68. These            The original equipment tires on
and other road hazards that could         sensors contain batteries which are    your vehicle are classified as
damage the tire and/or wheel              designed to last for 10 years under
beyond repair. When a tire has been                                              low‐profile performance tires.
                                          normal driving conditions. See your    These tires are designed for
damaged, or if you have driven any        dealer if you ever need to have a
distance on a run-flat tire, check                                               very responsive driving on wet
                                          wheel replaced, or if the sensors
with an authorized run-flat tire                                                 or dry pavement. You may also
                                          ever need replacement.
service center to determine whether                                              notice more road noise with
the tire can be repaired or should be                                            low‐profile tires and that they
replaced. To maintain your vehicle's                                             tend to wear faster.
run-flat feature, all replacement tires
must be run-flat tires.
                                                                                  Vehicle Care         10-61

Notice: If the vehicle has                                                  (B) TPC Spec (Tire
low‐profile tires, they are more                                            Performance Criteria
susceptible to damage from                                                  Specification): Original
road hazards or curb impact                                                 equipment tires designed to
than standard profile tires.                                                GM's specific tire performance
Tire and/or wheel assembly                                                  criteria have a TPC specification
damage can occur when                                                       code molded onto the sidewall.
coming into contact with road                                               GM's TPC specifications meet or
hazards like, potholes,                                                     exceed all federal safety
or sharp edged objects,                                                     guidelines.
or when sliding into a curb.                                                (C) DOT (Department of
The vehicle warranty does not      Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example        Transportation): The
cover this type of damage.                                                  Department of Transportation
Keep tires set to the correct      (A) Tire Size: The tire size is
                                   a combination of letters and             (DOT) code indicates that
inflation pressure and, when                                                the tire is in compliance with
possible avoid contact with        numbers used to define a
                                   particular tire's width, height,         the U.S. Department of
curbs, potholes, and other                                                  Transportation Motor Vehicle
road hazards.                      aspect ratio, construction type,
                                   and service description. See the         Safety Standards.
Tire Sidewall Labeling             “Tire Size” illustration later in this
                                   section for more detail.
Useful information about a tire
is molded into its sidewall.
The examples show a typical
passenger tire sidewall.
10-62      Vehicle Care

(D) Tire Identification Number      (G) Maximum Cold Inflation           vehicle tire engineered to
(TIN): The letters and numbers      Load Limit: Maximum load             standards set by the U.S. Tire
following the DOT code are the      that can be carried and the          and Rim Association.
Tire Identification Number (TIN).   maximum pressure needed to           (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
The TIN shows the                   support that load.                   number indicates the tire section
manufacturer and plant code,                                             width in millimeters from
tire size, and date the tire was    Tire Designations                    sidewall to sidewall.
manufactured. The TIN is
                                    Tire Size                            (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may    The following is an example of a     number that indicates the tire
have the date of manufacture.       typical passenger vehicle            height‐to‐width measurements.
                                    tire size.                           For example, if the tire size
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type                                         aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
of cord and number of plies in                                           item C of the illustration, it would
the sidewall and under the tread.                                        mean that the tire's sidewall is
(F) Uniform Tire Quality                                                 60 percent as high as it is wide.
Grading (UTQG): Tire                                                     (D) Construction Code:
manufacturers are required                                               A letter code is used to indicate
to grade tires based on three                                            the type of ply construction
performance factors: treadwear,     (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
                                    The United States version of a       in the tire. The letter R means
traction, and temperature                                                radial ply construction; the
resistance. For more information    metric tire sizing system. The
                                    letter P as the first character in   letter D means diagonal or
see Uniform Tire Quality                                                 bias ply construction; and the
Grading on page 10‑76.              the tire size means a passenger
                                                                         letter B means belted‐bias ply
                                                                         construction.
                                                                               Vehicle Care        10-63

(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of       Accessory Weight: The              Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
the wheel in inches.                 combined weight of optional        tire in which the plies are laid
(F) Service Description: These       accessories. Some examples         at alternate angles less than
characters represent the load        of optional accessories are,       90 degrees to the centerline of
index and speed rating of the        automatic transmission, power      the tread.
tire. The load index represents      steering, power brakes, power      Cold Tire Pressure: The
the load carrying capacity a tire    windows, power seats, and air      amount of air pressure in a tire,
is certified to carry. The speed     conditioning.                      measured in kPa (kilopascal)
rating is the maximum speed a        Aspect Ratio: The relationship     or psi (pounds per square inch)
tire is certified to carry a load.   of a tire's height to its width.   before a tire has built up heat
                                     Belt: A rubber coated layer of     from driving. See Tire Pressure
Tire Terminology and                 cords that is located between      on page 10‑66.
Definitions                          the plies and the tread. Cords     Curb Weight: The weight of a
Air Pressure: The amount             may be made from steel or other    motor vehicle with standard and
of air inside the tire pressing      reinforcing materials.             optional equipment including the
outward on each square inch          Bead: The tire bead contains       maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
of the tire. Air pressure is         steel wires wrapped by steel       and coolant, but without
expressed in psi (pounds per         cords that hold the tire onto      passengers and cargo.
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).    the rim.
10-64     Vehicle Care

DOT Markings: A code molded        Intended Outboard Sidewall :         Maximum Loaded Vehicle
into the sidewall of a tire        The side of an asymmetrical tire,    Weight: The sum of curb
signifying that the tire is in     that must always face outward        weight, accessory weight,
compliance with the U.S.           when mounted on a vehicle.           vehicle capacity weight, and
Department of Transportation       Kilopascal (kPa): The metric         production options weight.
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety         unit for air pressure.               Normal Occupant Weight: The
Standards. The DOT code                                                 number of occupants a vehicle
includes the Tire Identification   Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
                                   tire used on light duty trucks and   is designed to seat multiplied by
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric                                           68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
designator which can also          some multipurpose passenger
                                   vehicles.                            Load Limits on page 9‑14.
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and       Load Index: An assigned              Occupant Distribution :
date of production.                number ranging from 1 to 279         Designated seating positions.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight         that corresponds to the load         Outward Facing Sidewall:
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits    carrying capacity of a tire.         The side of an asymmetrical tire
on page 9‑14.                      Maximum Inflation Pressure:          that has a particular side that
                                   The maximum air pressure to          faces outward when mounted
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight                                             on a vehicle. The side of the
Rating for the front axle. See     which a cold tire can be inflated.
                                   The maximum air pressure is          tire that contains a whitewall,
Vehicle Load Limits on                                                  bears white lettering, or bears
page 9‑14.                         molded onto the sidewall.
                                                                        manufacturer, brand, and/or
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight         Maximum Load Rating:                 model name molding that is
Rating for the rear axle. See      The load rating for a tire at the    higher or deeper than the same
Vehicle Load Limits on             maximum permissible inflation        moldings on the other sidewall
page 9‑14.                         pressure for that tire.              of the tire.
                                                                            Vehicle Care         10-65

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:         Sidewall: The portion of a tire    UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
A tire used on passenger cars      between the tread and the bead.    Grading Standards):
and some light duty trucks and     Speed Rating: An                   A tire information system
multipurpose vehicles.             alphanumeric code assigned         that provides consumers with
Recommended Inflation              to a tire indicating the maximum   ratings for a tire's traction,
Pressure: Vehicle                  speed at which a tire can          temperature, and treadwear.
manufacturer's recommended         operate.                           Ratings are determined by
tire inflation pressure as shown                                      tire manufacturers using
                                   Traction: The friction between     government testing procedures.
on the tire placard. See Tire      the tire and the road surface.
Pressure on page 10‑66 and                                            The ratings are molded into the
                                   The amount of grip provided.       sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑14.                         Tread: The portion of a tire       Tire Quality Grading on
                                   that comes into contact with       page 10‑76.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic       the road.
tire in which the ply cords that                                      Vehicle Capacity Weight:
extend to the beads are laid at    Treadwear Indicators: Narrow       The number of designated
90 degrees to the centerline of    bands, sometimes called wear       seating positions multiplied by
the tread.                         bars, that show across the tread   68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
                                   of a tire when only 1.6 mm         cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire    (1/16 in) of tread remains. See    Limits on page 9‑14.
and upon which the tire beads      When It Is Time for New Tires
are seated.                        on page 10‑72.
10-66     Vehicle Care

Vehicle Maximum Load on the        Notice: Neither tire                The Tire and Loading
Tire: Load on an individual tire   underinflation nor                  Information Label on the
due to curb weight, accessory      overinflation is good.              vehicle indicates the original
weight, occupant weight, and       Underinflated tires, or tires       equipment tires and the correct
cargo weight.                      that do not have enough air,        cold tire inflation pressures. The
Vehicle Placard: A label           can result in:                      recommended pressure is the
permanently attached to a           .   Tire overloading and           minimum air pressure needed to
vehicle showing the vehicle             over-heating which could       support the vehicle's maximum
capacity weight and the                 lead to a blowout.             load carrying capacity.
original equipment tire size        .   Premature or                   For additional information
and recommended inflation               irregular wear.                regarding how much weight
pressure. See “Tire and Loading                                        the vehicle can carry, and an
Information Label” under Vehicle    .   Poor handling.                 example of the Tire and Loading
Load Limits on page 9‑14.           .   Reduced fuel economy.          Information label, see Vehicle
                                                                       Load Limits on page 9‑14. How
Tire Pressure                      Overinflated tires, or tires that   the vehicle is loaded affects
                                   have too much air, can              vehicle handling and ride
Tires need the correct amount      result in:
of air pressure to operate                                             comfort. Never load the vehicle
effectively.
                                    .   Unusual wear.                  with more weight than it was
                                    .   Poor handling.                 designed to carry.
                                    .   Rough ride.                    When to Check
                                    .   Needless damage from           Check the tires once a month
                                        road hazards.                  or more.
                                                                                      Vehicle Care           10-67

How to Check                          If the inflation pressure is low,
                                      add air until the recommended                WARNING (Continued)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check the tire               pressure is reached. If the
                                                                               You could have a crash and you
pressure. Proper tire inflation       inflation pressure in high, press
                                                                               or others could be killed. Some
cannot be determined by               on the metal stem in the center
                                                                               high-speed rated tires require
looking at the tire. Check the tire   of the tire valve to release air.        inflation pressure adjustment for
inflation pressure when the tires     Re‐check the tire pressure with          high speed operation. When
are cold, meaning the vehicle         the tire gauge.                          speed limits and road conditions
has not been driven for at least      Return the valve caps on the             are such that a vehicle can be
three hours or no more than           valve stems to keep out dirt and         driven at high speeds, make sure
1.6 km (1 mi).                        moisture and prevent leaks.              the tires are rated for high speed
                                                                               operation, in excellent condition,
Remove the valve cap from the                                                  and set to the correct cold tire
tire valve stem. Press the tire       Tire Pressure for
                                                                               inflation pressure for the
gauge firmly onto the valve to        High-Speed Operation                     vehicle load.
get the pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure             { WARNING                     If you will be driving your vehicle at
matches the recommended                                                       speeds of 175 mph (282 km/h) or
                                       Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
pressure on the Tire and                                                      higher, where it is legal, set the cold
                                       (100 mph) or higher, puts an
Loading Information Label, no                                                 inflation pressure to the maximum
                                       additional strain on tires.
further adjustment is necessary.       Sustained high-speed driving           inflation pressure shown on the
                                       causes excessive heat build up         tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa),
                                       and can cause sudden tire failure.     whichever is lower. See the
                                                                              example following. When you end
                                                                (Continued)
10-68        Vehicle Care

this high-speed driving, return the      Tire Pressure Monitor                     As an added safety feature, your
tires to the cold inflation pressure                                               vehicle has been equipped with a
shown on the Tire and Loading
                                         System                                    tire pressure monitoring system
Information label. See Vehicle Load      The Tire Pressure Monitor System          (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
Limits on page 9‑14.                     (TPMS) uses radio and sensor              pressure telltale when one or
Example:                                 technology to check tire pressure         more of your tires is significantly
                                         levels. The TPMS sensors monitor          under‐inflated.
You will find the maximum load           the air pressure in your tires and
and inflation pressure molded on                                                   Accordingly, when the low tire
                                         transmit tire pressure readings to a      pressure telltale illuminates, you
the tire's sidewall, in small letters,   receiver located in the vehicle.
near the rim flange. It will read                                                  should stop and check your tires as
something like this: Maximum load        Each tire, including the spare            soon as possible, and inflate them
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)       (if provided), should be checked          to the proper pressure. Driving on
Max. Press.                              monthly when cold and inflated to         a significantly under‐inflated tire
                                         the inflation pressure recommended        causes the tire to overheat and can
For this example, you would set the      by the vehicle manufacturer on the        lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
inflation pressure for high‐speed        vehicle placard or tire inflation         also reduces fuel efficiency and
driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).             pressure label. (If your vehicle has      tire tread life, and may affect the
Racing or other competitive driving      tires of a different size than the size   vehicle's handling and stopping
may affect the warranty coverage         indicated on the vehicle placard or       ability.
of your vehicle. See your warranty       tire inflation pressure label, you
booklet for more information.            should determine the proper tire
                                         inflation pressure for those tires.)
                                                                                           Vehicle Care           10-69

Please note that the TPMS is               malfunctions may occur for a variety     Tire Pressure Monitor
not a substitute for proper tire           of reasons, including the installation
maintenance, and it is the driver's        of replacement or alternate tires or
                                                                                    Operation
responsibility to maintain correct tire    wheels on the vehicle that prevent       This vehicle may have a Tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has      the TPMS from functioning properly.      Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
not reached the level to trigger           Always check the TPMS malfunction        The TPMS is designed to warn
illumination of the TPMS low tire          telltale after replacing one or more     the driver when a low tire pressure
pressure telltale.                         tires or wheels on your vehicle to       condition exists. TPMS sensors are
Your vehicle has also been                 ensure that the replacement or           mounted onto each tire and wheel
equipped with a TPMS malfunction           alternate tires and wheels allow         assembly on your vehicle. The
indicator to indicate when the             the TPMS to continue to function         TPMS sensors monitor the air
system is not operating properly.          properly.                                pressure in the tires and transmits
The TPMS malfunction indicator is          See Tire Pressure Monitor                the tire pressure readings to a
combined with the low tire pressure        Operation on page 10‑69 for              receiver located in the vehicle.
telltale. When the system detects a        additional information.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then          Federal Communications
remain continuously illuminated.           Commission (FCC) and
This sequence will continue upon           Industry Canada
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as            See Radio Frequency Statement on
long as the malfunction exists.            page 13‑19 for information
When the malfunction indicator is          regarding Part 15 of the Federal         When a low tire pressure condition
illuminated, the system may not            Communications Commission (FCC)          is detected, the TPMS illuminates
be able to detect or signal low tire       rules and Industry Canada                the low tire pressure warning light,
pressure as intended. TPMS                 Standards RSS-210/220/310.               located in the instrument cluster.
10-70       Vehicle Care

If the warning light comes on,           The low tire pressure warning light       The TPMS can warn about a low
stop as soon as possible and inflate     may come on in cool weather when          tire pressure condition but it does
the tires to the recommended             the vehicle is first started, and then    not replace normal tire
pressure shown on the tire loading       turn off as the vehicle is driven. This   maintenance. See Tire Inspection
information label. See Vehicle Load      could be an early indicator that the      on page 10‑72, Tire Rotation on
Limits on page 9‑14.                     air pressure is getting low and           page 10‑72, When It Is Time for
A message to check the pressure in       needs to be inflated to the proper        New Tires on page 10‑72, and Tires
a specific tire displays in the Driver   pressure.                                 on page 10‑58.
Information Center (DIC). The low        A Tire and Loading Information            Notice: Tire sealant materials are
tire pressure warning light and the      label shows the size of the original      not all the same. A non-approved
DIC warning message appear at            equipment tires and the correct           tire sealant could damage the
each ignition cycle until the tires      inflation pressure for the tires when     TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
are inflated to the correct inflation    they are cold. See Vehicle Load           damage caused by using an
pressure. Using the DIC, tire            Limits on page 9‑14, for an example       incorrect tire sealant is not
pressure levels can be viewed. For       of the Tire and Loading Information       covered by the vehicle
additional information and details       label and its location. Also see Tire     warranty. Always use only
about the DIC operation and              Pressure on page 10‑66 for                the GM-approved tire sealant
displays see Driver Information          additional information.                   available through your dealer or
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 and Tire                                                 included in the vehicle.
Messages on page 5‑51.
                                                                                        Vehicle Care            10-71

TPMS Malfunction Light and
                                        .   One or more TPMS sensors are        If the TPMS is not functioning
Message                                     missing or damaged. The             properly, it cannot detect or signal a
                                            malfunction light and the DIC       low tire condition. See your dealer
The TPMS will not function properly         message should go off when the      for service if the TPMS malfunction
if one or more of the TPMS sensors          TPMS sensors are installed and      light and DIC message come on
are missing or inoperable. When             the sensor matching process is      and stays on.
the system detects a malfunction,           performed successfully. See
the low tire warning light flashes          your dealer for service.            TPMS Sensor Matching
for about one minute and then stays                                             Process
on for the remainder of the ignition
                                        .   Replacement tires or wheels do
cycle. A DIC warning message also           not match the original equipment    Each TPMS sensor has a unique
displays. The malfunction light and         tires or wheels. Tires and wheels   identification code. The identification
DIC warning message come on at              other than those recommended        code needs to be matched to a new
each ignition cycle until the problem       could prevent the TPMS from         tire/wheel position after replacing
is corrected. Some of the conditions        functioning properly. See Buying    one or more of the TPMS sensors.
that can cause these to come                New Tires on page 10‑73.            The malfunction light and the DIC
on are:                                 .   Operating electronic devices or     message should go off at the next
                                            being near facilities using radio   ignition cycle. The sensors are
.   The TPMS sensor matching                                                    matched to the tire/wheel positions,
    process was not done or not             wave frequencies similar to the
                                            TPMS could cause the TPMS           using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
    completed successfully. The                                                 following order: driver side front tire,
    malfunction light and the DIC           sensors to malfunction.
                                                                                passenger side front tire, passenger
    message should go off after                                                 side rear tire, and driver side rear.
    successfully completing the                                                 See your dealer for service.
    sensor matching process.
10-72      Vehicle Care

Tire Inspection
                                   .   The tread or sidewall is         When It Is Time for New
                                       cracked, cut, or snagged
GM recommends that the tires,          deep enough to show cord or
                                                                        Tires
including the spare tire, if the       fabric.                          Factors such as maintenance,
vehicle has one, be inspected                                           temperatures, driving speeds,
for signs of wear or damage at
                                   .   The tire has a bump, bulge,      vehicle loading, and road conditions
least once a month.                    or split.                        affect the wear rate of the tires.
Replace the tire if:
                                   .   The tire has a puncture, cut,
                                       or other damage that cannot
.   The indicators at three or         be repaired well because of
    more places around the tire        the size or location of the
    can be seen.                       damage.
.   There is cord or fabric
    showing through the tire's     Tire Rotation
    rubber.                        The tires on your vehicle are
                                   different sizes front to rear. Due
                                   to this, the tires should not be
                                   rotated. Each tire and wheel
                                   should be used only in the
                                   position it is in.                   Treadwear indicators are one way to
                                                                        tell when it is time for new tires.
                                                                                        Vehicle Care           10-73

Treadwear indicators appear when         Vehicle Storage                         Buying New Tires
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
                                         Tires age when stored normally          GM has developed and matched
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
                                         mounted on a parked vehicle. Park       specific tires for your vehicle. The
Inspection on page 10‑72 and Tire
                                         a vehicle that will be stored for at    original equipment tires installed on
Rotation on page 10‑72 for more
                                         least a month in a cool, dry, clean     your vehicle, when it was new, were
information.
                                         area away from direct sunlight to       designed to meet General Motors
The rubber in tires ages over time.      slow aging. This area should be         Tire Performance Criteria
This also applies for the spare tire,    free of grease, gasoline, or other      Specification (TPC Spec) system
if the vehicle has one, even if it is    substances that can deteriorate         rating. If you need replacement
never used. Multiple conditions          rubber.                                 tires, GM strongly recommends that
including temperatures, loading                                                  you get tires with the same TPC
                                         Parking for an extended period can
conditions, and inflation pressure                                               Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
                                         cause flat spots on the tires that
maintenance affect how fast aging                                                will continue to have tires that are
                                         may result in vibrations while
takes place. Tires will typically need                                           designed to give the same
                                         driving. When storing a vehicle for
to be replaced due to wear before                                                performance and vehicle safety,
                                         at least a month, remove the tires or
they may need to be replaced due                                                 during normal use, as the original
                                         raise the vehicle to reduce the
to age. Consult the tire                                                         tires.
                                         weight from the tires.
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
10-74        Vehicle Care

GM's exclusive TPC Spec
system considers over a dozen                       { WARNING                             { WARNING
critical specifications that impact
the overall performance of your            Tires could explode during            Mixing tires could cause you to
vehicle, including brake system            improper service. Attempting to       lose control while driving. If you
performance, ride and handling,            mount or dismount a tire could        mix tires of different sizes (other
traction control, and tire pressure        cause injury or death. Only your      than those originally installed on
monitoring performance. GM's TPC           dealer or authorized tire service     your vehicle), brands, or types
Spec number is molded onto the             center should mount or dismount       (radial and bias-belted tires), the
tire's sidewall near the tire size.        the tires.                            vehicle may not handle properly,
If the tires have an all‐season tread                                            and you could have a crash.
design, the TPC Spec number will          Winter tires with the same speed       Using tires of different sizes
be followed by an MS for mud and          rating as your original equipment      (other than those originally
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on       tires may not be available for H, V,   installed on your vehicle), brands
page 10‑61, for additional                W, Y and ZR speed rated tires.         or types, may also cause damage
information.                              If you choose snow tires with a        to your vehicle. Be sure to use
GM recommends replacing tires in          lower speed rating, never exceed       the correct size, brand, and type
sets of four. This is because uniform     the tire's maximum speed capability.   tires on all four wheels.
tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most
like it did when the tires were new.
Replacing less than a full set of tires
can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑72 and
Tire Rotation on page 10‑72.
                                                                                         Vehicle Care           10-75

                                         the proper warning level you would
          { WARNING                      get with TPC Spec rated tires. See                 { WARNING
                                         Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
 Using bias-ply tires on the             page 10‑69.                               If different sized wheels are used,
 vehicle may cause the wheel                                                       there may not be an acceptable
 rim flanges to develop cracks           Your vehicle's original equipment         level of performance and safety
                                         tires are listed on the Tire and          if tires not recommended for
 after many miles of driving.            Loading Information label. See
 A tire and/or wheel could fail                                                    those wheels are selected. This
                                         Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑14,         increases the chance of a crash
 suddenly and cause a crash.             for more information about the Tire
 Use only radial-ply tires with                                                    and serious injury. Only use GM
                                         and Loading Information label and
 the wheels on the vehicle.                                                        specific wheel and tire systems
                                         its location on your vehicle.
                                                                                   developed for the vehicle, and
                                                                                   have them properly installed by
If you must replace your vehicle's       Different Size Tires and                  a GM certified technician.
tires with those that do not have        Wheels
a TPC Spec number, make sure
                                         If wheels or tires are installed that    See Buying New Tires on
they are the same size, load range,
                                         are a different size than the original   page 10‑73 and Accessories and
speed rating, and construction type
                                         equipment wheels and tires, vehicle      Modifications on page 10‑4 for
(radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
                                         performance, including its braking,      additional information.
vehicle's original tires.
                                         ride and handling characteristics,
Vehicles that have a tire pressure       stability, and resistance to rollover
monitoring system could give an          may be affected. If the vehicle has
inaccurate low‐pressure warning          electronic systems such as antilock
if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are          brakes, rollover airbags, traction
installed on it. Non‐TPC Spec            control, and electronic stability
rated tires may give a low‐pressure      control, the performance of these
warning that is higher or lower than     systems can also be affected.
10-76      Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire Quality                (UTQG) system does not apply       Treadwear
Grading                             to deep tread, winter-type snow    The treadwear grade is a
                                    tires, space-saver, or temporary   comparative rating based
Quality grades can be found         use spare tires, tires with
where applicable on the tire                                           on the wear rate of the tire
                                    nominal rim diameters of           when tested under controlled
sidewall between tread shoulder     10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
and maximum section width. For                                         conditions on a specified
                                    or to some limited-production      government test course.
example:                            tires.                             For example, a tire graded
Treadwear 200 Traction AA           While the tires available on       150 would wear one and a
Temperature A                       General Motors passenger cars      half (1½) times as well on the
The following information relates   and light trucks may vary with     government course as a tire
to the system developed by the      respect to these grades, they      graded 100. The relative
United States National Highway      must also conform to federal       performance of tires depends
Traffic Safety Administration       safety requirements and            upon the actual conditions of
(NHTSA), which grades tires         additional General Motors Tire     their use, however, and may
by treadwear, traction, and         Performance Criteria (TPC)         depart significantly from the
temperature performance. This       standards.                         norm due to variations in
applies only to vehicles sold in    All Passenger Car Tires Must       driving habits, service practices
the United States. The grades       Conform to Federal Safety          and differences in road
are molded on the sidewalls of      Requirements In Addition To        characteristics and climate.
most passenger car tires. The       These Grades.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
                                                                                 Vehicle Care           10-77

Traction – AA, A, B, C               tested under controlled              Wheel Alignment and Tire
The traction grades, from            conditions on a specified indoor     Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,     laboratory test wheel. Sustained
                                     high temperature can cause the       The tires and wheels were aligned
and C. Those grades represent                                             and balanced at the factory to
the tire's ability to stop on wet    material of the tire to degenerate
                                                                          provide the longest tire life and best
pavement as measured under           and reduce tire life, and            overall performance. Adjustments to
controlled conditions on             excessive temperature can lead       wheel alignment and tire balancing
specified government test            to sudden tire failure. The grade    will not be necessary on a regular
surfaces of asphalt and              C corresponds to a level of          basis. However, check the
concrete. A tire marked C may        performance which all                alignment if there is unusual tire
have poor traction performance.      passenger car tires must meet        wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
                                     under the Federal Motor Safety       one side or the other. If the vehicle
Warning: The traction grade                                               vibrates when driving on a smooth
assigned to this tire is based on    Standard No. 109. Grades B and
                                     A represent higher levels of         road, the tires and wheels might
straight-ahead braking traction                                           need to be rebalanced. See your
tests, and does not include          performance on the laboratory
                                                                          dealer for proper diagnosis.
acceleration, cornering,             test wheel than the minimum
hydroplaning, or peak traction       required by law. Warning: The
characteristics.                     temperature grade for this tire
                                     is established for a tire that is
Temperature – A, B, C                properly inflated and not
The temperature grades               overloaded. Excessive speed,
are A (the highest), B, and C,       underinflation, or excessive
representing the tire's resistance   loading, either separately or in
to the generation of heat and its    combination, can cause heat
ability to dissipate heat when       buildup and possible tire failure.
10-78       Vehicle Care

Wheel Replacement                     If you need to replace any of your
                                      wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts,              { WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,       replace them only with new GM
cracked, or badly rusted or           original equipment parts. This way,     Replacing a wheel with a used
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming   you will be sure to have the right      one is dangerous. How it has
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and    wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts      been used or how far it has been
wheel nuts should be replaced.        for your vehicle.                       driven may be unknown. It could
If the wheel leaks air, replace it                                            fail suddenly and cause a crash.
(except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired).               { WARNING                     When replacing wheels, use a
                                                                              new GM original equipment
See your dealer if any of these        Using the wrong replacement            wheel.
conditions exist.                      wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Your dealer will know the kind of      nuts can be dangerous. It could       Notice: The wrong wheel can
wheel you need.                        affect the braking and handling       also cause problems with
Each new wheel should have             of the vehicle. Tires can lose air,   bearing life, brake cooling,
the same load-carrying capacity,       and cause loss of control, causing    speedometer or odometer
diameter, width, offset, and be        a crash. Always use the correct       calibration, headlamp aim,
mounted the same way as the one        wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel         bumper height, vehicle ground
it replaces.                           nuts for replacement.                 clearance, and tire clearance to
                                                                             the body and chassis.
                                                                              Vehicle Care           10-79

                                 Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts             Notice: Improperly tightened
       { WARNING                                                       wheel nuts can lead to brake
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or               { WARNING                    pulsation and rotor damage. To
                                                                       avoid expensive brake repairs,
on the parts to which it is       Never use oil or grease on studs     evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
fastened, can make wheel          or the threads of the wheel nuts.    the proper sequence and to the
nuts become loose after a         If you do, the wheel nuts might      proper torque specification.
time. The wheel could come        come loose and the wheel could
off and cause a crash. When       fall off, causing a crash.
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where
the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, a               { WARNING
cloth or a paper towel can be     Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
used, however, use a scraper      tightened wheel nuts can cause
or wire brush to remove all       the wheel to become loose and
rust or dirt.                     even come off. This could lead
                                  to a crash. Be sure to use the
                                  correct wheel nuts. If you have to
                                  replace them, be sure to get new     Tighten the wheel lug nuts firmly in
                                  GM original equipment                a crisscross sequence as shown.
                                  wheel nuts.
10-80      Vehicle Care

Tire Chains                               WARNING (Continued)
                                                                             If a Tire Goes Flat
                                                                             It is unusual for a tire to blow out
         { WARNING                     manufacturer recommends it for        while you are driving, especially if
                                       use on the vehicle and tire size      you maintain the tires properly. If
Do not use tire chains. There is                                             air goes out of a tire, it is much
not enough clearance. Tire chains      combination and road conditions.
                                       Follow that manufacturer's            more likely to leak out slowly. See
used on a vehicle without the                                                Tires on page 10‑58 for additional
proper amount of clearance can         instructions. To help avoid
                                       damage to the vehicle, drive          information. But if you should ever
cause damage to the brakes,                                                  have a blowout, here are a few tips
suspension, or other vehicle           slowly, re‐adjust or remove the
                                                                             about what to expect and what
parts. The area damaged by the         device if it is contacting the
                                                                             to do:
tire chains could cause you to         vehicle, and do not spin the
                                       wheels. If you do find traction       If a front tire fails, the flat tire
lose control of the vehicle and                                              creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
you or others may be injured in        devices that will fit, install them
                                       on the rear tires.                    toward that side. Take your foot off
a crash. Use another type of                                                 the accelerator pedal and grip the
traction device only if its                                                  steering wheel firmly. Steer to
                         (Continued)                                         maintain lane position, and then
                                                                             gently brake to a stop, well off the
                                                                             road, if possible.
                                                                                         Vehicle Care           10-81

A rear blowout, particularly on a       The vehicle, when new, had run-flat
curve, acts much like a skid and        tires. This type of tire can operate                { WARNING
may require the same correction         effectively with no air pressure, so
you would use in a skid. In any rear    you will not need to stop on the           Special tools and procedures
blowout remove your foot from the       side of the road to change a flat tire.    are required to service a run-flat
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle      You can just keep on driving. The          tire. If these special tools and
under control by steering the way       shorter the distance you drive and         procedures are not used you or
you want the vehicle to go. It may      the slower the speed, the greater          others could be injured and the
be very bumpy and noisy, but you        the chance that the run-flat tire will     vehicle could be damaged.
can still steer. Gently brake to a      not have to be replaced. Run-flat          Always be sure the proper tools
stop, well off the road, if possible.   tires perform so well without any air      and procedures, as described in
The vehicle has no spare tire, no       that a Tire Pressure Monitor System        the service manual, are used.
tire changing equipment, and no         (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire
place to store a tire.                  has lost pressure. See Run-Flat
                                                                                  To order a service manual, see
                                        Tires on page 10‑59 and Tire
                                                                                  Service Publications Ordering
                                        Pressure Monitor System on
                                                                                  Information on page 13‑15.
                                        page 10‑68.
10-82        Vehicle Care

Jump Starting                       Notice: If you try to start your
                                    vehicle by pushing or pulling it,
                                                                             vehicle, and the bad grounding
                                                                             could damage the electrical
For more information about the      you could damage your vehicle.           systems.
vehicle battery, see Battery on     Do not push or pull your vehicle         To avoid the possibility of the
page 10‑43.                         to start it; instead, use the jump       vehicles rolling, set the parking
If your battery has run down, you   starting procedure in this manual        brake firmly on both vehicles
may want to use another vehicle     to start your vehicle when the           involved in the jump start
and some jumper cables to start     battery has run down.                    procedure. Put an automatic
your vehicle. Be sure to use the    1. Check the other vehicle. It must      transmission in P (Park) or a
following steps to do it safely.       have a 12-volt battery with a         manual transmission in Neutral
                                       negative ground system.               before setting the parking
           { WARNING                Notice: Only use a vehicle that          brakes.
                                    has a 12-volt system with a           Notice: If the radio or other
 Batteries can hurt you. They can   negative ground for jump              accessories are left on during the
 be dangerous because:              starting. If the other vehicle does   jump starting procedure, they
  .   They contain acid that can    not have a 12-volt system with a      could be damaged. The repairs
      burn you.                     negative ground, both vehicles        would not be covered by the
                                    can be damaged.                       warranty. Always turn off the
  .   They contain gas that can
                                    2. Get the vehicles close enough      radio and other accessories when
      explode or ignite.
                                       so the jumper cables can reach,    jump starting the vehicle.
  .   They contain enough
                                       but be sure the vehicles are not
      electricity to burn you.
                                       touching each other. If they
 If you do not follow these steps      are, it could cause a ground
 exactly, some or all of these         connection you do not want. You
 things can hurt you.                  would not be able to start your
                                                                                   Vehicle Care          10-83

3. Turn off the ignition on both                                               The remote negative (−)
   vehicles. Unplug unnecessary                                                terminal (B) is located
   accessories plugged into the                                                underneath the engine cover,
   cigarette lighter or the accessory                                          below the engine oil fill cap.
   power outlet. Turn off the radio                                            See Engine Compartment
   and all lamps that are not                                                  Overview on page 10‑10 for
   needed. This will avoid sparks                                              the location of the engine
   and help save both batteries.                                               compartment fuse block and
   And it could save the radio!                                                engine oil fill cap.
4. Open the hoods and locate the                                               You will not need to access the
   positive (+) and negative (−)                                               battery for jump starting. The
   terminal locations on each                                                  remote terminals are for that
   vehicle.                             6.2 L LS3 shown, 7.0 L LS7 and
                                                                               purpose.
                                                6.2 L LS9 similar
                                         Your vehicle has a remote
                                         positive (+) terminal (A) and a
                                                                                     { WARNING
                                         remote negative (−) terminal (B),   An electric fan can start up even
                                         as shown in the illustration,       when the engine is not running
                                         which should be used to jump        and can injure you. Keep hands,
                                         start your vehicle.                 clothing and tools away from any
                                         The remote positive (+)             underhood electric fan.
                                         terminal (A) can be accessed
                                         by opening the cover of the
                                         engine compartment fuse block.
10-84       Vehicle Care

                                                                                       too. And do not connect the
          { WARNING                                 { WARNING                          negative (−) cable to the
                                                                                       negative (−) terminal on the dead
Using an open flame near a                 Fans or other moving engine                 battery because this can cause
battery can cause battery gas to           parts can injure you badly. Keep            sparks.
explode. People have been hurt             your hands away from moving
doing this, and some have been             parts once the engine is running.        6. Connect the red positive (+)
blinded. Use a flashlight if you                                                       cable to the positive (+) terminal
need more light.                                                                       of the dead battery. Use a
                                          5. Check that the jumper cables do           remote positive (+) terminal if
Be sure the battery has enough               not have loose or missing                 the vehicle has one.
water. You do not need to add                insulation. If they do, you could
                                             get a shock. The vehicles could        7. Do not let the other end touch
water to the battery installed in                                                      metal. Connect it to the
your new vehicle. But if a battery           be damaged too.
                                                                                       positive (+) terminal of the
has filler caps, be sure the right           Before you connect the cables,            good battery. Use a remote
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,      here are some basic things you            positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
add water to take care of that               should know. Positive (+) will go         has one.
first. If you do not, explosive gas          to positive (+) or to a remote
could be present.                            positive (+) terminal if the vehicle   8. Now connect the black
                                             has one. Negative (−) will go to a        negative (−) cable to the
Battery